Technical Information

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual

Software Release R2.16.1.x 800 and 1900 Mhz CDMA

English Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

Notice
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others. It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.

Copyrights
This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe copyrighted Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola material contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be copied, reproduced, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.

Usage and Disclosure Restrictions

License Agreement
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.

Copyrighted Materials
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.

High Risk Activities

Components, units, or third-party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-tolerant and are NOT designed, manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail-safe controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life Support, or Weapons Systems (High Risk Activities). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

Trademarks
and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers products or services profiled herein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies. Copyright 2003 Motorola, Inc. Printed on Recyclable Paper REV012501

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual

Table of Contents
. . .

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Table of Contents Contents

68P09255A57-O

FCC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCC Part 15 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCC Part 68 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xi xi xi xii xiii xv xvii

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Scope and Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assumptions and Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why optimize? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is optimization? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What happens during optimization? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Optimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodic Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repaired Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF computer and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications system analyzer CDMA/analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Documents and Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard and Non-standard Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Cabinet configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal RF Cabinet components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal RF Cabinet Assemblies and FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Power Cabinet FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-CCP Cage Configuration and 1X Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBX-1X and BBX2 Interchangeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-7 1-7 1-9 1-11 1-13 1-13 1-13 1-14 1-14 1-16 1-16 1-17 1-18 1-19 1-24 1-25 1-27 1-27 1-28

Chapter 2 Power Up Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminary Operations: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii

2-1
2-2
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Table of Contents
2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-11 2-13 2-13 2-14 2-15

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cellsite Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDF/NECF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Equipage Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Installation of Boards/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Frame C-CCP Shelf Configuration Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-Power-up Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking for shorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Inspection and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Power Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Cabinet Power Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-DC Power-up test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Cabinet Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charge Test (Connected Batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discharge Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Exchanger Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3 Optimization/Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to Optimization and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization Process Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell-site Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDF/NECF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS System Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Equipage Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Packet BTS files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Features and Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF File Structure Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Home Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NECF Filename Conventions and Directory Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Operating System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy BTS and CBSC CDF (or NECF) Files to the LMF Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span Lines - Interface and Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1/E1 Span Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1/E1 Span Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Channel Service Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF to BTS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connect the LMF to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic LMF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The LMF Display and the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical User Interface Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jan 2003

3-1
3-2 3-2 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-13 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-16 3-18 3-22 3-22 3-23 3-23 3-24 3-24
iii

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Table of Contents

68P09255A57-O 3-25 3-30 3-31 3-34 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-40 3-40 3-40 3-40 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-47 3-48 3-48 3-48 3-49 3-50 3-50 3-51 3-56 3-58 3-58 3-58 3-59 3-59 3-60 3-62 3-62 3-62 3-66 3-69 3-75 3-77 3-77 3-77 3-78 3-78 3-79 3-80 3-81 3-82 3-83 3-83 3-86 3-87 3-88 3-88 3-88
Jan 2003

Understanding GUI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Line Interface Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging into a BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishing an MMI Communication Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify GLI ROM Code Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting CSM Clock Source and Enabling CSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM System Time - GPS & LFR/HSO Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Synchronization Manager System Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM Frequency Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LORAN-C Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment GPIB Address Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Connection Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Cable Calibration Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set-up for TX Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set-up for Optimization/ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX ATP Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Set Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Procedures Included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Cables Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Cabling using Communications System Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrate Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Cable Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting TX Coupler Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Table of Contents
3-88 3-88 3-89 3-92 3-92 3-93 3-94 3-95 3-97 3-98 3-98 3-98 3-101 3-103 3-104 3-104 3-104 3-105 3-108 3-108 3-109 3-110 3-111 3-112 3-114 3-115 3-115 3-115 3-116 3-116 3-116 3-117 3-117 3-117 3-119 3-121 3-122

When to Calibrate BLOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLO Calibration Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup for RF Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit (TX) Path Calibration Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Calibration and the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download BLO Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Audit Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit (TX) Path Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Audit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Cal/Audit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create CAL File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Set-up and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and Setting RFDS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS TSU NAM Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of Parameters Used When Programming the TSU NAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valid NAM Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Antenna Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set RFDS Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program TSU NAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Reporting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Testing Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Exchanger Alarm Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Fail Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectifier Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Over Temperature Alarm (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4 Automated Test Procedures (ATP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduced ATP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Test Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Test Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX/RX OUT Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDMA 2000 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background: Tx Mask Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background: Rho Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background: Pilot Offset Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background: Code Domain Power Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jan 2003

4-1
4-2 4-2 4-2 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-5 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-7 4-9 4-9 4-10
v

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Table of Contents

68P09255A57-O 4-11 4-13 4-13 4-13

Background: FER Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 Prepare to Leave the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initializing Active Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Test Equipment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset All Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating BTS CAL LMF Files in the CBSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Site Span Configuration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set BTS Site Span Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reestablish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1
5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-4 5-5 5-7 5-7 5-7

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Log into Cell-Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate to Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot ENABLE Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward link problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Txmask Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-FER Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Problem Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No GPS Reference Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checksum Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Bad RX Message Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM Reference Source Configuration Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-CCP Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Control Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All tests fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All RX and TX paths fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All tests fail on a single antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Status Combs All Modules (except GLI, CSM, BBX2, MCC8/24E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi

6-1
6-2 6-2 6-2 6-3 6-3 6-4 6-4 6-5 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-7 6-8 6-8 6-8 6-9 6-9 6-9 6-9 6-9 6-10 6-10 6-10 6-10 6-11 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-15 6-16 6-16 6-17 6-17 6-17 6-18 6-18
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Table of Contents
6-18 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-23 6-24 6-24

CSM LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI2 LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI3 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBX LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCC LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span Problems (No Control Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix A System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Operation Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verification of Test Equipment Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-Power and Initial Power Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Optimization Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LFR Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA IM Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3-Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 6-Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-CCP Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-1
A-2 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-8 A-9 A-10 A-15 A-17 A-17 A-18 A-18 A-19

Appendix B PN Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-1
B-2 B-2 B-2

Appendix C ATP Matrix Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Re-optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-1
C-2 C-2 C-2

Appendix D BBX Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BBX Gain Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage & Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-1
D-2 D-2

Appendix E CDMA Operating Frequency Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Channel Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900 MHz PCS Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 MHz CDMA Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-1
E-2 E-2 E-2 E-3 E-4 E-5

Appendix F Test Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jan 2003

F-1
F-2 F-2
vii

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Table of Contents

68P09255A57-O F-3 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 F-8 F-9 F-10 F-11 F-12 F-13 F-14 F-14 F-14 F-18 F-18 F-19 F-19 F-19 F-22 F-22 F-23 F-24 F-28 F-31 F-33

Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8935 Series E6380 (formerly HP 8935) Test Set GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hewlett Packard HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Communications Test Set GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232 GPIB Interface Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8921A Test Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8921A System Connectivity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Setup for HP8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Setup for HP8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R3465 GPIB Address & Clock setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Cable Setup using HP PCS Interface (HP83236) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix G Downloading ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Downloading ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exception Procedure - Downloading ROM Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G-1
G-2 G-2

Appendix I Cable Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Intra-Cabinet Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SC 4812ET Intra-Cabinet Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-CCP Cables and Cable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Cabinet LPA Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPAC Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETIB Cables and Cable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPAN I/O Cable Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRDC/TRDC Cables and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPC Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Cabling Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Pair Punchblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Cabinet Parts Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-1
H-2 H-2 H-5 H-8 H-12 H-13 H-14 H-16 H-21 H-23 H-25 H-28 H-32

Appendix J Power Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Delta Calibration Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii

I-1
I-2 I-2 I-2 I-2
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Table of Contents
I-3 I-4 I-7 I-9 I-11

HP8921A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8935 Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix K Companion Frame Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimizing the Companion Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimizing the TX section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimizing the RX section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J-1
J-2 J-2 J-3

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

ix

Table of Contents List of Figures

68P09255A57-O

Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-2: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-3: RF Cabinet Internal Assemblies and FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-4: SC 4812ET C-CCP Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-5: SC 4812ET Intercabinet I/O Detail (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-6: SC 4812ET I/O Plate Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-7: RFDS Location in an SC 4812ET RF Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-8: Power Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-9: Power Cabinet with Batteries Installed (Doors Removed for Clarity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-10: SC4812ET LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1: 800 MHz Configuration Switch Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-3: AC Load Center Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-4: Meter Alarm Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-5: Temperature Compensation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-6: RF Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel and 27 Vdc Terminal Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-7: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-8: Power Cabinet Circuit Breaker Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-9: Power Cabinet AC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-10: Power Cabinet DC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-1: LMF Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-2: Rear and Front View of the CSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-3: 50 Pair Punch Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-4: LMF Connection Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-5: BTS Login screen - identifying circuit and packet BTS files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-6: Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs) state of a packet mode SC4812T . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-7: Available packet mode commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-8: Packet mode site with MCC-1 and BBX-1 under LMF control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-9: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-10: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-11: CSM MMI Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-12: IS-95A/B Cable Calibration Test Setup CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-13: IS-95A/B and CDMA 2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-14: CDMA2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup Agilent 8935/E4432B and Agilent E7495A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup - CyberTest (IS-95A/B) and Agilent 8935 (IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup - Using Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-17: TX Calibration Test Setup - Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567 (IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x

1-8 1-17 1-19 1-20 1-22 1-22 1-23 1-24 1-25 1-30 2-3 2-4 2-6 2-7 2-7 2-12 2-15 2-16 2-17 2-18 3-7 3-17 3-18 3-22 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-37 3-38 3-51 3-63 3-64 3-65 3-66 3-67 3-68
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Table of Contents
3-69 3-70 3-71 3-72 3-73 3-74 3-75 3-76

Figure 3-18: IS-95A/B Opto/ATP Test Set-up, TRDC Shown-CyberTest & Advantest R3465 . . . Figure 3-19: IS-95A/B Optimization/ATP Test Setup - HP 8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-20: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs Agilent Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-21: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-22: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs Agilent Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-23: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs - Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment, Agilent E7495A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-24: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with and without RFDS) . . . Figure 3-25: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with or without RFDS) . . .

Figure 3-26: Cal Setup for TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer . 3-84 Figure 3-27: Cal Setup for Non-Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer 3-85 Figure 3-28: Battery Over-temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-29: Location of Connector J8 on the Meter Alarm Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-1: MGLI3/SGLI3 MMI Port Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-3: GLI3 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-4: MCC24/8E Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure E-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation). Figure F-1: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-2: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-3: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-4: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-5: HP8935 Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-6: HP8921A and HP83236A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-7: R3465 Communications Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-8: HP437 Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-9: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-10: RS232 GPIB Interface Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-11: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium . . Figure F-12: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium . . . . . . . . Figure F-13: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-14: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-15: Agilent 10 MHz Reference Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-16: Cable CalibrationUsing HP8921 with PCS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jan 2003

3-120 3-121 4-8 4-11 5-5 6-19 6-21 6-22 6-24 E-2 E-4 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 F-8 F-9 F-11 F-12 F-13 F-15 F-17 F-20 F-21 F-23 F-27
xi

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Table of Contents

68P09255A57-O F-30 F-31 F-33 H-4 H-6 H-7 H-8 H-9 H-10 H-11 H-12 H-13 H-15 H-17 H-18 H-19 H-20 H-22 H-23 H-25 H-27 H-32 I-4 I-4 I-6 I-7 I-8 I-8 I-11 I-11 I-13 I-14 J-2 J-4

Figure F-17: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-18: Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-19: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-1: 4812ET RF Cabinet Internal FRU Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-2: C-CCP Shelf Cable Numbers and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-3: C-CCP Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-4: LPAs for the SC 4812ET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-5: BTS Combiner to LPA Backplane Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-6: Combiner to LPA Backplane/LPA Backplane To CIO Board Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-7: Components Located on CIO Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-8: LPAC Interface Board Connectors and Attaching Cable Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-9: ETIB I/O Connectors and Attaching Cable Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-10: SPAN I/O Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-11: 3 Sector, 2 Carrier BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-12: BTS 2 to 1, 3 or 6 Sector Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-13: BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-14: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-15: DRDC To C-CCP Cage MPC Boards Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-16: RFDS Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-17: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC RFDS Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-18: 50 Pair Punchblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-19: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet Parts Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-1: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP437B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-2: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-3: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to HP437B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-4: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-5: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP437B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-6: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-7: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to HP437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-8: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-9: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-10: IS-95 A/B/C Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure J-1: Cabling of SC 4812ET Companion BTS to SC 4812ET Companion BTS (3 Sector) . Figure J-2: WinLMF Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xii

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Table of Contents List of Tables

FCC Part 68 Registered Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-2: Abbreviations and Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-3: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-4: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-5: BTS Sector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-6: Sector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-3: AC Voltage Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-4: Applying AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-5: Power Cabinet Power Up Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-6: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-7: RF Cabinet Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-8: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-9: Battery Discharge Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-10: Heat Exchanger Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-1: Installing LMF using CD ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-2: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the LMF Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-3: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-4: T1/E1 Span Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-5: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-6: LMF to BTS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-12: Pinging the Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-13: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-14: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-15: Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-16: Select CSM Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-17: Enable CSMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-18: Enable MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-19: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-21: LORAN-C Initialization/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-22: IS-95A/B-only Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jan 2003

viii 1-9 1-14 1-18 1-18 1-28 1-29 2-3 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-11 2-13 2-14 2-15 3-10 3-11 3-13 3-15 3-19 3-22 3-31 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-39 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-46 3-47 3-50 3-52 3-56 3-60
xiii

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Table of Contents

68P09255A57-O 3-61 3-79 3-80 3-81 3-83 3-84 3-85 3-86 3-87 3-89 3-90 3-92 3-95 3-97 3-99 3-101 3-103 3-105 3-108 3-109 3-110 3-111 3-112 3-113 3-114 3-116 3-116 3-116 3-117 3-117 3-117 3-118 3-118 3-119 3-119 3-121 3-122 4-7 4-13 5-2 5-2
Jan 2003

Table 3-23: CDMA2000 1X/IS-95A/B Test Equipment Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-25: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-26: Test Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-27: Cable Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-28: Calibrating TX/Duplexed RX Cables Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer . Table 3-29: Calibrating Non Duplexed/RX Cables Using a Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer Table 3-30: Setting Cable Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-31: Setting Coupler Loss Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-32: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-33: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-34: Set Up Test Equipment for RF Path Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-35: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-36: Download BLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-37: BTS TX Path Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-38: All Cal/Audit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-39: Create CAL File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-40: RFDS Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-41: Definition of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-42: Valid NAM Field Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-43: Set Antenna Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-44: Set RFDS Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-45: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-46: RFDS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-47: Program NAM Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-48: Alarm Testing Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-49: Heat Exchanger Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-50: Door Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-51: AC Fail Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-52: Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-53: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-54: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-55: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-56: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-57: Battery Over Temperature Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-58: Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-59: Check Before Leaving the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-2: Generate an ATP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Table of Contents
5-3 5-4 5-5 5-7 5-7 6-2 6-3 6-3 6-4 6-4 6-5 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-7 6-8 6-8 6-8 6-9 6-9 6-13 6-13 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-15 6-15 6-16 6-16 6-17 6-17 6-24 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-8
xv

Table 5-3: Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-6: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-7: Terminate the LMF Session and Remove the LMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-7: LPA Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure . . . . . . . Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-16: No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-17: No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-18: MGLI Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-19: MGLI Control Good - No Control over AMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-20: MGLI Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-21: BBX Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-22: No MCC-1X/MCC24E/MCC8E Channel Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-25: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-26: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation - All RX and TX paths fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail on single antenna path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-29: Troubleshooting Control Link Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-2: Site Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-3: Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A3a: Pre-power Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A3b: Pre-power Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Table of Contents

68P09255A57-O A-9 A-10 A-11 A-12 A-15 A-17 A-17 A-18 B-3 C-3 D-2 E-3 E-5 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-7 F-8 F-9 F-10 F-11 F-12 F-14 F-16 F-18 F-18 F-19 F-19 F-22 F-22 F-24 F-28 F-31 F-33 G-3 H-2 H-23 H-24 H-28 I-3 I-5
Jan 2003

Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-and 4-Carrier Non-adj Channels) . . . . . Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 2-Carrier Adjacent Channels) . . . . . . . . . . Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels) . . . . . . Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels) . . . . . . Table A-11: TX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-12: RX Antenna VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-13: CDI Alarm Input Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table C-1: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-1: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-2: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-3: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-5: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-7: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-8: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-9: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-10: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium Table F-11: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium . . Table F-12: System Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-13: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-14: Pretest Setup for HP8921A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-15: Pretest Setup for HP8935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-16: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-17: Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-18: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-19: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-20: Power Meter Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-21: Calibrate Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-1: SC4812ET RF CABINET INTER-CONNECT CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-2: SC 4812ET Series 3-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table . . . Table H-3: SC 4812ET Series 6-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table . . . Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Table of Contents
I-7 I-9 I-15 J-2 J-3 J-3 J-3

Table I-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-5: In-Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table J-1: Optimizing the TX section of the Companion Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table J-2: Optimizing the RX (Main) section of the Companion Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table J-3: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Single Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table J-4: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Two Frame Companion Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

xvii

FCC Requirements

68P09255A57-O

FCC Requirements
Content
This section presents Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules Parts 15 and 68 requirements and compliance information for the SCt4812T/ET/ET Lite series Radio Frequency Base Transceiver Stations.

FCC Part 15 Requirements

Part 15.19a(3) - INFORMATION TO USER
NOTE

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Part 15.21 - INFORMATION TO USER

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola could void your authority to operate the equipment.

15.105(b) - INFORMATION TO USER

NOTE

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: S Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

S Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. S Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.

S Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for

help.

xviii

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

FCC Requirements

FCC Part 68 Requirements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules. A label on the GLI3 board, easily visible with the board removed, contains the FCC Registration Number for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. FCC Part 68 Registered Devices Device Group Line Interface (GLI3) See Note Cisco Model 1900-27 Router ADC KENTROX Model 537 FCC Part 68 ID US: IHEXDNANGLI3-1X US: 5B1DDNDN0006 US: F81USA-31217-DE-N

NOTE
The BTS equipment is always equipped with the GLI3, < US: IHEXDNANGLI3-1X>, and may be used in conjunction with one or both of the listed registered CSU devices, or another registered CSU device not listed above. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of your T1. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice so that you can modify your equipment as required to maintain uninterrupted service. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. If you experience trouble operating this equipment with the T1, please contact: Global Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC) 1501 W. Shure Drive, 3436N Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004 Phone Number: (847) 632-5390 for repair and/or warranty information. You should not attempt to repair this equipment yourself. This equipment contains no customer or user-serviceable parts. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola could void your authority to operate this equipment.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

xix

Foreword

68P09255A57-O

Foreword
Scope of manual This manual is intended for use by cellular telephone system craftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular system equipment and ancillary devices. This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement or enhance the knowledge gained through such training. Obtaining Manuals To view, download, order manuals (original or revised), visit the Motorola Lifecycles Customer web page at http://services.motorola.com, or contact your Motorola account representative. If Motorola changes the content of a manual after the original printing date, Motorola publishes a new version with the same part number but a different revision character. Text conventions The following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point out information that must be read. This information may be set-off from the surrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters. The three categories of these special paragraphs are:
NOTE

Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that you can use. Bold-text notes indicate information to help you avoid
an undesirable situation or provides additional information to help you understand a topic or concept.

CAUTION

Presents information to identify a situation in which equipment damage could occur, thus avoiding damage to equipment. Presents information to warn you of a potentially hazardous situation in which there is a possibility of personal injury.

WARNING

The following typographical conventions are used for the presentation of software information:

S In text, sans serif BOLDFACE CAPITAL characters (a type style

without angular strokes: i.e., SERIF versus SANS SERIF) are used to name a command.

S In text, typewriter style characters represent prompts and the

system output as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.

S In command definitions, sans serif boldface characters represent those

parts of the command string that must be entered exactly as shown and typewriter style characters represent command output responses as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.

S In the command format of the command definition, typewriter

style characters represent the command parameters.
xx

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Foreword

Reporting manual errors To report a documentation error, call the CNRC (Customer Network Resolution Center) and provide the following information to enable CNRC to open an MR (Modification Request): - the document type - the manual title, part number, and revision character - the page number(s) with the error - a detailed description of the error and if possible the proposed solution Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our manuals. Contact us Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to the email address below: [email protected] Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our information. Manual banner definitions A banner (oversized text on the bottom of the page, for example, PRELIMINARY) indicates that some information contained in the manual is not yet approved for general customer use. 24-hour support service If you have problems regarding the operation of your equipment, please contact the Customer Network Resolution Center for immediate assistance. The 24 hour telephone numbers are: NA CNRC EMEA CNRC ASPAC CNRC Japan & Korea CNRC LAC CNRC +1-800-433-5202 +44- (0) 1793-565444 +86-10-88417733 +81-3-5463-3550 +51-1-212-4020

For further CNRC contact information, contact your Motorola account representative.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

xxi

General Safety

68P09255A57-O

General Safety
Remember! . . . Safety depends on you!! The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described in this manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements. The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangers of which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should follow these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe operation of the equipment in your operating environment. Ground the instrument To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must be connected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with a three-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either plugged into an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a three-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contact adapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack and mating plug of the power cable must meet International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety standards.
NOTE

Refer to Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio Installations 68P81150E62.

Do not operate in an explosive atmosphere Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard. Keep away from live circuits Operating personnel must:

S not remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service

Personnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may remove equipment covers for internal subassembly, or component replacement, or any internal adjustment.

S not replace components with power cable connected. Under certain

conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable removed.

S always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.

Do not service or adjust alone Do not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person, capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
xxii

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

General Safety

Use caution when exposing or handling the CRT Breakage of the Cathode-Ray Tube (CRT) causes a high-velocity scattering of glass fragments (implosion). To prevent CRT implosion, avoid rough handling or jarring of the equipment. The CRT should be handled only by qualified maintenance personnel, using approved safety mask and gloves. Do not substitute parts or modify equipment Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment. Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained. Dangerous procedure warnings Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safety precautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipment in your operating environment.
WARNING

Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this equipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and adjusting.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

xxiii

Revision History

68P09255A57-O

Revision History
Manual Number
68P09255A57- O

Manual Title 1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x Version Information The following table lists the manual version, date of version, and remarks on the version. Revision bars printed in page margins (as shown to the side) identify material which has changed from the previous release of this publication. Version Level 1 2 O Date of Issue Mar 2002 Jul 2002 Jan 2003 Remarks Preliminary manual submitted for engineering markup LMF software updates. Preliminary manual submitted for DV&V evaluation. Volume Deployment

xxiv

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

Chapter 1

Introduction

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-1

Optimization Manual Scope and Layout 1

68P09255A57-O

Optimization Manual Scope and Layout

Manual Scope and Layout
This document provides information pertaining to the optimization and audit tests of Motorola SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) equipment frames equipped with trunked high-power Linear Power Amplifiers (LPAs) and their associated internal and external interfaces. Also covered is software release 2.16.1.X which supports the following versions of SC 4812ET BTS sites: - 1X Circuit BTS - 1X Packet backhaul BTS The 1X packet BTS has a packet backhaul network interface which is provided via a pair of routers together with a GLI upgrade (GLI3) that can handle voice (IS-95A/B, 1X) and data (IS-95B, 1X). This BTS equipment is configured with all 1X cards (BBX-1X andMCC1X) or a mix of 1X cards and non-1X cards (BBX2 and MCC8E/24E). This configuration is compliant with all applicable cdma2000 1X specifications. It provides the forward link and reverse link RF functions to support 2G features and 3G-1X features (i.e., high capacity voice and high bit rate data). The 1X circuit BTS has a split backhaul (circuit/packet pipe) network interface that can handle circuit based voice (IS-95A/B, 1X) and data (IS-95B) as well as packet based data (1X).

Assumptions and Prerequisites

This document assumes the following prerequisites: The BTS frames and cabling have been installed per the BTS Hardware Installation manual which covers the physical bolt down of the SC 4812ET equipment frames, and the specific cabling configurations.

1-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Optimization Manual Scope and Layout 1

This document covers the following major areas:

Document Composition
S Introduction, consisting of preliminary background information (such
as component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to be considered by the Cell Site Field Engineer (CFE) before optimization or tests are performed.

S Preliminary Operations, consisting of cabinet power up and power

down procedures.

S Optimization/calibration, covering topics of Local Maintenance

Facility (LMF) connection to the BTS equipment, Global Positioning System (GPS) Verification, test equipment setup, downloading all BTS processor boards, RF path verification, Bay Level Offset (BLO) calibration and calibration audit, and Radio Frequency Diagnostic System (RFDS) calibration.

S Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs), consisting of ATP tests executed

by the LMF and used to verify all major transmit (TX) and receive (RX) performance characteristics on all BTS equipment.

S Preparing to leave the site, presents instructions on how to properly

exit customer site, ensure that all equipment is operating properly, and all work is complete according to Motorola guidelines.

S Basic troubleshooting, consisting of procedures for installation,

calibration, transmit and receive tests, backplane problems, GPS failures, and module connectors.

S Appendices include:
Data sheets for CFEs recording at the site Pseudorandom Noise (PN) Offset information Optimization/ATP matrix BBX Gain set point vs BTS output CDMA operating frequency programming information Manual test setup information Downloading ROM and RAM code GPIB addresses RF cabinet interconnect cable information Power Delta calibration procedures Companion Frame optimization/ATP

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-3

Purpose of Optimization 1

68P09255A57-O

Purpose of Optimization
Why optimize?
Proper optimization and calibration assures:

S Accurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site. S Accurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.

What is optimization?
Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normal equipment variations. Cables that interconnect the BTS and Duplexer assemblies (if used), for example, are cut and installed at the time of the BTS frame installation at the site. Site optimization guarantees that the combined losses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics and built-in tolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate, causing improper site operation.

What happens during optimization?

Optimization identifies the accumulated loss (or gain) for all receive and transmit paths at the BTS site, and stores that value in a database.

S The RX path starts at the ancillary equipment frame RFDS RX

directional coupler antenna feedline port, through the RX input port on the rear of the frame, through the DDRCs, Multicoupler Preselector Card (MPC), and additional splitter circuitry, ending at a CDMA Channel Processor (C-CCP) backplane Broad Band Transceiver (BBX) slot in the C-CCP shelf.

S A transmit path starts at the BBX, through the C-CCP backplane slot,
travels through the LPA/Combiner TX Filter and ends at the rear of the input/output (I/O) Panel. If the RFDS option is added, then the TX path continues and ends at the top of the RFDS TX directional coupler antenna feedline port installed in the ancillary equipment frame. These values are factored in by the BTS equipment internally, leaving only site specific antenna feed line loss and antenna gain characteristics to be factored in by the CFE when determining site Effective Radiated Power (ERP) output power requirements. Each C-CCP shelf BBX board is optimized to a specific RX and TX antenna port. (One BBX board acts in a redundant capacity for BBXs 1-12, and is optimized to all antenna ports). A single value is generated for each path, thereby eliminating the accumulation of error that would occur from individually measuring and summing the gain and loss of each element in the path.

1-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

When to Optimize 1

When to Optimize
New Installations
The following operations and optimization/test actions should be accomplished for a new BTS or frame installation: 1. After the initial site installation, it must be prepared for operation. This preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initial power-up, downloading of operating code, verifying GPS operation, and verifying transmit and receive paths. 2. Next, the optimization is performed. Optimization includes performance verification and calibration of all transmit and receive RF paths, and download of accumulated calibration data. 3. A calibration audit of all RF transmit paths may be performed any time after optimization to verify BTS calibration. 4. After optimization, a series of manual pre-Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) verification tests are performed to verify alarm/redundancy performance. 5. After manual pre-ATP verification tests, an ATP is performed to verify BTS performance. An ATP is also required to demonstrate regulation compliance before the site can be placed in service.

Site Expansion
Optimization is required after expansion of a site with additional BTS frames.

Periodic Optimization
Periodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on the requirements of the overall system.

Repaired Sites
Refer to Appendix C for a detailed FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix outlining the minimum tests that must be performed any time a BTS RF subassembly or cable associated with an RF path is replaced.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-5

Required Test Equipment and Software 1

68P09255A57-O

Required Test Equipment and Software

Overview
Test equipment and software described in this section is required for the optimization procedure. Common assorted tools such as screwdrivers and frame keys are also needed. Read the owners manual for all of the test equipment to understand its individual operation before using the tool in the optimization.

Policy
To ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results, test equipment and software meeting the following technical criteria should be used to optimize the BTS equipment. Test equipment can, of course, be substituted with other test equipment models if the equipment meets the same technical specifications.
NOTE

During manual testing, you can, of course, substitute test equipment with other test equipment models not supported by the LMF, but those models must meet the same technical specifications. It is the responsibility of the customer to account for any measurement variances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introduced as a result of these substitutions. Before beginning optimization or troubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment needed is on-hand and operating properly.

Test Equipment Calibration

Optimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipment service and calibration prior to BTS optimization. Follow the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) recommended maintenance and calibration schedules closely.

Test Cable Calibration

Test cables can make critical differences in optimization accuracy. It is recommended that cable calibration be run at every BTS with the complete test equipment set. This method compensates for test cable insertion loss within the test equipment itself. No other allowance for test cable insertion loss needs to be made during the performance of tests. Another method to account for cable loss is by entering it into the LMF during the optimization procedure. This method requires accurate test cable characterization using shop test equipment. Characterized cables should be tagged with the characterization information, and the measured losses entered into the LMF before field optimization.
1-6

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Required Test Equipment and Software 1

After arriving at a site, test equipment should be plugged in and turned on immediately to provide the longest possible time for warm up and stabilization. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed up for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to use for BTS optimization or RFDS calibration:

Equipment Warm-up

S Communications test set. S Rubidium time base. S Power meter.

LMF computer and software

LMF Hardware Requirements
An LMF computer platform that meets the following requirements (or better) is recommended:

S Notebook computer S 266 MHz (32 bit CPU) Pentium processor S MSr Windows 98R Second Edition (SE) or Windows 2000 operating
system

S 4 GB internal hard disk drive S SVGA 12.1-inch active matrix color display with 1024 x 768
(recommended) or 800 x 600 pixel resolution and capability to display more than 265 colors
NOTE

If 800 x 600 pixel resolution is used, the LMF window must be maximized after it is displayed.

S Memory requirements:
- Minimum required RAM: 96 MB - Recommended RAM: --128 MB for Windows 98 SE 256 MB for Windows 2000

S S S S S S

20X CD-ROM drive 3 1/2 inch floppy drive 56kbps V.90 modem Serial port (COM 1) Parallel port (LPT 1) PCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III) with a 10BaseT-to-coax adapter

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-7

Required Test Equipment and Software 1 LMF Software

68P09255A57-O

The Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) application program is a graphical user interface (GUI)-based software tool. This product is specifically designed to provide cellular communications field personnel with the capability to support the following CDMA Base Transceiver Station (BTS) operations:

S S S S

Installation Maintenance Calibration Optimization

Ethernet LAN Transceiver S PCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP Adapter

3COM Model - Etherlink III 3C589B

10BaseT/10Base2 Converter Ethernet LAN transceiver (part of CGDSLMFCPQ1700) S PCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP adapter: 3COM model Etherlink III 3C589B Transition Engineering model E-CX-TBT-03 10BaseT/10Base2 converter
NOTE

Xircom model PE3-10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernet connection to the frame.

RS-232 to GPIB Interface S National Instruments GPIB-232-CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04X

RS232 serial null modem cable (see Figure 1-1) or equivalent; used to interface the LMF to the test equipment.

S Standard RS-232 cable can be used with the following modifications:

- This solution passes only the three minimum electrical connections between the LMF and the GPIB interface. The control signals are jumpered as enabled on both ends of the RS-232 cable (9-pin D). TX and RX signals are crossed as null modem effect. Pin 5 is the ground reference. - Short pins 7 and 8 together, and short pins 1, 4, and 6 together on each connector. Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail
9-PIN D-FEMALE GND RX TX RTS CTS RSD/DCD DTR DSR 5 3 2 7 8 1 4 6 9-PIN D-FEMALE 5 2 3 7 8 1 4 6 GND TX RX RTS CTS RSD/DCD DTR DSR FW00362 Jan 2003

ON BOTH CONNECTORS SHORT PINS 7, 8; SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 6

1-8

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Required Test Equipment and Software Model SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit S Motorola Model TRN9666A null modem board. Connectors on
opposite sides of the board must be used as this performs a null modem transformation between cables. This board can used for 10-pin to 8-pin, 25-pin to 25-pin and 10-pin to 10-pin conversions.

S Motorola 30-09786R01 MMI cable or equivalent ; used to interface

the LMF serial port connection to GLI3, CSM and LPA debug serial ports.

S 25 pin D to 25 pin D serial cable from PC to null modem board.

Communications system analyzer CDMA/analog

Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table Item Test Sets Hewlett Packard, model HP 8921A (with 83203B) Hewlett Packard, model HP 83236A Motorola CyberTest Advantest R3465 (with 3561L) Agilent E4406A (with E4432B) Advantest R3267 Analyzer (with R3562) Agilent 8935 series E6380A (formerly HP 8935) with option 200 or R2K Power Meters Gigatronix 8541C HP437B (with HP8481A sensor) Power meter Power meter with sensor - capable of measuring -30 dBm to 20 dBm A combination of test equipment supported by the LMF may also be used during optimization and testing of the RF communications portion of BTS equipment when the communications system analyzer does not perform all of the following functions: Communications analyzer (includes 83203B CDMA interface option) PCS interface for PCS band Communications analyzer Communications analyzer (with 3561 CDMA option) Communications analyzer (with Generator) Communciations Analyzer with Advantest R3562 Generator Communications test set IS-95A/B only IS-95A/B only IS-95A/B only IS-95A/B only IS-95A/B and CDMA 2000 testing IS-95A/B and CDMA 2000 testing IS-95A/B and CDMA 2000 testing Description Test Capability

S S S S S S

Frequency counter Deviation meter RF power meter (average and code domain) RF signal generator (capable of DSAT/CDMA modulation) Audio signal generator AC voltmeter (with 600-ohm balanced audio input and high impedance input mode)

S Noise measurement meter

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-9

Required Test Equipment and Software 1 S C-Message filter S Spectrum analyzer S CDMA code domain analyzer

68P09255A57-O

GPIB Cables S Hewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; 1 to 2 meters (3 to 6 feet) long

used to interconnect test equipment and LMF terminal.

Timing Reference Cables S Two Huber & Suhner 16MCX/11BNC/K02252D or equivalent; right
angle MCX-male to standard BNC-male RG316 cables; 10 ft. long are required to interconnect the communications system analyzer to SGLN4132A and SGLN1145A CSM board timing references or

S Two BNC-male to BNC-male RG316 cables; 3 meters (10 ft.) long,

used to interconnect the HP8921A/600 or Advantest R3465 communications analyzer to the CSM front panel timing references in the BTS.

S BNC T adapter with 50 ohm termination.

NOTE

This BNC T adapter (with 50 ohm termination) is required to connect between the HP 8921A/600 (or Advantest R3465) EVEN SECOND/SYNC IN and the BNC cable. The BNC cable leads to the 2-second clock connection on the TIB. Erroneous test results may occur if the T adapter with the 50 ohm termination is not connected.

Digital Multimeter S Fluke model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used for
precision DC and AC measurements, requiring 4-1/2 digits.

Directional Coupler S Narda model 30661 30 dB (Motorola part no. 58D09732W01) coupler
terminated with two Narda Model 375BN-M loads, or equivalent.

RF Attenuators S 20 dB fixed attenuators, 20 W (Narda 768-20); used with test cable

calibrations or during general troubleshooting procedures.

S Narda Model 30445 30 dB (Motorola Part No. 58D09643T01) coupler

terminated with two Narda Model 375BN-M loads, or equivalent.

1-10

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Required Test Equipment and Software Miscellaneous RF Adapters, Loads, etc S As required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for
various test set ups. Should include at least two 50 Ohm loads (type N) for calibration and one RF short, two N-type female-to-female adapters.

High-impedance Conductive Wrist Strap S Motorola model 42-80385A59; used to prevent damage from
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) when handling or working with modules.

RF Load (at least three for trunked cabinets) S 100 W non-radiating RF load; used (as required) to provide dummy
RF loading during BTS transmit tests.

RF Network Box (and calibrated cables) S Motorola model SGLN5531A 18:3 Passive Antenna Interface used to
interface test equipment to the BTS receive and transmit antenna inputs during optimization/ATP or general troubleshooting procedures.

Optional Equipment
Frequency Counter S Stanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent. If direct
measurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.

Spectrum Analyzer S Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) or

equivalent; required for tests other than standard Receive band spectral purity and TX LPA IM reduction verification tests performed by the LMF.

Local Area Network (LAN) Tester S Model NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used to
supplement LAN tests using the ohm meter.

Span Line (T1/E1) Verification Equipment S As required for local application RF Test Cable (if not Provided with Test Equipment) S Motorola model TKN8231A; used to connect test equipment to the
BTS transmitter output during optimization or during general troubleshooting procedures.

Oscilloscope S Tektronics model 2445 or equivalent; for waveform viewing, timing,

and measurements or during general troubleshooting procedure.
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-11

Required Test Equipment and Software 1

68P09255A57-O

2-way Splitter S Mini-Circuits model ZFSC-2-2500 or equivalent; provide the

diversity receive input to the BTS

High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard S Stanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent. Required for CSM
and Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO) frequency verification.

1-12

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Required Documents and Related Publications 1

Required Documents and Related Publications

Required Documents
The following documents are required to perform optimization of the cell site equipment:

S Site document (generated by Motorola systems engineering), which

includes: - General site information - Floor plans - Power levels - Site PN - Site paging and traffic channel allocation - Board placement - Site wiring lists - CDF or NECF files (bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf or bts-#.necf and cbsc-#.necf)

S Demarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement) S Equipment manuals for non-Motorola test equipment.

Related Publications
For other information, refer to the following manuals:

S S S S S

CDMA LMF Operators Guide; 68P64114A78 CDMA RFDS Hardware Installation manual; 68P64113A93 CDMA RFDS Users Guide Equipment Manuals for non-Motorola test equipment 1X SC4812ET Field Replacable Units Guide Motorola part number 68P09255A55 number 68P09255A56

S 1X SC 4812ET BTS Hardware Installation Manual Motorola part S LMF CLI Commands R16.X Motorola part number 68P09255A76 S 1X SC 4812T/ET/ET Lite Troublehooting Manual Motorola part
number 68P09255A54

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-13

Terms and Abbreviations 1

68P09255A57-O

Terms and Abbreviations

Standard and Non-standard Terms and Abbreviations
Standard terms and abbreviations used in this manual are defined in Cellular Glossary of Terms and Acronyms; 68P09213A95. Any non-standard terms or abbreviations included in this manual are listed in Table 1-2. Table 1-2: Abbreviations and Acronyms Acronym 1X Definition One of two bandwidths currently defined in the IS-2000 CDMA specification, which extends the capability of the IS-95A and B specifications. 1X bandwidth provides wireless packet voice and data transmission capability at up to 144 Mbps. AC Load Center. Subassembly used in outdoor BTSs which provides the frame interface for external AC power connection and internal AC circuit control and protection. Broad Band Transceiver, 1X. Third generation BBX card with CDMA2000 1X packet as well as IS-95A/B capability. Broadband Transceiver, 2nd Generation supports IS-95A/B Redundant BBX for a CCP shelf or cage. Combined CDMA Channel Processor Clock Combining and Distribution. CCP shelf module which accepts timing signals from the active source and distributes them to other CCP shelf modules. Combiner Input/Output BTS frame configured to operate at the same site with another companion frame. Companion frames may share antenna signals, but are not inter-connected on the same LAN. Companion frames are managed as separate BTSs in the Base Station System. Dual Bandpass Filter Debug Monitor DownLoad Manager. Software application resident on the GLI card which permits download of software upgrades from the Centralized Base Station Controller (CBSC) to BTSs without the need for a site visit. Digital Metering and Alarm Control (also see MAP) Duplexer/RX Filter/Directional Coupler Digital Signal Processor Expansion Multicoupler Preselector Card External Trunked Interface Board Frame Status Indicator Fixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card Ground Fault Connection Interrupt High Stability Oscillator. Module providing backup timing source for a BTS when the timing signal from the GPS or Remote GPS module is unavailable. HSO card, second generation . . . continued on next page
1-14

ACLC BBX-1X BBX2 BBXR C-CCP CCD CIO companion frame

DBPF DBM DLM

DMAC DRDC DSP EMPC ETIB FSI FWTIC GFCI HSO HSO2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Terms and Abbreviations

Table 1-2: Abbreviations and Acronyms

Acronym HSOX

Definition HSO Expansion. Module used in a BTS expansion frame to interface with the starter frame HSO or LFR and distribute the timing signals to the expansion frame CSM modules. Integrated Frame Modem Linear Power Amplifier Controller LOng RAnge Navigational Meter Alarm Panel (also refered to as DMAC) Multichannel CDMA Card supporting 8 IS-95A/B channels. Multichannel CDMA Card supporting 24 IS-95A/B channels. Multichannel CDMA Card supporting 16 or 48 CDMA2000 1X or (with Software Release 2.16.0.84.3 and higher) IS-95A/B channels. Multicoupler Preselector Card Network Element Configuration Baseline Network Element Configuration File Network Element Configuration Journal Object List File. File containing a list of the ROM and RAM code versions which should be operating on every device installed in a BTS. The file is resident on the Central Base Station Controller (CBSC) Mobility Manager (MM) and is passed to the GLI after a DLM job is invoked. The GLI uses the OLF to determine which devices require code download to meet the OLF-specified version. Power Distribution Assembly Remote Global Positioning System (GPS) Distribution. Module which provides distribution of digital timing information to up to four BTS RF modem frames (RFMFs) from a single Remote GPS receiver. Remote Global Positioning System. GPS receiver and signal distribution subsystem which provides digital timing information for up to four BTS RFMFs at a cell site. Remote High-Stability Oscillator. Subsystem which generates and distributes synchronization signals from a single HSO to up to four RF modem frames. Subscriber Unit Assembly Temperature Compensation Panel

IFM LPAC LORAN MAP MCC8E MCC24E MCC-1X MPC NECB NECF NECJ OLF

PDA RGD

RGPS RHSO SUA TCP

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-15

BTS Equipment Identification 1

68P09255A57-O

BTS Equipment Identification

Equipment overview
The major components that make up the Motorola SC 4812ET are illustrated and described in this section. The major components are: RF Cabinet - The SC 4812ET BTS (see Figure 1-2) consists of an RF Cabinet that is an outdoor, weatherized version of the SC 4812T. The RF cabinet is powered by 27 Vdc and each cabinet has the capability to support up to 4 carriers (at 3 sector) or 2 carriers (at 6 sector). The RF Cabinet houses the fan modules, C-CCP, LPA modules, LPA trunking backplane, Bandpass 2:1 and 4:1 Combiners, Duplexer/Receive Filter/Directional Couplers (DRDC) and a DC Power distribution assembly. Power Cabinet - The Power Cabinet (see Figure 1-8) provides +27 Vdc distribution and battery backup for the SC 4812ET. The Power Cabinet houses batteries, battery heaters, rectifiers, an AC Load Center (ACLC), a power distribution assembly, and two duplexed GFCI convenience outlets.

1-16

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

BTS Equipment Identification 1

The SC4812ET RF Cabinet (see Figure 1-2) is available in starter and companion frame configurations. Following are brief descriptions of each 1. Starter - This frame configuration is available with one, two, three and four carriers, with separate antenna sets for each carrier. It can operate as a stand-alone BTS, or can be modified in the field to the companion frame configuration. 2. Companion - This frame configuration is available with up to four carriers. Companion frames share RX signals to provide diversity RX for the opposite frame. Companion frames allow equipping an SC 4812ET site with up to eight carriers. Each companion frame is managed in the Base Station System (BSS) as a separate BTS.

RF Cabinet configurations

Figure 1-2: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet

RF I/O Area Cover Plate Main Door LPA Door (Can only be opened after Main Door is open) Rear DC Conduit Panel Rear I/O Door
FW00189

Rear Conduit Panel

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-17

BTS Equipment Identification 1

68P09255A57-O

Internal RF Cabinet components

C-CCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID Numbers
All cards/modules/boards in the frames at a single site, assigned to a single BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbers dependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer to Table 1-3 and Table 1-4 for specific C-CCP Shelf Device ID numbers. Table 1-3: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf)
Frame # Power Power Power AMR GLI(PS-1) (PS-2) (PS-3) -1 1 1 101 201 301 1 101 201 301 1 101 201 301 1 101 201 301 2 102 202 302 3 103 203 303 Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right) MCC BBX BBX -R 4 104 204 304 5 105 205 305 6 106 206 306 R1 R101 R201 R301 MPC/ EMPC -1 -

4 104 204 304

5 105 205 305

6 106 206 306

1 101 201 301

2 102 202 302

3 103 203 303

Table 1-4: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)

Frame # HSO/ CSM CSM CCD CCD LFR -1 -2 A B 1 101 201 301 1 101 201 301 2 102 202 302 Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right) AMR GLI- 2 -2 2 102 202 302 2 102 202 302 7 8 MCC BBX SW MPC/ EMPC -2 -

10

11

12

10

11

12

107 108 109 110 111 112 107 108 109 110 111 112 207 208 209 210 211 212 207 208 209 210 211 212 307 308 309 310 311 312 307 308 309 310 311 312

1-18

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

BTS Equipment Identification 1

Internal RF Cabinet Assemblies and FRUs

Figure 1-3 shows the location of the internal assemblies and Field Replaceable Units (FRU). A brief description of each item is found in the following paragraphs. Figure 1-3: RF Cabinet Internal Assemblies and FRUs
NOTE

Cabinet doors not shown for clarity.

ETIB

EBA

CCP Fans

RFDS

C-CCP Shelf

5 RU Rack Space

Combiner Cage

OPTIONAL AREA

DC Power Dist.

Punch Block (back)

Circuit Breaker Panel

DRDC

LPA Trunking Backplane

LPAs
FW00163

Duplexer/RX Filter Directional Coupler

The DRDC combines, in a single module, the functions of antenna duplexing, receive band pass filtering, and surge protection (see Figure 1-7).

Combiner Cage (2:1, 4:1, or Band pass Filter)

The Combiner Cage holds the transmit band pass filters, 2:1 combiners, or 4:1 combiners, depending on system configuration.
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-19

BTS Equipment Identification 1

68P09255A57-O

Combined CDMA Channel Processor Shelf

The C-CCP shelf contains the following (see Figure 1-4):

S High Stability Oscillator (HSO) or Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) S S S S S S S S S S S S S

Figure 1-4: SC 4812ET C-CCP Shelf
SC 4812ET RF Cabinet
ETIB RFDS 19 mm Filter Panel EBA

card (1) Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) cards (2) CDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) cards (2) Power Supply cards (2 minimum, 3 maximum) Multicoupler Preselector Cards (MPC) or Expansion Multicoupler Preselector Cards (EMPC) (2) Alarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) cards (2) Multi Channel CDMA (MCC8E, MCC24E or MCC-1X) cards (up to 12) Broadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX-1X) cards (up to 13) Combined Input/Output (CIO) card (1) Group Line Interface (GLI2 or GLI3) cards (2) BBX Switch card (1) Modem (optional) Filler Panels (as required) Fan Module (3)

Power Supply

Power Supply

Power Supply

MPC/EMPC-1

MCC-1

MCC-2

MCC-3

MCC-4

MCC-5

MCC-6

BBX-R

BBX-1

BBX-2

BBX-3

BBX-4

BBX-5

BBX-6

AMR

GLI3

5 RU RACK SPACE

CCD

CIO

CCD

NOTE: MCCs may be MCC8Es, MCC24Es or MCC-1Xs. BBXs may be BBX2s or BBX-1Xs.

MPC/EMPC-2

HSO/LFR

MODEM

MCC-1 1

MCC-10

MCC-12

BBX-10

BBX-1 1

BBX-12

MCC-7

MCC-8

MCC-9

BBX-7

BBX-8

BBX-9

Switch

CSM

CSM

AMR

GLI3

REF FW00304

1-20

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

BTS Equipment Identification Punch Block

The Punch Block is the interface point of the RF Cabinet between the T1/E1 span lines, the Customer I/O, alarms, multi-cabinet timing (RGPS and HSO), and Pilot Beacon control (optional). (see Figure 1-6).

Span I/O Board

The Span I/O Board provides the interface for the span lines from the CSU to the C-CCP backplane (see Figure 1-6).

RF Diagnostic Subsystem
The RFDS provides the capability for remotely monitoring the status of the SC 4812ET RF Transmit and Receive paths (Figure 1-7).

Heat Exchanger
The Heat Exchanger provides cooling to the internal compartment of the RF Cabinet. The fan speed of the heat exchangers adjusts automatically with temperature. The Heat Exchanger is located in the primary front door of the RF Cabinet.

SC 4812ET Interface Board (ETIB) & LPA Control Brd (LPAC)

The ETIB is an interconnect board showing status LEDs for the RF Cabinet, as well as providing secondary surge protection. The LPAC board provides the interface for the LPA connection.

SC 4812ET Trunking Backplane

The Trunking Backplane contains a complex passive RF network that allows RF signals to share the resources of a bank of four LPAs. It also provides DC Power and digital interconnect.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-21

BTS Equipment Identification 1

Figure 1-5: SC 4812ET Intercabinet I/O Detail (Rear View)

68P09255A57-O

RF CABINET (Rear View)

Exp. Punch Block RF Expansion Punch Block Microwave 27V RF GPS 1-3 Sector Antennas RFDS Expansion

27V Ret 4-6 Sector Antennas

LAN 2 Sec Tick 19 MHz Clock

FW00147

RF CABINET (Rear Door closed)

Ground Cable Lugs Expansion 1 Expansion 2

DC Conduit RGPS RFGPS Span/Alarm SPAN I/O Pilot Beacon

Figure 1-6: SC 4812ET I/O Plate Diagram

20 Pair Punchblock
(RGPS) RGD/RGPS

RGD Board

1A

2A

3A

1B

2B

3B

4A

5A

6A

4B

5B

6B

50 Pair Punch Block

(Alarms/Spans)

Microwave RF GPS

Power Input +27V

RF Expansion Ports
1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B A B

LAN
IN OUT

Remote ASU
1

4A

5A

6A

4B

5B

6B 19 MHz Spans Modem Alams

Power Input 27V Ret

Antennas GND Lugs

2 Sec

FW00171

1-22

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

BTS Equipment Identification 1

Figure 1-7: RFDS Location in an SC 4812ET RF Cabinet

FRONT VIEW
(door not shown for clarity) RFDS

WALL MOUNTING BRACKET

DRDC BTS CPLD

ANT CPLD

3B 2B 1B 3A 2A 1A
DRDC CAGE

6B 5B 4B 6A 5A 4A

FW00170

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-23

BTS Equipment Identification 1

68P09255A57-O

Power Cabinet
Figure 1-8 illustrates the Power Cabinet design. Figure 1-8: Power Cabinet

GFCI Outlet Cover

Battery Door

Rear I/O Door

Rear DC Conduit Panel Main Door Rear AC Conduit Panel

FW00193

1-24

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

BTS Equipment Identification 1

Internal Power Cabinet FRUs

Figure 1-9 shows the location of the Internal Field Replaceable Units (FRUs). A brief description of each Internal FRU is found in the following paragraphs.

Figure 1-9: Power Cabinet with Batteries Installed (Doors Removed for Clarity)

Rectifier Alarm Module

Temperature Control Module

Rectifier Shelves Batteries (Battery Heaters located under batteries) GFCI Outlets (Back)

NOTE
Punch Block is not visible in this view.
DC Circuit Breakers

AC Load Center

FW00164

FRONT VIEW POWER CABINET

Batteries
The batteries provide a +27 Vdc backup to the RF Cabinet should AC Power be lost. The Power Cabinet can accommodate a total of 24 12-V batteries, configured in 12 strings of 2 batteries each. The time duration of backup provided depends on system configuration.

Battery Heater
The battery heaters provide heating to the batteries in the Power Cabinet. A separate heater is required for each string of batteries. The heater is a pad the batteries sit on located top of each battery shelf. The number of heaters is dependent on system configuration.
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-25

BTS Equipment Identification 1 Battery Compartment Fan

68P09255A57-O

The battery compartment fan provides air circulation for the two battery compartments. It is located on the inside of the battery compartment door.

Heat Exchanger
The Heat Exchanger provides cooling to the rectifier compartment of the Power Cabinet. The Heat Exchanger is located in the primary front door of the Power Cabinet.

Rectifiers
The +27 Vdc rectifiers convert the AC power supplied to the Power Cabinet to +27 Vdc to power the RF Cabinet and maintain the charge of the batteries.

AC Load Center
The ACLC is the point of entry for AC Power to the Power Cabinet. It incorporates AC power distribution and surge protection.

Punch Block
The Punch Block is the interface for the alarm signalling between the Power Cabinet and the RF Cabinet.

1-26

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

BTS Equipment Identification 1

C-CCP Cage Configuration and 1X Devices

SC4812ET frames have one C-CCP cage (see Figure 1-4) which will support up to 12 MCC cards and 13 BBX cards.

MCC Cards
A BTS may be configured with a mix of MCC-8E, MCC-24E, and MCC-1X cards. Any C-CCP cage MCC card slot will support any of the three MCC types. For 1X capability under R16.0, at least one MCC card must be an MCC-1X which can be installed in any MCC card slot. In a BSS operating with Software Release 2.16.0.84.3 and higher, MCC-1X cards will support IS-95A and B traffic as well as CDMA2000 1X. When operating with Software Release 2.16.0.5x.x, the MCC-1X cards do not support IS-95A/B operation. For additional software release compatibility and capability information, contact the local Motorola account team.

BBX Cards
Up to twelve BBX cards of mixed BBX2s and BBX-1Xs can also be supported. C-CCP cage BBX card slots 1 through 12 are carrier- and sector-dependent. As a result, the BBX slots dedicated to the sectors for one carrier should be populated with the same type of cards. Refer to Table 1-6 for BBX card slot carrier and sector correlations. The C-CCP cage BBX-R card slot is dedicated to the redundant BBX. This slot will support either a BBX2 or a BBX-1X. If a cage has BBX-1X carriers, the redundant BBX (BBXR) must be a BBX-1X card to provide 1X redundancy.

BBX-1X and BBX2 Interchangeability

In a BSS operating with R16.0 software, BBX-1X cards can be used as direct replacements for BBX2 cards; however, different types of BBXs should not be mixed on the same carrier. Therefore, if a BBX2 card is replaced with a BBX-1X, all remaining BBX2 cards for the carrier supported by the replaced card must also be replaced with BBX-1X cards.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-27

Sector Configuration 1

68P09255A57-O

Sector Configuration
There are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-5 outlines the basic requirements. When carrier capacity is greater than two, a 2:1 or 4:1 cavity combiner must be used. For one or two carriers, bandpass filters or cavity combiners may be used, depending on sectorization and channel sequencing. Table 1-5: BTS Sector Configuration Number of carriers 1 2 2 2 2 3,4 3,4 Number of sectors 3 or 6 6 6 3 3 3 3 Channel spacing N/A Non-adjacent Adjacent Non-adjacent Adjacent Non-adjacent Adjacent Filter requirements Bandpass Filter, Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1) Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only) Dual Band Pass Filter Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1) Bandpass Filter Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1) Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)

The matrix in Table 1-6 shows a correlation between the various sector configurations and BBX cards.
NOTE

In Table 1-6, BBXs may be BBX2s or BBX-1Xs.

1-28

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Sector Configuration
Table 1-6: Sector Configurations

Config Ref. No.

Description
3-Sector/2-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with optional 2:1 cavity combiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels. Note that 2:1 cavity combiners are used (6 total).

TX1
BBX-1 N/A

TX2
BBX-2 N/A

TX3
BBX-3 N/A

TX4
N/A BBX-7

TX5
N/A BBX-8

TX6
N/A BBX-9

Carrier#
1 2

6-Sector/2-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity combiners for 6 sectors/2 carriers for non-adjacent channels.

TX1
BBX-1 BBX-7

TX2
BBX-2 BBX-8

TX3
BBX-3 BBX-9

TX4
BBX-4 BBX-10

TX5
BBX-5 BBX-1 1

TX6
BBX-6 BBX-12

Carrier#
1 2

3-Sector/2-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity combiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for non-adjacent channels.

TX1
BBX-1 BBX-7

TX2
BBX-2 BBX-8

TX3
BBX-3 BBX-9

TX4
N/A N/A

TX5
N/A N/A

TX6
N/A N/A

Carrier#
1 2

3-Sector/4-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity combiners for 3 sector/4 carriers for adjacent channels. TX1 TX2
BBX-2 N/A BBX-5 N/A

TX3
BBX-3 N/A BBX-6 N/A

TX4
N/A BBX-7 N/A BBX-10

TX5
N/A BBX-8 N/A BBX-1 1

TX6
N/A BBX-9 N/A BBX-12

Carrier#
1 2 3 4

BBX-1 N/A BBX-4 N/A

3-Sector / 2-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with bandpass filters for 3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels.

TX1
BBX-1 N/A

TX2
BBX-2 N/A

TX3
BBX-3 N/A

TX4
N/A BBX-7

TX5
N/A BBX-8

TX6
N/A BBX-9

Carrier#
1 2

3-Sector/3 or 4-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 4:1 cavity combiners for 3 sectors/3 or 4 carriers for non-adjacent channels. TX1 TX2
BBX-2 BBX-8 BBX-5 BBX-1 1

TX3
BBX-3 BBX-9 BBX-6 BBX-12

TX4
N/A N/A N/A N/A

TX5
N/A N/A N/A N/A

TX6
N/A N/A N/A N/A

Carrier#
1 2 3 4

BBX-1 BBX-7 BBX-4 BBX-10

6-Sector/1-Carrier - The configuration below maps TX with either bandpass filters or 2:1 cavity combiners for 6 sector/1 carrier. TX1
BBX-1

TX2
BBX-2

TX3
BBX-3

TX4
BBX-4

TX5
BBX-5

TX6
BBX-6

Carrier#
1

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

1-29

Sector Configuration 1
Figure 1-10: SC4812ET LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters
2 to 1 Combiner
3 Sector or 6 Sector
Sector Numbering 3 Sector (6 Sector)

68P09255A57-O

4 to 1 Combiner
3 Sector Only

ETIB RFDS

EBA

ETIB RFDS

EBA

C1, S1-S3
(C1, S1-S3)

C1

C2, S1-S3
(C2, S1-S3)

C2 5 RU RACK SPACE

5 RU RACK SPACE C3, S1-S3

(C1, S4-S6)

C3

C4, S1-S3
(C2, S4-S6)

C4

Dual Bandpass Filter

3 Sector 2 Carrier Maximum 6 Sector 1 Carrier Maximum

Sector Numbering 3 Sector (6 Sector)

ETIB RFDS

EBA

C1, S1-S3
(C1, S1-S3)

C2, S1-S3
(C2, S1-S3)

5 RU RACK SPACE C3, S1-S3

(C1, S4-S6)

C4, S1-S3
(C2, S4-S6)

REF. FW00166

1-30

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

Chapter 2

Power Up Procedures

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

2-1

Preliminary Operations: Overview

68P09255A57-O

Preliminary Operations: Overview

Introduction
2
This section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifying module placement, jumper, and dual in-line package (DIP) switch settings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTS application. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures are presented.

Cellsite Types
Sites are configured as Omni, 3-sectored with a maximum of 4 carriers, and 6-sectored with a maximum of 2 carriers. Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.

CDF/NECF
The Configuration Data File (CDF) or Network Element Configuration File (NECF) contains site type and equipage data information and passes it directly to the LMF during optimization. The number of modem frames, C-CCP shelves, BBX boards, MCC boards (per cage), and linear power amplifier assignments are some of the equipage data included in the CDF/NECF.
NOTE

Be sure that the correct bts-#.cdf (or bts-#.necf ) and cbsc-#.cdf files are used for the BTS. These should be the CDF/NECF files that are provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correct CDF/NECF files can cause system errors. Failure to use the correct CDF/NECF files to log into a live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.

Site Equipage Verification

Review the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage data to the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspect and verify the equipment provided for the BTS or Modem frame and ancillary equipment frame.
CAUTION

Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD. After removal, the card/module should be placed on a conductive surface or back into the anti-static bag it was shipped in.

2-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Preliminary Operations: Overview

Initial Installation of Boards/Modules

Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules Step 1 Action Refer to the site documentation and install all boards and modules into the appropriate shelves as required. Verify they are NOT SEATED at this time.

NOTE
On 800 MHz systems, the Switch Card has a configuration switch that must match the site configuration (see Figure 2-1). 2 As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a Serial Number Checklist in the site logbook.

Figure 2-1: 800 MHz Configuration Switch Card

NOTE

Configuration Switch (shown in Figure 2-1) is a feature on the newer versions of the 800 Mhz switch card (some earlier cards do not have the switch). Configuration shown is for 3 Sector BTS. Switch 1 chooses BTS or MF. Switch 4 chooses 3-sector or 6 sector. Switches 2 & 3 are not used.

SHIELDS
5 RU RACK SPACE

J1 J2 J3

Switch Card
J4 J5

Configuration Switch
1 2 3 4 BTS ON MF

3 Sector 6 Sector

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

2-3

Preliminary Operations: Overview

68P09255A57-O

Setting Frame C-CCP Shelf Configuration Switch

If the frame is a Starter BTS, the backplane switch settings behind the fan module should be set to the ON position (see Figure 2-2).

The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to the BTS equipment. Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings

ON OFF

STARTER FRAME

FAN MODULE REMOVED

ON OFF
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1 MODEM_FRAME_ID_0 BOTTOM / TOP RIGHT / LEFT

COMPANION FRAME 1 SETTING

ETIB

EBA

RFDS

SC 4812ET C-CCP SHELF

5 RU RACK SPACE

ON OFF
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1 MODEM_FRAME_ID_0 BOTTOM / TOP RIGHT / LEFT

EXPANSION FRAME 2 SETTING

FW00167

2-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Pre-Power-up Tests

Pre-Power-up Tests
Checking for shorts
The following information is used to check for any electrical short circuits and to verify the operation and tolerances of the cellsite and BTS power supply units before applying power for the first time. It contains instructional information on the initial proper power up procedures for the SC 4812ET power cabinet and RF cabinet. Also presented are tests to be performed on the power cabinet. Please pay attention to all cautions and warning statements in order to prevent accidental injury to personnel.

Required Tools
The following tools are used in the procedures.

S DC current clamp (600 A capability with jaw size to accommodate 2/0

cable).

S Hot Air Gun - (optional for part of the Alarm Verification) S Digital Multimeter (DMM)

Cabling Inspection
Using the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola Systems Engineering, verify that the following cable systems are properly connected:

S Receive RF cabling - up to 12 RX cables S Transmit RF cabling - up to six TX cables

NOTE

For positive power applications (+27 V): S The positive power cable is red.

S The negative power cable is black. (The black power cable is

at ground potential.)

Initial Inspection and Setup

CAUTION

Ensure all battery breakers for unused battery positions are open (pulled out) during any part of the power up process, and remain in the off position when leaving the site.

Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup Step 1 2 Action Verify that ALL AC and DC breakers are turned OFF in both the Power and RF cabinets. Verify that the DC power cables between the Power and RF cabinets are connected with the correct polarity The RED cables connect to the uppermost three (3) terminals (marked +) in both cabinets. Confirm that the split phase 240/120 AC supply is correctly connected to the AC load center input.
CAUTION

Failure to connect the proper AC feed will damage the surge protection module inside the AC load center.
2-5

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Pre-Power-up Tests

68P09255A57-O

AC Power Check
The first task in the power up sequence is to apply AC power to the Power cabinet. Once power is applied a series of AC Voltage measurements is required.

2
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6

Table 2-3: AC Voltage Measurements Action Measure the AC voltages connected to the AC load center (access the terminals from the rear of the cabinet after removing the AC load center rear panel). See Figure 2-3. Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to neutral. This voltage should be in the range of nominally 115 to 120 Vac. Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to ground. This voltage should be in the range of nominally 115 to 120 Vac. Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to neutral. This voltage should be in the range of nominally 115 to 120 Vac. Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to ground. This voltage should be in the range of nominally 115 to 120 Vac. Measure L1 - L2 - should be from 208 to 240 Vac.

CAUTION

If the AC voltages are in excess of 120 V (or exceed 200 V) when measuring between terminals L1 or L2 to neutral or ground, STOP and Do Not proceed until the cause of the higher voltages are determined. The power cabinet WILL be damaged if the Main breaker is turned on with excessive voltage on the inputs.

Figure 2-3: AC Load Center Wiring

G (Ground) L1 (Line 1) N (Neutral) L2 (Line 2)

AC to Pilot Beacon

FW00305

2-6

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

AC Power Up Sequence

AC Power Up Sequence
Applying AC Power
Once AC Voltage Measurements are complete, apply AC power to the Power Cabinet. Table 2-4 provides the procedure for applying AC power. Table 2-4: Applying AC Power Step 1 Action When the input voltages are verified as correct, turn the Main AC breaker (located on the front of the ACLC) ON. Observe that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (see Figure 2-8). Turn Rectifier 1 and Rectifier 2 AC branch breakers (on the AC Load Center) ON. All the installed rectifier modules (see Figure 2-8) will start up and should each have two green LEDs (DC and Power) illuminated. Turn the Meter Alarm Panel module, ON (see Figure 2-4), while observing the K2 contact in the PDA assembly (see Figure 2-10). The contact should close. The Meter Alarm Panel voltage meter should read approximately 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc. Turn the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) ON, (see Figure 2-5). Verify that the Meter Alarm Control Panel does not have any alarm LEDs illuminated. Check the rectifier current bargraph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module). None should be illuminated at this point.
NOTE

4 5

If batteries are fitted, turn on the two battery heater AC breakers on the AC Load Center.

Figure 2-4: Meter Alarm Panel

VOLT VOLT + -

AMP AMPS + PWR OFF ON

FW00245

TEST POINTS

TEST POINTS

FRONT VIEW

Figure 2-5: Temperature Compensation Panel

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION PANEL

1/2 A 250V OFF ON ON

SENSOR SENSE COM 1 2 + -

25_ c

V ADJ

FRONT VIEW
Jan 2003

FW00246

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

2-7

AC Power Up Sequence

68P09255A57-O

Power Cabinet Power Tests

Table 2-5 lists the step-by-step instructions for Power Up Tests. Table 2-5: Power Cabinet Power Up Tests

Step 1

Action Probe the output voltage test point on the Meter Alarm Panel while pressing the 25 C set button on the TCP (see Figure 2-5). The voltage should read 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc. Adjust Master Voltage on Meter Alarm Panel if necessary. Release the TCP 25 C set button. Depending on the ambient temperature, the voltage reading may now change by up to + 1.5 V compared to the reading just measured. If it is cooler than 25_C, the voltage will be higher, and if it is warmer than 25_C, the voltage will be lower. Ensure the RF cabinet 400 A main DC breaker is OFF. Close the three (3) Main DC breakers on the Power Cabinet ONLY. Close by holding in the reset button on the front of the PDA, and engaging one breaker at a time. Measure the voltage between the + and - terminals at the rear of the Power Cabinet and the RF Cabinet, observing that the polarity is correct. The voltage should be the same as the measurement in step 2. Place the probes across the black and red battery buss bars in each battery compartment. Place the probe at the bottom of the buss bars where the cables are connected. The DC voltage should measure the same as the previous step.

3 4 5

2-8

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Pre-DC Power-up test

Pre-DC Power-up test

Before applying any power to the BTS cabinet, verify there are no shorts in the RF or power DC distribution system (see Figure 2-6). Table 2-6: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) Step 1 2 Action Physically verify that all AC rectifiers supplying power to the RF cabinets are OFF or disabled (see Figure 2-6). There should be no 27 Vdc on DC feed terminals. On each RF cabinet:

S Unseat all circuit boards/ modules in the distribution shelf, transceiver shelf, and Single Carrier
Linear Power Amplifier (SCLPA) shelves, but leave them in their associated slots.

S Unseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C-CCP shelf and LPA shelves, but
leave them in their associated slots.

S Set C-CCP shelf breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (labeled
C-CCP 1, 2, 3 - located on the power distribution panel).

S Set LPA breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (8 breakers,
labeled 1A-1B through 4C-4D - located on the power distribution panel). 3 Verify that the resistance from the power (+) feed terminals with respect to the ground terminal on the cabinet measures > 500 (see Figure 2-6).

S If reading is < 500 , a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by the
breaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 M could indicate an open (or missing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).

Set the 400 Amp Main Breaker and the C-CCP breakers (C-CCP 1, 2, 3) to the ON position by pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat step 3 after turning on each breaker.

* IMPORTANT
If, after inserting any board/module, the ohmmeter stays at 0 , a short probably exists in that board/module. Replace the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate the problem before proceeding. 5 Insert and lock the DC/DC converter modules into their associated slots one at a time. Repeat step3 after inserting each module.

S A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge, finally
indicating approximately 500 .

! CAUTION
Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows: 6 Insert and lock all remaining circuit boards and modules into their associated slots in the C-CCP shelf. Repeat step 3 after inserting and locking each board or module.

S A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 .. 7 Set the 8 LPA breakers ON by pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat step 3 after turning on each breaker.

S A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 .. . . . continued on next page
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

2-9

Pre-DC Power-up test

Table 2-6: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) Step 8 Action

68P09255A57-O

Seat all LPA and associated LPA fan modules into their associated slots in the shelves one at a time. Repeat step 3 after seating each LPA and associated LPA fan module.

2
9

S A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 .. Seat the Heat Exchanger, ETIB, and Options breakers one at a time. Repeat step 3.

2-10

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

RF Cabinet Power Up

RF Cabinet Power Up
Table 2-7 covers the procedures for properly powering up the RF Cabinet. Table 2-7: RF Cabinet Power Up Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Ensure the 400 Amp Main DC breaker and all other breakers in the RF Cabinet are OFF. Proceed to the DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) sequence (see Table 2-6) (for initial power-up as required). Ensure the power cabinet is turned on (see Table 2-5). Verify that 27 volts is applied to the terminals on the back of the RF cabinet. Engage the main DC circuit breaker on the RF cabinet (see Figure 2-6). On each RF cabinet:

S Set C-CCP shelf breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time (labeled
C-CCP 1, 2, 3 - located on the power distribution panel).

S Set LPA breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time (8 breakers, labeled 1A-1B
through 4C-4D - located on the power distribution panel).

S Set the two heat exchanger breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time. S Set the ETIB breaker to the ON position by pushing it in. S Set the OPTION breaker to the ON position by pushing it in.
6 Measure the voltage drop between the Power Cabinet meter test point and the 27 V buss bar inside the RF Cabinet PDA while the RF Cabinet is transmitting.

NOTE
For a 3-sector carrier system, the voltage drop should be less than 0.2 V. For a 12-sector carrier system, the voltage drop should be less than 0.3 V. 7 Using a DC current probe, measure the current in each of the six (6) DC cables that are connected between the RF and Power Cabinet. The DC current measured should be approximately the same. If there is a wide variation between one cable and the others (>20 A), check the tightness of the connections (torque settings) at each end of the cable.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

2-11

RF Cabinet Power Up
Figure 2-6: RF Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel and 27 Vdc Terminal Locations

68P09255A57-O

400

MAIN BREAKER
1A 1C 2A 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 50 50 50 25 HEAT EXCHANGER CAUTION 1B 1D 2B 2D 3B 3D 4B 4D

5 RU RACK SPACE

L P A

2C 3A 3C 4A 4C

SC 4812ET BTS RF Cabinet (Front View)

C C C P
LPA BLOWERS
PUSH BUTTON TO RESET LPA BLOWERS

PS1 PS2 PS3

RF CABINET (Rear View)

SHUT OFF BOTH BREAKERS 25 ONLY DURING HEAT EXCHANGER MAINTENANCE OR REP AIR

27V 27V Ret

ETIB OPTION

10 15

FW00307

I/O Plate + and - DC Feed Terminals (Back Panel of RF Cabinet)

2-12

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Battery Test

Battery Test
Charge Test (Connected Batteries)
Table 2-8 lists the step-by-step instructions for testing the batteries. Table 2-8: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) Step 1 Action Close the battery compartment breakers for connected batteries ONLY. This process should be completed quickly to avoid individual battery strings with excess charge current

NOTE
If the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individually due to the surge current. If this condition is observed, turn off the Meter Alarm Panel power switch, and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers, the Meter Alarm Panel power switch should then be turned ON. 2 Using the DC current probe, measure the current in each of the battery string connections to the buss bars in each battery cabinet. The charge current may initially be high but should quickly reduce in a few minutes if the batteries have a typical new battery charge level. The current in each string should be approximately equal (+ 5 A). The bargraph meters on the rectifier modules can be used as a rough estimate of the total battery charge current. Each rectifier module has eight LEDs to represent the output current. Each illuminated LED indicates that approximately 12.5% (1/8 or 8.75 A) of the rectifiers maximum (70 A) current is flowing. EXAMPLE: Question: A system fitted with three rectifier modules each have three bargraph LEDs illuminated. What is the total output current into the batteries? Answer: Each bargraph is approximately indicating 12.5% of 70 A, therefore, 3 X 8.75A equals 26.25A. As there are three rectifiers, the total charge current is equal to (3 X 26.25 A) 78.75 A. This charge current calculation only applies at this part of the start up procedure when the RF Cabinet is not powered on, and the power cabinet heat exchanger is turned off. Allow a few minutes to ensure that the battery charge current stabilizes before taking any further action. Recheck the battery current in each string. If the batteries had a reasonable charge, the current in each string should reduce to less than 5 A. Recheck the DC output voltage. It should remain the same as measured in step 4 of the Power Up Test.

3 4

NOTE
If discharged batteries are installed, all bargraphs may be illuminated on the rectifiers during the charge test. This indicates that the rectifiers are at full capacity and are rapidly charging the batteries. It is recommended in this case that the batteries are allowed to charge and stabilize as in the above step before commissioning the site. This could take several hours.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

2-13

Battery Test

68P09255A57-O

Discharge Test
Perform the test procedure in Table 2-9 only when the battery current is less than 5 A per string. Refer to Table 2-8 for the procedures to check current levels.

2
Step 1

Table 2-9: Battery Discharge Test Action Turn the battery test switch on the Meter Alarm Panel, ON (see Figure 2-4). The rectifier output voltage and current should decrease by approximately 10% as the batteries assume the load. Alarms for the Meter Alarm Panel may occur. Measure the individual battery string current using the DC current probe. The battery discharge current in each string should be approximately the same (within 5 A). Turn Battery Test Switch OFF.
CAUTION

2 3

Failure to turn OFF the Battery Test Switch before leaving the site, will result in low battery capacity and reduce battery life.

2-14

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Heat Exchanger Power Up

Heat Exchanger Power Up

Table 2-10: Heat Exchanger Power Up Step 1 2 Action Turn the Power Cabinet Heat Exchanger breakers ON (see Figure 2-7 for breaker location). The Heat Exchanger will now go into a five (5) minute test sequence. Ensure that the internal and external fans are operating. Place a hand on the internal and external Heat Exchanger grills to feel for air draft.

Figure 2-7: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly

Heat Exchanger Assembly

Bottom (Ambient) Blower

Mounting Bracket Fan Module

Top (Internal) Blower

Core Blower Power Cord Mounting Bracket

T-30 Screw Blower Power Cord

Fan Module

T-30 Screw

POWER CABINET Front View

OUT=OFF

IN=ON Blower Assembly Circuit Breaker Side View

FW00181

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

2-15

Heat Exchanger Power Up

Figure 2-8: Power Cabinet Circuit Breaker Assemblies

68P09255A57-O

2
DC Circuit Breaker

25

160

160

160

25

ON

OFF

BREAKER SYSTEM BREAKER SHOULD BE RESET IF ILLUMINATED OR AFTER RESET OF BREAKER SYSTEM 3 MAIN BREAKERS
BREAKER

SYSTEM RESET BUTTON

TO RESET MAIN BREAKERS, PRESS AND HOLD IN GREEN BUTTON WHILE PRESSING 160 AMP BREAKER BUTTON UNTIL LATCHED RELEASE GREEN BUTTON AFTER ALL 3 BREAKERS HAVE BEEN RESET

POWER CABINET Front View 2 Circuit Breaker Legend: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectifier Shelf #1 . . . . Rectifier Shelf #2 . . . . Battery Heater #1 . . . . Battery Heater #2 . . . . GFCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Amp 70 Amp 70 Amp 15 Amp 15 Amp 15 Amp 15 Amp 3 4 1 5 6 7
MAIN

ATTENTION
RECTIFIER SHELF #1

RECTIFIER SHELF #2

BATTERY HEATER #1 CAUTION

BATTERY HEATER #2

LIVE TERMINALS

GFCI SPARE

LED Status AC Circuit Breaker

FW00144

2-16

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Heat Exchanger Power Up

Figure 2-9: Power Cabinet AC Circuit Breakers

7/16 NUT

AC Circuit Breaker

150 Amp Breaker

POWER CABINET Front View

5/16 NUT

SCREW WIRE

LEFT TAB

15 Amp Breaker

RIGHT TAB

5/16 NUT

SCREW WIRE

WIRE

LEFT TABS

30 Thru 140 Amp Breaker

RIGHT TABS
FW00145

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

2-17

Heat Exchanger Power Up

Figure 2-10: Power Cabinet DC Circuit Breakers

68P09255A57-O

DC Circuit Breaker
9/32 Nut

15 AMP

POWER CABINET Front View

3x150 AMP

DC Power Panel Door Locks

FW00146

Flat Washer Lock Washer

17 mm Nut

2-18

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

Chapter 3

Optimization/Calibration

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-1

Introduction to Optimization and Calibration

68P09255A57-O

Introduction to Optimization and Calibration

Overview
This section describes procedures for isolating the BTS from the span lines, preparing and using the LMF, downloading system operating software, CSM reference verification/optimization, set up and calibration of the supported test equipment, transmit/receive path verification, using the RFDS, and verifying the customer defined alarms and relay contacts are functioning properly.

NOTE

Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the CAVEATS section in the readme.txt file in the c:\wlmf folder for any applicable information.

Optimization Process Summary

After a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations, such as power up, have been completed, the LMF is used to optimize the BTS. Companion frames must be optimized individually as separate BTSs. The basic optimization process consists of the following: 1. Download MGLI-1 with code and data and then enable MGLI-1.
NOTE

The GLIs may be GLI2s or GLI3s 2. Use the status function and verify that all of the installed devices of the following types respond with status information: CSM, BBX, GLI, and MCC (and TSU if RFDS is installed). If a device is installed and powered up but is not responding and is colored gray in the BTS display, the device is not listed in the CDF file. The CDF/NECF file must be corrected before the device can be accessed by the LMF. 3. Download code and data to all devices of the following types: - CSM - BBX (may be BBX2 or BBX-1X) - GLI (other than GLI-1) - MCC (may be MCC-8E, MCC24, or MCC-1X) 4. Download the RFDS TSIC (if installed). 5. Verify the operation of the GPS and HSO or LFR signals. 6. Enable the following devices (in the order listed): - Secondary CSM (slot 2) - Primary CSM (slot 1) - All MCCs 7. Using the LMF test equipment selection function, select the test equipment to be used for the calibration. 8. Calibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously been calibrated using the CDMA LMF that is going to be used for the optimization/calibration. The cable calibration values can also be entered manually. 9. Connect the required test equipment for a full optimization.

3-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Introduction to Optimization and Calibration

10. Select all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs and use the full optimization function. The full optimization function performs TX calibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX tests for all selected devices. 11. If the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failed paths. 12. If the TX calibration fails again, troubleshoot and correct the problem that caused the failure and repeat the full optimization for the failed path. 13. If the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passes for a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problem that caused the failure and run the individual tests as required until all TX and RX tests have passed for all paths.

Cell-site Types
Sites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.
NOTE

For more information on the different in site types, please refer to the applicable Hardware Installation manual.

CDF/NECF
The CDF/NECF (Configuration Data File/Network Element Configuration File) contains information that defines the BTS and data used to download files to the devices. A CDF/NECF file must be placed in the applicable BTS folder before the LMF can be used to log into that BTS. CDF/NECF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using a floppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if the LMF computer has that capability. Refer to the LMF Help function on-line documentation for more information. The CDF/NECF includes the following information:

S Download instructions and protocol S Site specific equipage information S C-CCP shelf allocation plan
- BBX equipage (based on cell-site type) including redundancy - CSM equipage including redundancy - MCC (MCC24E, MCC8E or MCC-1X) channel element allocation plan. This plan indicates how the C-CCP shelf is configured, and how the paging, synchronization, traffic, and access channel elements (and associated gain values) are assigned among the (up to 12) MCCs in the shelf.

S CSM equipage including redundancy S Effective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennas
respectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of a transmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, and government regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, the antenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) and antenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the required
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-3

Introduction to Optimization and Calibration

68P09255A57-O

power at the top of the BTS frame. The corresponding BBX output level required to achieve that power level on any channel/sector can also be determined.
NOTE

Refer to the LMF Help function on-line documentation for additional information on the layout of the LMF directory structure (including CDF/NECF file locations and formats).

BTS System Software Download

3
BTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTS processor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operating code is loaded from the LMF computer terminal. BTSs configured for Circuit Backhaul use bts.cdf files. BTSs configured for Packet Backhaul use bts.necf files (bts-xxx.xml) located on the OMC/R.
NOTE

Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correct bts-#.cdf (or bts-#.necf) and cbsc-#.cdf files for the BTS must be obtained from the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF. Failure to use the correct CDF/NECF files can cause wrong results. Failure to use the correct CDF/NECF files to log into a live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the site. The CDF/NECF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS formatted diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the LMF computer has ftp capability. Refer to the LMF Help function on-line documentation for the procedure.

Site Equipage Verification

If you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF/NECF, and review the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipage data in the CDF/NECF matches the actual site hardware using a CDF/NECF conversion table.
CAUTION

- Use extreme care not to make any changes to the CDF/NECF content while viewing the file. Changes to the CDF/NECF can cause the site to operate unreliably or render it incapable of operation. - Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD. Extreme care should be taken during the removal and installation of any card/module. After removal, the card/module should be placed on a conductive surface or back into the anti-static bag in which it was shipped.

3-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Preparing the LMF

Preparing the LMF

Overview of Packet BTS files
R16.0 and earlier releases had the configuration file called CDF for each BTS and CBSC used by LMF. In 16.1 Packet BTS, BTS with GLI3 booting in packet binary, the CDF is replaced by two new configuration files called Network Element Configuration Base (NECB) and Network Element Change Journal (NECJ). The NECB contains the baseline configuration and is analogous to the CDF, while the NECJ contains all the changes made to the configuration since the last time the NECB was re-generated. Once the NECJ gets to 80% of its maximum size, the NECB is re-generated and all the updates are rolled into it. These files play much broader and vital role than previous CDF files. GLI3 booting in circuit binaries works similar to R16.0. A few LMF related important facts about these files are listed below.

S Both files (NECB and NECJ) are in XML format. S NECB contains all the up-to-date static configuration information and
NECJ contains all the recent changes (including operations) which are not updated in the NECB.

S Both files can be viewed in any XML viewer (most easily available is
Internet Explorer V5.0 and higher). They can be also viewed by any other word processor, but the XML tags will also be seen with them.

S These files will be created by OMC-R from MIB as per the BTS
provisioning.

S These files will be regenerated for each software release upgrade on

the system for each BTS.

S These files will reside on both OMC-R and Packet-GLI3 (unlike

CDF) and will be synchronized periodically between them.

S Both NECB and NECJ file contain a SoftwareVersion field in their

header section indicating the system release version of these files.

S Instead of the bts#.cdf file, the packet LMF uses a bts#.XML file,
which is a copy of the NECB.XML file.

S Packet-GLI3 will need these files for site initialization. S The scope of NECB has grown much broader than CDF and has much
more BTS centric information. The use of generic version of these files should be strictly avoided for the correct site initialization.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-5

Preparing the LMF

68P09255A57-O

LMF Features and Installation Requirements

Before optimization can be performed, the LMF application software must be installed and configured on a computer platform meeting Motorola-specified requirements (see Recommended Test Equipment and Software in Chapter 1).
NOTE

For the LMF graphics to display properly, the computer platform must be configured to display more than 256 colors. See the operating system software instructions for verifying and configuring the display settings. Software and files for installing and updating the LMF are provided on CD ROM disks. The following items must be available:

S LMF Program on CD ROM S CDF/NECF for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the
CBSC)

S CBSC File for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the
CBSC)

FTP Server
To be able to download files to the GLI3, the LMF now runs FTP server on the LMF laptop. The LMF FTP server runs from the LMFs home directory. All the files necessary to run the LMF FTP server are installed from the LMF CD. The FTP server is automatically started by the LMF upon successful Login to a Packet BTS. In addition, the LMF provides a new option in the Tools menu called FTP Server. The option starts the LMFs FTP server if Start is selected, and stops the server if Stop is selected. The LMFs FTP server runs on port 21. If any other process is using that port, the error message is displayed to the user stating that the port is occupied. There is another option under FTP Server menu called FTP Monitor, which allows the user to watch FTP activity b/w the LMF and GLI. Firewalls Firewalls will block the FTP requests from the Packet GLI to the LMF laptop. You must disable your firewall before attempting the BTS Synch command. Some common firewall programs to look for include Network ICE, BlackICE, Nortons Desktop Firewall, Enterprise Firewall, and Personal Firewall. FTP Server Port in use On some Windows 2000 installations, a process called inetd.exe makes the FTP server port 21 unusable by the LMF. If the LMF reports that the FTP server could not start because the port is in use, make sure the inetd.exe is not running by using the Task Managers process list. If inetd.exe is running, end the process by selecting it and clicking the End Process button. Inetd32.exe is NOT the same and ending it will not resolve this problem.
3-6

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Preparing the LMF

LMF File Structure Overview

The LMF uses a <x>:\<lmf home directory> folder that contains all of the essential data for installing and maintaining the BTS. The following list outlines the folder structure for LMF. Except for the bts-nnn folders, these folders are created as part of the LMF installation. Refer to the CDMA LMF Operators Guide for a complete description of the folder structure. Figure 3-1: LMF Folder Structure
(C:) x:\<lmf home directory> folder cdma folder BTS-nnn folders (A separate folder is required for each BTS where bts-nnn is the unique BTS number; for example, bts-163.) loads folder version folder (A separate folder is required for each different version; for example, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5.) code folder data folder

NOTE

The loads folder and all the folders below it are not available from the LMF for Software Release 2.16.1.x. These folders may be present as as a legacy from previous software versions or downloaded from the CBSC/OMC-R.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-7

Preparing the LMF

68P09255A57-O

LMF Home Directory

The LMF installation program creates the default home directory, c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories (folders) in it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA LMF home directory will be referred to with the generic convention of: <x>:\<lmf home directory> Where: <x> = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF home directory is located. <lmf home directory> = the directory path or name where the CDMA LMF is installed.

3-8

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Preparing the LMF

NECF Filename Conventions and Directory Location

NECF
The NECF actually consists of two files: the NECB and NECJ. The naming convention for the NECB and NECJ is: NECB*bts#.xml NECJ*bts#.xml Where: * = any characters can be substituted there # = the actual integer BTS number The NECB and its corresponding NECJ must have the exact same name, except for the B and J difference after the initial NEC characters. The NECB and the NECJ must reside in the <LMF_HOME>\cdma\bts-# directory corresponding to the BTS frame they are for.

Load Information File (LIF)

The LIF contains all the devices binaries available for the specified System Software Release. It is the functional equivalent of the OLF file that was used pre-Packet. The naming convention for the LIF is: NE_LIF.xml The LIF must reside in the <LMF_HOME>\cdma\loads\<Software Release Number> directory, where <LMF_HOME> = the home directory in which the LMF is installed, usually C:\wlmf <Software Release Number> = the System Software Release Number (e.g. 2.16.1.0.10).

Cal File
The Cal File still resides in the <LMF_HOME>\cdma\bts-# directory and is named bts-#.cal, where # is the actual integer number of the BTS.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-9

Preparing the LMF

68P09255A57-O

LMF Operating System Installation

The following section provides information and instructions for installing and updating the LMF software and files.
NOTE

First Time Installation Sequence: 1. Install Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 2. Install U/WIN K-shell emulator 3. Install LMF application programs 4. Install/create BTS folders Any time you install U/WIN, you must install the LMF software because the installation of the LMF modifies some of the files that are installed during the U/Win installation. Installing U/Win over-writes these modifications. There are multiple binary image packages for installation on the CD-ROM. When prompted, choose the load that corresponds to the switch release that you currently have installed. Perform the Device Images install after the WinLMF installation. If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may be available for binary updates. Follow the procedure in Table 3-1 to install the LMF application program using the LMF CD ROM. Table 3-1: Installing LMF using CD ROM

NOTE

n Step 1 1a 1b 2 3 4

Action Insert the LMF CD ROM disk into your disk drive and perform the following as required: - If the Setup screen appears, follow the instructions displayed on the screen. - If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to Step 2. Click on the Start button. Select Run. Enter d:\autorun in the Open box and click OK.

NOTE
If applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive letter.

3-10

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Preparing the LMF

Copy BTS and CBSC CDF (or NECF) Files to the LMF Computer
Before logging on to a BTS with the LMF computer to execute optimization/ATP procedures, the correct bts-#.cdf (or bts-#.necf ) and cbsc-#.cdf files must be obtained from the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF computer. This requires creating versions of the CBSC CDF files on a DOS-formatted floppy diskette and using the diskette to install the CDF files on the LMF computer.
NOTE

- If the LMF has ftp capability, the ftp method can be used to copy the CDF or NECF files from the CBSC. - On Sun OS workstations, the unix2dos command can be used in place of the cp command (e.g., unix2dos bts-248.cdf bts-248.cdf). This should be done using a copy of the CBSC CDF file so the original CBSC CDF file is not changed to DOS format. When copying CDF or NECF files, comply with the following to prevent BTS login problems with the Windows LMF: S The numbers used in the bts-#.cdf (or bts-#.necf) and cbsc-#.cdf file names must correspond to the locally-assigned numbers for each BTS and its controlling CBSC.

NOTE

S The generic cbsc-1.cdf file supplied with the Windows LMF

will work with locally numbered BTS CDF files. Using this file will not provide a valid optimization unless the generic file is edited to replace default parameters (e.g., channel numbers) with the operational parameters used locally. The procedure in Table 3-2 lists the steps required to transfer the CDF files from the CBSC to the LMF computer. For further information, refer to the LMF Help function on-line documentation. Table 3-2: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the LMF Computer n Step
AT THE CBSC:

Action

1 2 3 4

Login to the CBSC workstation. Insert a DOS-formatted floppy diskette in the workstation drive. Type eject -q and press the Enter key. Type mount and press the Enter key.

NOTE S Look for the floppy/no_name message on the last line displayed. S If the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.
Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing Step7. 5 6 Change to the directory, where the files to be copied reside, by typing cd <directoryname> (e.g., cd bts-248) and pressing the Enter key. Type ls and press the Enter key to display the list of files in the directory. . . . continued on next page
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-11

Preparing the LMF

Table 3-2: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the LMF Computer n Step 7 Action

68P09255A57-O

With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS-formatted versions of the bts-#.cdf (or bts-#.necf) and cbsc-#.cdf files on the diskette by entering the following command: unix2dos <source filename> /floppy/no_name/<target filename> (e.g., unix2dos bts-248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts-248.cdf).

NOTE S Other versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases, use 3
the Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or Windows text editor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF files on the LMF computer is, therefore, not recommended.

S Using cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copied
with a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of the command string following a space (e.g., cp bts-248.cdf cbsc-6.cdf /floppy/no_name). 8 9 10 Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts-# that must be supported by the LMF computer. When all required files have been copied to the diskette type eject and press the Enter key. Remove the diskette from the CBSC drive.

AT THE LMF:

11 12 13

If it is not running, start the Windows operating system on the LMF computer. Insert the diskette containing the bts-#.cdf (or bts-#.necf) and cbsc-#.cdf files into the LMF computer. Using MS Windows Explorer, create a corresponding bts-# folder in the <x>:\<lmf home directory>\cdma directory for each bts-#.cdf (or bts-#.necf) and cbsc-#.cdf file pair copied from the CBSC. Use MS Windows Explorer to transfer the bts-#.cdf (or bts-#.necf) and cbsc-#.cdf files from the diskette to the corresponding <x>:\<lmf home directory>\cdma\bts-# folders created in step 13.

14

3-12

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Preparing the LMF

Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Connection

Confirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS Field Replaceable Units (FRU) requires establishing an MMI communication session between the LMF and the FRU. Using features of the Windows operating system, the connection properties for an MMI session can be saved on the LMF computer as a named Windows HyperTerminal connection. This eliminates the need for setting up connection parameters each time an MMI session is required to support optimization. Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created on the Windows desktop. Double-clicking the shortcut icon will start the connection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels. Follow the procedures in Table 3-3 to establish a named HyperTerminal connection and create a Windows desktop shortcut for it. Table 3-3: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection Step 1 2 From the Windows Start menu, select: Programs>Accessories Perform one of the following: Action

S For Win NT, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminal or S For Win 98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click
on the Hyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.

NOTE S If a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click Close.
(This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)

S If a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click NO.

3 When the Connection Description box opens: - Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window. - Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and - Click OK. From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select COM1 or COM2 (Win NT) - or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 (Win 98) for the RS-232 port connection and click OK.

NOTE
For LMF configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test equipment and a physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 to prevent conflicts. 5 In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS-232 port settings as follows:

S S S S S

Bits per second: 9600 Data bits: 8 Parity: None Stop bits: 1 Flow control: None . . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-13

Preparing the LMF

Table 3-3: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection Step 6 7 8 9 Click OK. Save the defined connection by selecting: File>Save Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting: File>Exit Click Yes to disconnect when prompted. Perform one of the following: Action

68P09255A57-O

10

S If the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12 or S From the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories
11 Perform one of the following:

S For Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons. S For Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.
12 13 14 15 16 Highlight the newly created connection icon by moving the cursor over it (Win NT) or clicking on it (Win 98). Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the right mouse button. From the popup menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here. If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on the Windows desktop. Close the Hyperterminal folder window by selecting: File > Close

3-14

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Span Lines - Interface and Isolation

Span Lines - Interface and Isolation

T1/E1 Span Isolation
NOTE

At active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and place it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the span surge protectors until the OMC/CBSC has disabled the BTS. Each frame is equipped with one 50-pair punch block for spans, customer alarms, remote GPS, and power cabinet alarms. See Figure 3-3 and refer to Table 3-5 for the physical location and pin call-out information. To disable the span, pull the surge protectors for the respective span. Before connecting the LMF to the frame LAN, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and place it OOS to allow the LMF to control the CDMA BTS. This prevents the CBSC from inadvertently sending control information to the CDMA BTS during LMF based tests.

Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans

Once the OMC-R/CBSC has disabled the BTS, the spans must be disabled to ensure the LMF will maintain control of the BTS. To disable the spans, disconnect the BTS-to-CBSC Transcoder span cable connectors from the Span I/O cards.

T1/E1 Span Isolation

Table 3-4 describes the action required for span isolation. Table 3-4: T1/E1 Span Isolation Step 1 2 Action Have the OMC/CBSC place the BTS OOS. The Span Lines can be disabled by removing the surge protectors on the 50-pin punch block. Using Table 3-5 locate the span or spans which need to be disabled and remove the respective surge protector.

NOTE
If a third party is used for span connectivity, the third party must be informed before disabling the span line.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-15

Span Lines - Interface and Isolation

68P09255A57-O

Configure Channel Service Unit

The M-PATH 537 Channel Service Unit (CSU) provides in-band SNMP-managed digital service access to T1 and fractional T1 lines. M-PATH units plug into the Kentrox 2-slot frame (see Figure 3-2). Remote M-PATH management is available via SNMP over an in-band data link on the T1 line (using a facility data link or 8-64 kbps of a DS0 channel). The unit at the near end of the management path can be an SNMP manager or another M-PATH CSU. Each 19 inch rack can support two CSU M-PATH 537 modules. Each M-PATH 537 module supports one and only one span connection. Programming of the M-PATH is accomplished through the DCE 9-pin connector on the front panel of the CSU shelf. Manuals and a Microsoft Windows programming disk is supplied with each unit.

Setting the Control Port

Whichever control port is chosen, it must first be set up so the control port switches match the communication parameters being used by the control device. If using the rear-panel DTE control port, set the shelf-address switch SA5 to up (leave the switch down for the rear-panel DCE control port). For more information, refer to the vendor user manual (part number 1174139) and installation manual (part number 1174462) provided with each CSU. Plug one of the cables listed below into the Control Port connectors: Part Number 01-95006-022 (six feet) 01-95010-022 (ten feet) The control port cables can be used to connect the shelf to: Description of Cable DB-9S to DB-9P

S A PC using the AT 9-pin interface S A modem using the 9-pin connector S Other shelves in a daisy chain

3-16

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Span Lines - Interface and Isolation

Figure 3-2: Rear and Front View of the CSU

To/From Network To/From GLI To/From Network To/From GLI

DTE

DATA PORT

DCE

DATA PORT

SLOT 2 T1 DDS T1 TERMINAL T1 DDS NETWORK CONTROL PORT GROUP ADDRESS

SLOT 1 T1 TERMINAL

NETWORK

SHELF ADDRESS

Rear View

SLOT 1

SLOT 2

DCE Connector (Craft Port)

Front View

REF. FW00212

CAUTION

SC4812ET Span Line Labeling for Span B and Span C may be swapped. - On the SC4812ETs, the span cable internal to the base station that connects the 50 pin header on the I/O plate to the CSU has Span B and Span C (RJ-45) connectors mis-labeled. - CFE will punch down the span on the 50 pair bunchblock as per Motorola documentation and punchdown chart. When conecting the span input to the CSU re-label Span B cable toSpan C cable to Span B. Connect to CSU as per documentation. The labeling issue on the cable from the I/O plate to the CSU Part Number 3086601H01 Rev C shall be corrected on revision D to address this issue. The cut over date to Rev. D was approximately January 30, 2001.

NOTE

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-17

Span Lines - Interface and Isolation

68P09255A57-O

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information

See Figure 3-3 and refer toTable 3-5for the physical location and pin call-out information for the 50-pin punch block. Figure 3-3: 50 Pair Punch Block

3
STRAIN RELIEVE INCOMING CABLE TO BRACKET WITH TIE WRAPS TO MODEM CONNECTOR TO ALARMS CONNECTOR

TO LAN CONNECTOR

RF Cabinet I/O Area

TO RGD/RGPS CONNECTOR LEGEND 1T = PAIR 1 - TIP 1R = PAIR 1 -RING 2R 2T 1R 1T

2 49T 49R 50T 50R

FW00162

1T 1R 2T 2R

TOP VIEW OF PUNCH BLOCK

3-18

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Span Lines - Interface and Isolation

Table 3-5 lists the complete pin/signal identification for the 50-pin punch block. Table 3-5: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock

Punchblock Cable Connector

Function

Signal Name Power Cab Control - NC Power Cab Control - NO Power Cab Control-Com Reserved Rectifier Fail AC Fail 1T 1R 2T 2R 3T 3R 4T 4R 5T 5R 6T 6R 7T 7R 8T 8R 9T 9R

Punch Pin

Ext. Cable Wire Color Blue Blk/Blue Yellow N/C Blk/Yellow Green Blk/Grn White Blk/White Red Blk/Red Brown Blk/Brn

Power Cabinet

Power Cab Exchanger Fail Power Cab Door Alarm Power Cab Major Alarm Battery Over Temp Power Cab Minor Alarm

ALARM HSO/LFR Extension /

Rectifier Over Temp Power Cab Alarm Rtn LFR_HSO_GND EXT_1PPS_POS EXT_1PPS_NEG CAL_+ LFR Antenna CAB_LORAN_+ LORAN_Pilot Beacon Alarm - Minor Pilot Beacon Alarm - Rtn Pilot Beacon Pilot Beacon Alarm - Major Pilot Beacon Control-NO Pilot Beacon Control - COM Pilot Beacon Control - NC Customer Outputs 1 - NO Customer Outputs 1 - COM Customer Outputs 1 - NO Customer Outputs 1 - COM Customer Outputs 1 - NC Customer Outputs 2 - NO

10T 10R 11T 11R 12T 12R 13T 13R 14T 14R 14T 14R 15T 15R 16T 16R 17T 17R 18T 18R 19T 19R

ALARM

Customer Outputs

Customer Outputs 2 - COM Customer Outputs 2 - NC Customer Outputs 3 - NO Customer Outputs 3 - COM Customer Outputs 3 - NC Customer Outputs 4 - NO Customer Outputs 4-COM Customer Outputs 4 - NC

. . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-19

Span Lines - Interface and Isolation

Table 3-5: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock
Punchblock Cable Connector Function Signal Name Customer Inputs 1 Cust_Rtn_A_1 Customer Inputs 2 Cust_Rtn_A_2 Customer Inputs 3 Cust_Rtn_A_3 Customer Inputs 4 Cust_Rtn_A_4 Punch Pin 20T 20R 21T 21R 22T 22R 23T 23R 24T 24R 25T 25R 26T 26R 27T 27R 28T 28R 29T 29R 30T 30R 31T 31R 32T 32R 33T 33R 34T 34R 35T 35R 36T 36R 37T 37R 38T 38R 39T 39R 40T 40R 41T 41R

68P09255A57-O

Ext. Cable Wire Color

3
ALARM Customer Inputs

Customer Inputs 5 Cust_Rtn_A_5 Customer Inputs 6 Cust_Rtn_A_6 Customer Inputs 7 Cust_Rtn_A_7 Customer Inputs 8 Cust_Rtn_A_8 Customer Inputs 9 Cust_Rtn_A_9 Customer Inputs 10 Cust_Rtn_A_10 RCV_TIP_A Span 1 RCV_RING_A XMIT_TIP_A XMIT_RING_A RCV_TIP_B Span 2 RCV_RING_B XMIT_TIP_B XMIT_RING_B RCV_TIP_C (Note) Span 3 RCV_RING_C (Note) XMIT_TIP_C (Note) XMIT_RING_C(Note) RCV_TIP_D (Note) SPAN I/O Span 4 RCV_RING_D (Note) XMIT_TIP_D (Note) XMIT_RING_D(Note) RCV_TIP_E (Note) Span 5 RCV_RING_E (Note) XMIT_TIP_E (Note) XMIT_RING_E(Note) RCV_TIP_F (Note) Span 6 RCV_RING_F (Note) XMIT_TIP_F (Note) XMIT_RING_F(Note)

NOTE
Span 3 through 6 are spares for expansion purposes

. . . continued on next page

3-20

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Span Lines - Interface and Isolation

Table 3-5: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock

Punchblock Cable Connector

Function

Signal Name GPS_Power_A

Punch Pin 42T 42R 43T 43R 44T 44R 45T 45R 46T 46R 47T 47R 42T 42R 43T 43R 44T 44R 45T 45R 46T 46R 47T 47R 48T 48R 49T 49R 50T 50R

Ext. Cable Wire Color Yellow Yellow/Black Blue Blue/Black White White/Black Green Green/Black Red Red/Black Brown Brown/Black Yellow Yellow/Black Blue Blue/Black White White/Black Green Green/Black Red Red/Black Brown Brown/Black

For frame without RGD Expansion Punchblock Single Frame g BTS;RGPS Head Connection OR Multiple Frame BTS; RGD Connection at RGPS Secondary Frame

GPS_Power_A_Return GPS_Power_B GPS_Power_B_Return GPS_TXD+ GPS_TXDGPS_RXD+ GPS_RXDSignal Ground (TDR+) Signal Ground (TDR-) GPS_1PPS+ GPS_1PPSGPS_Power_A GPS_Power_A_Return GPS_Power_B GPS_Power_B_Return

RGD/RGPS

For frame with RGD Expansion Punchblock RGD/RGPS OR Multiple Frame BTS; RGPS Head Connection at RGPS Primary Frame Pi F

GPS_TXD+ GPS_TXDGPS_RXD+ GPS_RXDSignal Ground (TDR+) Master Frame (TDR-) GPS_1PPS+ GPS_1PPSReserved

MODEM RGD/RGPS None ALARM

Reserved Chassis Ground No Connection Reserved Reserved

N/A None None None

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-21

LMF to BTS Connection

68P09255A57-O

LMF to BTS Connection

Connect the LMF to the BTS
The LMF is connected to the LAN A or B connector located on the left side of the frames lower air intake grill, behind the LAN Cable Access door (see Figure 3-4). Table 3-6: LMF to BTS Connection Step Action To gain access to the connectors, open the LAN cable access door, then pull apart the fabric covering the BNC T connector and slide out the service tray, if desired (see Figure 3-4). Connect the LMF to the LAN A BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter and components shown in Figure 3-4. If there is no login response, connect the LMF to the LAN B BNC connector. If there is still no login response, see Table 6-1, Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedure.

1 2

NOTE
Xircom Model PE3-10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernet connection to the frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DC transformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.

* IMPORTANT
The LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC connector) must not touch the chassis during optimization. Figure 3-4: LMF Connection Detail

LMF BNC T CONNECTIONS ON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME (ETHERNET A SHOWN; ETHERNET B COVERED WITH VELCRO TAPE)

10BASET/10BASE2 CONVERTER CONNECTS DIRECTLY TO BNC T

LMF COMPUTER TERMINAL WITH MOUSE

PCMCIA ETHERNET ADPATER & ETHERNET UTP ADAPTER

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ11 CONNECTORS)

115 VAC POWER CONNECTION

3-22

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

ETIB EBA RFDS

NOTE: Open LAN CABLE ACCESS door. Pull apart Velcro tape and gain access to the LAN A or LAN B LMF BNC connector.

SC4812ET RF CABINET
FW00168

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Using the LMF

Using the LMF

Basic LMF Operation
LMF Coverage in This Publication - The LMF application program supports maintenance of both CDMA and SAS BTSs. All references to the LMF in this publication are to the CDMA portion of the program. Operating Environments - The LMF application program allows the user to work in the two following operating environments which are accessed using the specified desktop icons:

S Graphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF icon S Command Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CDMA CLI icon
The GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operating environment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to the user to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit the results of optimization and calibration actions. Basic Operation - Basic operation of the LMF in either environment includes performing the following:

S S S S S

Selecting and deselecting BTS devices Enabling devices Disabling devices Resetting devices Obtaining device status

The following additional basic operation can be performed in a GUI environment:

S Sorting a status report window

NOTE

Unless otherwise noted, LMF procedures in this manual are performed using the GUI environment.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-23

Using the LMF

68P09255A57-O

The LMF Display and the BTS

BTS Display - When the LMF is logged into a BTS, a frame tab is displayed for each BTS frames. The frame tab will be labeled with CDMA and the BTS number, a dash, and the frame number (for example, BTS-812-1 for BTS 812, RFMF 1). If there is only one frame for the BTS, there will only be one tab. CDF/NECF Requirements - For the LMF to recognize the devices installed in the BTS, a BTS CDF/NECF file which includes equipage information for all the devices in the BTS must be located in the applicable <x>:\<lmf home directory>\cdma\bts-# folder. To provide the necessary channel assignment data for BTS operation, a CBSC CDF file which includes channel data for all BTS RFMFs is also required in the folder. RFDS Display - If an RFDS is included in the CDF/NECF file, an RFDS tab labeled with RFDS, a dash and the BTS number-frame number combination (for example, RFDS-812-1 ) will be displayed.

Graphical User Interface Overview

The LMF uses a GUI, which works in the following way:

S Select the device or devices. S Select the action to apply to the selected device(s). S While action is in progress, a status report window displays the action
taking place and other status information.

S The status report window indicates when the the action is complete
and displays other pertinent information.

S Clicking the OK button closes the status report window.

3-24

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Using the LMF

Understanding GUI Operation

The following screen captures are provided to help understand how the GUI operates: - Figure 3-5 depicts the differences between packet and circuit CDMA cdf file identification. Note that if there is a packet version bts file, the (P) is added as a suffix. There is a corresponding (C) for the circuit mode version. - Figure 3-6 depicts the Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs) state of a packet mode SC4812T. Note that an X is on the front of each card that is under Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs) control by the GLI3 card. - Figure 3-7 depicts three of the available packet mode commands. Normally the GLI3 has Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs) control of all cards as shown in Figure 3-6 by an (X). In that state the LMF may only status a card. In order to download code or test a card, the LMF must request Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs) control of the card by using the shown dropdown menu. It also uses this menu to release control of the card back to the GLI3. The GLI3 will also assume control of the cards after the LMF logs out of the BTS. The packet mode GLI3 normally is loaded with a tape release and NECB and NECJ files which point to a tape release stored on the GLI3. When the GLI3 has control of a card it will maintain that card with the code on that tape release. - Figure 3-8 depicts a packet mode site that has the MCC-1 and the BBX-1 cards under LMF control. Notice that the X is missing from the front of these two cards. For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations, refer to the LMF Help function on-line documentation.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-25

Using the LMF

Figure 3-5: BTS Login screen - identifying circuit and packet BTS files

68P09255A57-O

3-26

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Using the LMF

Figure 3-6: Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs) state of a packet mode SC4812T

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-27

Using the LMF

Figure 3-7: Available packet mode commands

68P09255A57-O

3-28

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Using the LMF

Figure 3-8: Packet mode site with MCC-1 and BBX-1 under LMF control

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-29

Using the LMF

68P09255A57-O

Command Line Interface Overview

The LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability. Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLI can not be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon. Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only one handler can be running at one time. The architectural design is such that the GUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI to use the same handler. When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLI automatically finds and uses an in-progress login session with a BTS initiated under the GUI. This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI in the same BTS login session. If a CLI handler is already running when the GUI is launched (this happens if the CLI window is already running when the user starts the GUI, or if another copy of the GUI is already running when the user starts the GUI), a dialog window displays the following warning message:
The CLI handler is already running. This may cause conflicts with the LMF. Are you sure that you want to start the application? This window also contains yes and no buttons. Selecting yes starts the application. Selecting no terminates the application.

CLI Format Conventions

The CLI command can be broken down in the following way:

S S S S

Verb Device including device identifier parameters Switch Option parameters consisting of: - Keywords - Equals sign (=) between the keyword and the parameter value - Parameter values

Spaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and option parameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers. Following is an example of a CLI command. measure bbx-<bts_id>- <bbx_id> rssi channel=6 sector=5 Refer to the LMF CLI Commands for a complete explanation of the CLI commands and their usage.

3-30

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Using the LMF

Logging into a BTS

Logging into a BTS establishes a communication link between the BTS and the LMF. An LMF session can be logged into only one BTS at a time.

Prerequisites
Before attempting to log into a BTS, ensure the following have been completed:

S The LMF is correctly installed on the LMF computer. S A bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF/NECF and CBSC files exists. S The LMF computer was connected to the BTS before starting the
Windows operating system and the LMF software. If necessary, restart the computer after connecting it to the BTS in accordance with Table 3-6 and Figure 3-4.

CAUTION

Be sure that the correct bts-#.cdf/necf and cbsc-#.cdf file are used for the BTS. These should be the CDF/NECF files that are provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correct CDF/NECF files can result in invalid optimization. Failure to use the correct CDF/NECF files to log into a live (traffic-carrying) site can shut down the site.

BTS Login from the GUI Environment

Follow the procedures in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using the GUI environment Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure n Step 1 Action Start the LMF GUI environment by double clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the LMFs not running). - An LMF window will open and display the LMF build number in the title bar.

NOTE
If a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions which may be running, and start the LMF GUI environment again:
The CLI handler is already running. This may cause conflicts with the LMF. Are you sure you want to start the application? Yes No

2 3 4 5

Click on Login tab (if not displayed). Double click on CDMA (in the Available Base Stations pick list). Click on the desired BTS number. Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront). . . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-31

Using the LMF

Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure n Step 6 Action

68P09255A57-O

Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2 for a field BTS) if not correctly displayed in the IP Address box.

NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI-1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP address for MGLI-2. 7 Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box. Click on Ping. - If the connection is successful, the Ping Display window shows text similar to the following:
Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255

- If there is no response the following is displayed:

128.0.0.2:9216:Timed out

If the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails to respond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B link cables, missing 50-Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself. 9 Select the Multi-channel Preselector type from the Multi-channel Preselector drop-down list (default is MPC) to a device corresponding to your BTS configuration if required.

NOTE
When performing RX tests on expansion frames, do not choose EMPC if the test equipment is connected to the starter frame. 10 11 12 Click on the Use a Tower Top Amplifier, if applicable. Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.)

NOTE S If you attempt to log in to a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray. S There may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a device
failure).

S If the MGLI is OOS_ROM (blue), it will have to be downloaded with code before other devices
can be seen.

S If the MGLI is OOS-RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be
seen.

3-32

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Using the LMF BTS Login from the CLI Environment

Follow the procedures in Table 3-8 to log into a BTS when using the GUI environment.
NOTE

If the CLI and GUI environments are to be used at the same time, the GUI must be started first and BTS login must be performed from the GUI. Refer to Table 3-7 to start the GUI environment and log into a BTS. Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure

n Step 1

Action Double-click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not already running).

NOTE
If a BTS was logged into under a GUI session before the CLI environment was started, the CLI session will be logged into the same BTS, and Step 2 is not required. 2 At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:
login bts-<bts#> host=<host> port=<port>

where: host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this is first login to this BTS) port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first login to this BTS) A response similar to the following will be displayed:
LMF> 13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted COMMAND=login bts-33 13:08:18.882 Command In Progress 13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed REASON_CODE=No Reason

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-33

Using the LMF

68P09255A57-O

Logging Out
Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and CLI operating environments.
NOTE

The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to a BTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the same BTS at the same time, logging out of the BTS in either environment will log out of it for both. When either a login or logout is performed in the CLI window, there is no GUI indication that the login or logout has occurred.

Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI Environment

Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the GUI environment. Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure n Step 1 2 3 Action Click on the BTS tab menu bar. Click the Logout item in the pulldown menu (a Confirm Logout pop-up message will appear). Click on Yes or press the Enter key to confirm logout. The Login tab will appear.

NOTE
If a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time as the GUI, a Logout Error popup message will appear stating the system should not log out of the BTS. When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for further operations. 4 If a Logout Error popup message appears stating that the system could not log out of the Base Station because the given BTS is not logged in, click OK and proceed to Step 5. Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the Confirm Logout popup, and click OK in the Logout Error popup which appears again. If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.

NOTE S The Logout item on the BTS menu bar will only log you out of the
displayed BTS.

S You can also log out of all BTS sessions and exit LMF by clicking
on the File selection in the menu bar and selecting Exit from the File menu list. A Confirm Logout pop-up message will appear.

3-34

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Using the LMF Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-10 to logout of a BTS when using the CLI environment. Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure n Step Action

NOTE
If the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be done with it in the GUI, proceed to Step 2. 1 Log out of a BTS by entering the following command:
logout bts-<bts#>

A response similar to the following will be displayed:

LMF> 13:24:51.028 Command Received and Accepted COMMAND=logout bts-33 13:24:51.028 Command In Progress 13:24:52.04 Command Successfully Completed REASON_CODE=No Reason

If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:

exit

A response similar to the following will be displayed before the window closes:
Killing background processes....

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-35

Using the LMF

68P09255A57-O

Establishing an MMI Communication Session

Equipment Connection - Figure 3-9 illustrates common equipment connections for the LMF computer. For specific connection locations on FRUs, refer to the illustration accompanying the procedures which require the MMI communication session. Initiate MMI Communication - For those procedures which require MMI communication between the LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedures in Table 3-11 to initiate the communication session.

3
Step 1 2 2a 2b 3

Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communications Action Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure that requires MMI communication session. If the LMF computer has only one serial port (COM1) and the LMF is running, disconnect the LMF from COM1 by performing the following: - Click on Tools in the LMF window menu bar, and select Options from the pull-down menu list. -- An LMF Options dialog box will appear. - In the LMF Options dialog box, click the Disconnect Port button on the Serial Connection tab. Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windows desktop shortcut.

NOTE
If a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from the Windows Start menu by selecting: Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > <Named HyperTerminal Connection (e.g., MMI Session)> 4 Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressing the LMF computer <Enter> key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained.

3-36

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Using the LMF

Figure 3-9: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections

To FRU MMI port

8-PIN

NULL MODEM BOARD (TRN9666A)

8-PIN TO 10-PIN RS-232 CABLE (P/N 30-09786R01)

LMF COMPUTER
RS-232 CABLE COM1 OR COM2 DB9-TO-DB25 ADAPTER FW00687

Online Help
Task oriented online help is available in the LMF by clicking on Help in the window menu bar, and selecting LMF Help from the pull-down menu.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-37

Pinging the Processors

68P09255A57-O

Pinging the Processors

For proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B links must be be verified. Figure 3-10 represents a typical BTS Ethernet configuration. The drawing depicts one (of two identical) links, A and B. Ping is a program that sends request packets to the LAN network modules to get a response from the specified target module.
NOTE

WinLMF (unreleased version 2.16.1.0.15 for example) has an option in the LOGIN menu to ping the GLI prior to login. Follow the steps in Table 3-12 to ping each processor (on both LAN A and LAN B) and verify LAN redundancy is working properly.

CAUTION

Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.

Figure 3-10: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram

OUT

IN 50 SIGNAL GROUND

50

SIGNAL GROUND

CHASSIS GROUND

BTS (MASTER)
1A 4A 2A 5A 3A 6A 1B 2B 4B 5B 3B 6B 50 Pair Punch Block (Alarms/ Spans) 3B

20 Pair Punchblock (RGPS) RGD/RGPS

RGD Board

BTS (EXPANSION)
1A 2A 5A 3A 6A 1B 2B 4B 5B 3B 6B 50 Pair Punch Block (Alarms/ Spans) 3B

20 Pair Punchblock (RGPS) RGD/RGPS

Microwave RF GPS

RGD Board

Microwave RF GPS

Power Input +27V

4A

Power Input +27V

RF Expansion Ports 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B

RF Expansion Ports 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B

LAN
IN OUT

LAN
IN OUT

A B
Remote ASU

A B
19 MHz

4A

5A

6A

4B 5B

6B
Spans Modem Alams 2 Sec

Power Input 27V Ret

Remote ASU

4A

5A

6A

4B 5B

6B
19 MHz Spans Modem Alams 2 Sec

Power Input 27V Ret

1 2

Antennas
GND Lugs

1 2

Antennas
GND Lugs

50

50 SIGNAL GROUND

SIGNAL GROUND

CHASSIS GROUND FW00199

NOTE

IMPORTANT: The Ethernet LAN A and B cables must be installed on each frame/enclosure before performing this test. All other processor board LAN connections are made via the backplanes.
Jan 2003

3-38

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Pinging the Processors

Table 3-12: Pinging the Processors

Step 1 2

Action From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run. In the Open box, type ping and the GLI IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).

NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for the GLI3 in field BTS units. 3 4 Click on the OK button. If the targeted module responds, text similar to the following is displayed:
Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255

If there is no response the following is displayed:

Request timed out

If the GLI3 fails to respond, it should be reset and re-pinged. If it still fails to respond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B link cables, or the GLI3 itself.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-39

Download the BTS

68P09255A57-O

Download the BTS

Overview
Before a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain device initialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices during manufacture, factory repair, or, for software upgrades, from the CBSC using the DownLoad Manager (DLM). Device application (RAM) code and data must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before the BTS can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.

ROM Code
3
Downloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routine maintenance or a normal part of the optimization process. It is only done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code release level in the device is not compatible with the required release level of the site operating software and the CBSC can not communicate with the BTS to perform the download. If you must download ROM code, the procedures are located in Appendix G. Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROM code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer. ROM code must be manually selected for download.
NOTE

The ROM code file is not available for GLI3s. GLI3s are ROM code loaded at the factory. ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the download is started, the device being downloaded will change to OOS_ROM (blue). The device will remain OOS_ROM (blue) when the download is completed. A compatible revision-level RAM code must then be downloaded to the device. Compatible code loads for ROM and RAM must be used for the device type to ensure proper performance. The compatible device code release levels for the BSS software release being used are listed in the Version Matrix section of the SCt CDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tape or CD-ROM containing the BSS software).

RAM Code
Before RAM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct RAM code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM code can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Device menu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is stored in the LMF file structure. The RAM code file will be selected automatically if the file is in the <x>:\<lmf home directory>\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder (where n.n.n.n is the download code version number that matches the NextLoad parameter of the CDF file). The RAM code file in the code folder must have the correct hardware bin number for the device to be loaded. RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the download is started, the device being loaded will change to OOS_ROM (blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device will change to OOS_RAM (yellow).
3-40

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Download the BTS

When code is downloaded to an MGLI or GLI, the LMF automatically also downloads data and then enables the MGLI. When enabled, the MGLI will change to INS_ACT (bright green). A redundant GLI will not be automatically enabled and will remain OOS_RAM (yellow). When the redundant GLI is manually commanded to enable through the LMF, it will change state to INS_SBY (olive green). For non-GLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code is downloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS_RAM (yellow). The devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are:

S Master Group Line Interface (MGLI2 or MGLI3) S Redundant GLI (GLI2 or GLI3) S Clock Synchronization Module (CSM) (Only if new revision code
must be loaded)

S Multi Channel CDMA (MCC24E, MCC8E, or MCC-1X) cards S Broadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX-1X) cards S RFDS Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC) or RFDS-1X RFDS
PROCessor (RPROC) card, if RFDS is installed
NOTE

IMPORTANT: The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with RAM code and data, and in INS_ACT (bright green) status before downloading any other device. The RAM code download process for an MGLI automatically downloads data and then enables the MGLI.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-41

Download the BTS

68P09255A57-O

Verify GLI ROM Code Loads

Devices should not be loaded with a RAM code version which is not compatible with the ROM code with which they are loaded. Before downloading RAM code and data to the processor cards, follow the procedure in Table 3-13 to verify the GLI devices are loaded with the correct ROM code for the software release used by the BSS.

Prerequisite
Identify the correct GLI ROM code load for the software release being used on the BSS by referring to the Version Matrix section of the SCt CDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tape or CD-ROM containing the BSS software). Table 3-13: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads Step 1 2 3 4 4a 4b 4c 4d 5 Action If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 3-7). Select all GLI devices by clicking on them, and select Device > Status from the BTS menu bar. In the status report window which opens, note the number in the ROM Ver column for each GLI. If the ROM code loaded in the GLIs is not the correct one for the software release being used on the BSS, perform the following: - Log out of the BTS as described in Table 3-9 or Table 3-10, as applicable. - Disconnect the LMF computer. - Reconnect the span lines as described in Table 5-6. - Have the CBSC download the correct ROM code version to the BTS devices. When the GLIs have the correct ROM load for the software release being used, be sure the span lines are disabled as outlined in Table 3-4 and proceed to downloading RAM code and data.

3-42

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Download the BTS

Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-14 to download the RAM code and data to the MGLI and other installed GLI devices. Prerequisites

S Prior to performing these procedures, ensure a code file exists for each
of the devices to be loaded.

S The LMF computer is connected to the BTS (refer toTable 3-6), and is
logged in using the GUI environment (refer to Table 3-7). Table 3-14: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices Step 1 1a 1b 1c Action Be sure the LMF will use the correct software release for code and data downloads by performing the following steps: - Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Tools > Update NextLoad > CDMA from the pull-down menus. - Click on the BTS to be loaded. -- The BTS will be highlighted. - Click the button next to the correct code version for the software release being used. -- A black dot will appear in the button circle. - Click Save. - Click OK to close each of the advisory boxes which appear. Prepare to download code to the MGLI by clicking on the device. Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Code/Data in the pull-down menus. - A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status. Click OK to close the status window. - The MGLI will automatically be downloaded with data and enabled. Once the MGLI is enabled, load and enable additional installed GLIs by clicking on the devices and repeating steps 3 and 4. Click OK to close the status window for the additional GLI devices.

1d 1e 2 3

4 5 6

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-43

Download the BTS

68P09255A57-O

Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices

Downloads to non-GLI devices can be performed individually for each device or all installed devices can be downloaded with one action.
NOTE

- CSM devices are RAM code-loaded at the factory. RAM code is downloaded to CSMs only if a newer software version needs to be loaded. - When downloading to multiple devices, the download may fail for some of the devices (a time-out occurs). These devices can be loaded individually after completing the multiple download. Follow the steps in Table 3-15 to download RAM code and data to non-GLI devices. Table 3-15: Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices

n Step 1 2

Action Select the target CSM, MCC, and/or BBX device(s) by clicking on them. Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Code/Data in the pull-down menus. - A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device. Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.

NOTE
After a BBX, CSM, or MCC device is successfully loaded with RAM code and has changed to the OOS_RAM state (yellow), the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.

NOTE
The command in Step 2 loads both code and data. Data can be downloaded without doing a code download anytime a device is OOS-RAM using the command in Step 4. 4 To download just the firmware application data to each device, select the target device and select: Device>Download>Data

BBX Cards Remain OOS_ROM

If BBX cards remain OOS_ROM (blue) after power-up or following code load, refer to Table 6-4, Steps 9 and 10.

3-44

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Download the BTS

Selecting CSM Clock Source and Enabling CSMs

CSMs must be enabled prior to enabling the MCCs. Procedures in the following two sub-sections cover the actions to accomplish this. For additional information on the CSM sub-system, see Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) Sub-system Description in the CSM System Time - GPS & LFR/HSO Verification section of this chapter.

Select CSM Clock Source

A CSM can one of have three different clock sources. The Select CSM Source function can be used to select the clock source for each of the three inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs to be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clock source options. S Local GPS

S S S S S S S S

Mate GPS Remote GPS HSO (only for source 2 & 3) HSO Extender HSOX (only for source 2 & 3) LFR (only for source 2 & 3) 10 MHz (only for source 2 & 3) NONE (only for source 2 & 3)

Prerequisites S MGLI is INS_ACT (bright green) S CSM is OOS_RAM (yellow) or INS_ACT (bright green)
Follow the procedure in Table 3-16 to select a CSM Clock Source. Table 3-16: Select CSM Clock Source n Step 1 2 Select the applicable CSM(s). Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select CSM/MAWI > Select Clock Source... in the pull-down menu list. - A CSM clock reference source selection window will appear. Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists. Uncheck the related check boxes for Clock Reference Sources 2 and 3 if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used. Click on the OK button. - A status report is displayed showing the results of the operation. Click on the OK button to close the status report window. Action

4 5

NOTE

For RF-GPS, verify the CSM configured with the GPS receiver daughter board is installed in the frames CSM 1 slot before continuing.
3-45

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Download the BTS Enable CSMs

68P09255A57-O

Each BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typical operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop (DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either an on-board GPS module (RF-GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R-GPS). The CSM2 card is required when using the R-GPS. The GPS receiver (mounted on CSM 1) is used as the primary timing reference and synchronizes the entire cellular system. CSM 2 provides redundancy (but does not have a GPS receiver).

The BTS may be equipped with a LORAN-C LFR, HSO, or external 10 MHz Rubidium source which the CSM can use as a secondary timing reference. The HSOX is used for expansion frames. In all cases, the CSM monitors and determines what reference to use at a given time. Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-17 to enable the CSMs installed in the C-CCP shelves. Table 3-17: Enable CSMs n Step 1 2 Action Click on the target CSM (CSM-2 first, if equipped with two CSMs). From the Device pull down, select Enable. - A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status. - Click OK to close the status report window.

NOTE
- The board in slot CSM 1 interfaces with the GPS receiver. The enable sequence for this board can take up to one hour (see below). - FAIL may be shown in the status report table for a slot CSM 1 enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown in the Description field, the CSM changes to the Enabled state after phase lock is achieved.

* IMPORTANT
- The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and operated by the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically alters satellite orbits; therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS contains an almanac that is updated periodically to take these changes into account. - If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for the GPS receiver almanac to be updated. - Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3-D position fix for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in service. (In some cases, the GPS receiver needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).

NOTE
- If equipped with two CSMs, CSM-1 should be bright green (INS-ACT) and CSM-2 should be dark green (INS-STY) - After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, observe the PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green (alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state). 3 If more than an hour has passed, refer to CSM Verification, see Figure 3-11 and Table 3-20 to determine the cause.

3-46

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Download the BTS

Enable MCCs
This procedure configures the MCC and sets the TX fine adjust parameter. The TX fine adjust parameter is not a transmit gain setting, but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in the BTS (approximately 3 mS). Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-18 to enable the MCCs installed in the C-CCP shelves.
NOTE

The MGLI and primary CSM must be downloaded and enabled (IN-SERVICE ACTIVE) before downloading and enabling the MCC. Table 3-18: Enable MCCs

n Step 1 2

Action Select the MCCs to be enabled or from the Select pull-down menu choose MCCs. Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable in the pull-down menu list. - A status report is displayed showing the results of the enable operation. Click on OK to close the status report window.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-47

CSM System Time - GPS & LFR/HSO Verification

68P09255A57-O

CSM System Time - GPS & LFR/HSO Verification

Clock Synchronization Manager System Time
The primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM in slot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy. The CSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using the remote GPS receiver (R-GPS). R-GPS uses a GPS receiver in the antenna head that has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can have a daughter card as a local GPS receiver to support an RF-GPS signal.

The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1 and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock Distribution Cards (CCDs) buffer and distribute even-second reference and 19.6608 MHz clocks. CCD 1 is married to CSM 1 and CCD 2 is married to CSM 2. A failure on CSM 1 or CCD 1 cause the system to switch to redundant CSM 2 and CCD 2. Each CSM2 board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides 19.6608 MHz clock, even second pulse, and 3 MHz referenced to the selected synchronization source (see Table 3-20):

S GPS: local/RF-GPS or remote/R-GPS S LORAN-C Frequency Receiver (LFR) or High Stability Oscillator
(HSO)

S External reference oscillator sources

Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPS synchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event of a GPS receiver failure on CSM 1. During normal operation, the CSM 1 board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-20). The source selection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software. Synchronization between the primary and redundant CSM CCD pairs, as well as the LFR or HSO back-up to GPS synchronization, increases reliability.

Front Panel LEDs

The status of the LEDs on the CSM boards are as follows:

S Steady Green - Master CSM locked to GPS or LFR (INS). S Rapidly Flashing Green - Standby CSM locked to GPS or LFR
(STBY).

S Flashing Green/Rapidly Flashing Red - CSM OOS-RAM attempting

to lock on GPS signal.

S Rapidly Flashing Green and Red - Alarm condition exists. Trouble

Notifications (TNs) are currently being reported to the GLI.

3-48

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

CSM System Time - GPS & LFR/HSO Verification

Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO)

General
The CSM and the LFR/HSO - The CSM performs the overall configuration and status monitoring functions for the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is capable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal. LFR - The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN-C RF signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which is synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. The LFR can maintain system time indefinitely after initial GPS lock. HSO - The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those geographical areas not covered by the LORAN-C system. Since the HSO is a free-standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock

Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOX

LFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to the expansion frames. The associated expansion frames require an HSO-expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame has an LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frame and interfaces with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR and LFR2 use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-20). HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-20).
NOTE

Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for 60 minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM board warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and oscillator frequency to stabilize prior to test. Test equipment warm-up allows the Rubidium standard timebase to stabilize in frequency before any measurements are made.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-49

CSM System Time - GPS & LFR/HSO Verification

68P09255A57-O

CSM Frequency Verification

The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the CSM boards before performing the RF path verification tests. Parts of this procedure will be repeated for final verification after the overall optimization has been completed.

Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)

Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-19 to set up test equipment. Table 3-19: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)

Step 1a

Action For local GPS (RF-GPS): Verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSM slot 1 and that CSM-1 is INS.

NOTE
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1. 1b For Remote GPS (RGPS):Verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM-1 is INS.

NOTE
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132ED or later. 2 3 4 Remove CSM-2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem board) to the MMI port on CSM-1 (see Figure 3-11). Reinstall CSM-2. Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see Table 3-3)

NOTE
The LMF program must be running when a Hyperterminal session is started. 5 When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSM> prompt appears.
CAUTION

Connect GPS antenna to the (GPS) RF connector ONLY. Damage to the GPS antenna and/or receiver can result if the GPS antenna is inadvertently connected to any other RF connector.

3-50

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

CSM System Time - GPS & LFR/HSO Verification

Figure 3-11: CSM MMI Terminal Connection

REFERENCE OSCILLATOR

CSM board shown removed from frame

MMI SERIAL PORT

3
EVEN SECOND TICK TEST POINT REFERENCE LED (NOTE 1) 19.6 MHZ TEST POINT REFERENCE GPS RECEIVER ANTENNA INPUT ANTENNA COAX CABLE GPS RECEIVER 9-PIN TO 9-PIN RS-232 CABLE NULL MODEM BOARD (TRN9666A)

FW00372

LMF NOTEBOOK

DB9-TO-DB25 ADAPTER

COM1

NOTES: 1. One LED on each CSM: Green = IN-SERVICE ACTIVE Fast Flashing Green = OOS-RAM Red = Fault Condition Flashing Green & Red = Fault

RS-232 SERIAL MODEM CABLE

GPS Initialization/Verification
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-20 to connect to CSM-1 installed in the C-CCP shelf, verifying that it is functioning normally.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-51

CSM System Time - GPS & LFR/HSO Verification

Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification Step 1 Action

68P09255A57-O

To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI command
bstatus

- Observe the following typical response:

CSM Status INS:ACTIVE Slot A Clock MASTER.

Clock Alarms (0000): DPLL is locked and has a reference source. GPS receiver self test result: passed Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11

Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and the GPS receivers.
sources

- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with LFR:
N Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 LocalGPS Primary 4 YES Good 0 0 Yes 1 LFR CHA Secondary 4 YES Good -2013177 -2013177 Yes 2 Not Used Current reference source number: 0

- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:
Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid ---------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes 1 HSO Backup 4 No N/A timed-out* Timed-out* No

*NOTE Timed-out should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. Not-Present or Faulty should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the HSO as a back-up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:
ss 1 12

After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and the LED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED has changed to green, enter sources <cr> at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a valid source by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the sources command. The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidium oscillator is fully warmed.
Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid ---------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes 1 HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx Yes

. . . continued on next page

3-52

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

CSM System Time - GPS & LFR/HSO Verification

Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step 3

Action HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source. If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit csm csmgen refsrc command.

* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify: - If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing ! - If timed out is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator is defective - Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage 4 Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above): - GPS information is usually the 0 reference source. - At least one Primary source must indicate Status = good and Valid = yes to bring the site up. . . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-53

CSM System Time - GPS & LFR/HSO Verification

Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification Step 5
gstatus

68P09255A57-O

Action Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode. - Observe the following typical response:
24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 (GPS) 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites. Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds. Recent Change Data: Antenna cable delay 0 ns. Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon -350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS) Initial position accuracy (0): estimated. GPS Receiver Status: Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon -350249750 msec, height 20270 cm Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon -350249750 msec, height 20270 cm 8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11 GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08 Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status: Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status: Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status: Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status: Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status: Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status: Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status: 8 satellites visible. 0.

0xa8 0xa8 0xa8 0xa8 0xa8 0xa8 0xa8 0xa8

GPS Receiver Identification: COPYRIGHT 1991-1996 MOTOROLA INC. SFTW P/N # 98-P36830P SOFTWARE VER # 8 SOFTWARE REV # 8 SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996 MODEL # B3121P1115 HDWR P/N # _ SERIAL # SSG0217769 MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07 OPTIONS LIST IB The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.

Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text): - At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible. - GPS Receiver Control Task State is tracking satellites. Do not continue until this occurs! - Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30. Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1). . . . continued on next page

3-54

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

CSM System Time - GPS & LFR/HSO Verification

Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step 7 If steps 1 through 6 pass, the GPS is good.

Action

* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that: - If Initial position accuracy is estimated (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has been entered into CDF file). - If Initial position accuracy is surveyed, position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to be accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position. - The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned. - GPS antenna connector center conductor measures approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the shield. - There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame GPS input. - Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly. 8 Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS acquisition has taken place.
debug dpllp

Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of power) (If warmed-up proceed to step 9)
CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left. DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left. DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left. ...........etc.

NOTE
The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm-up, but the reference oscillator will be unstable. 9 Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.
c:17486 c:17486 c:17470 c:17486 c:17470 c:17470 off: off: off: off: off: off: -11, -11, -11, -11, -11, -11, 3, 3, 1, 3, 1, 1, 6 6 6 6 6 6 TK TK TK TK TK TK SRC:0 SRC:0 SRC:0 SRC:0 SRC:0 SRC:0 S0: S0: S0: S0: S0: S0: 3 3 1 3 1 1 S1:-2013175,-2013175 S1:-2013175,-2013175 S1:-2013175,-2013175 S1:-2013175,-2013175 S1:-2013175,-2013175 S1:-2013175,-2013175

10

Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right): - Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than -60 (equates to 3 s limit). - Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3 s limit). - TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS. Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.
debug dpllp

11

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-55

CSM System Time - GPS & LFR/HSO Verification

68P09255A57-O

LORAN-C Initialization/Verification
Table 3-21: LORAN-C Initialization/Verification Step 1 Action At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus <cr> to verify that the LFR is in tracking mode. A typical response is:
CSM> lstatus <cr> LFR Station St t St ti Status: Clock coherence: 512 5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N 5930X 52/64 dn -1 S/N 5990 47/55 dB -6 S/N 7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N 7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N 7980X 48/54 dB -4 S/N 7980Y 46/58 dB -8 S/N 7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N 8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N 8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N 8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N 8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N 8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N 8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N 8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N 8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N 9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N 9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N 9610W 47/49 dB -4 S/N 9610X 46/57 dB -5 S/N 9610Y 48/54 dB -5 S/N 9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N 9940M 50/53 dB -1 S/N 9940W 49/56 dB -4 S/N 4 9940Y 46/50 dB-10 S/N 9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N 9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N 9960X 51/63 dB -1 S/N 9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N 9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N

Note

> This must be greater Flag: Flag: Flag: Flag: Fl Flag: . PLL Station . Flag: Flag:E Flag: Flag: Flag Flag: Flag: Flag: Flag: Flag: Flag: Flag: g Flag: Fl Flag: Flag:E Flag:E Flag:E Flag: Flag Flag:S Flag:E Flag:E Flag: Flag: Flag: Flag: Flag: Fl

than 100 before LFR becomes a valid source.

> This shows the LFR is

locked to the selected PLL station.

LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980W LFR Recent Change Data: Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960 PLL GRI: 7980W LFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source. CSM>

This search list and PLL data must match the configuration for the > geographical location of the cell site.

. . . continued on next page

3-56

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

CSM System Time - GPS & LFR/HSO Verification

Table 3-21: LORAN-C Initialization/Verification

Step 2

Action

Note

Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type): - Locate the dot that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM). - Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Z assignment. - Verify the S/N ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8. At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr> to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver. - Observe the following typical response.
Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid ---------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good -3 0 Yes 1 LFR ch A Secondary 4 Yes Good -2013177 -2013177 Yes 2 Not used Current reference source number: 1

LORAN LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source (verified from left to right).

* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify: - The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned. - The antenna pre-amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m (300 ft) in length. - A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place. - The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .

NOTE
LFR functionality should be verified using the source command (as shown in Step 3). Use the underlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation. 5 Close the hyperterminal window.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-57

Test Equipment Set-up

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Set-up

Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS
The following test equipment is required to perform calibration and ATP tests:

S LMF S Communications system analyzer model supported by the LMF S Power meter model supported by the LMF (required when using the
HP 8921A/600 and Advantest R3465 analyzers)

S Non-radiating transmit line termination load S Directional coupler and in-line attenuator S RF cables and adapters
Refer to Table 3-22 and Table 3-23 for an overview of connections for test equipment currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see the following figures:

S Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13 show cable calibration test setup. S Figure 3-15, Figure 3-16 and Figure 3-18 show the test set
connections for TX calibration.

S Figure 3-18 and Figure 3-19 show test set connections for IS-95 A/B
optimization/ATP tests

S Figure 3-20 through Figure 3-23 shows test set connections for
IS-95 A/B/C optimization/ATP tests.

S Figure 3-24 and Figure 3-25 show typical TX and RX ATP setup with
a directional coupler (shown with and without RFDS).

Test Equipment GPIB Address Settings

All test equipment is controlled by the LMF through an IEEE-488/GPIB bus. To communicate on the bus, each piece of test equipment must have a GPIB address set which the LMF will recognize. The standard address settings used by the LMF for the various types of test equipment items are as follows:

S Signal generator address: 1 S Power meter address: 13 S Communications system analyzer: 18

Using the procedures included in the Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F, verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address of each piece of test equipment used to match the above

3-58

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Set-up

Supported Test Equipment

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the test equipment, all TX test connections must be through the directional coupler and in-line attenuator as shown in the test setup illustrations.

IS-95 A/B Testing

Optimization and ATP testing for IS-95A/B sites or carriers may be performed using one of the following test equipment:

S CyberTest S Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generator and
HP-437B or Gigatronics Power Meter

S Agilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generator S Agilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP
8935)

S Hewlett-Packard HP 8921 (with CDMA interface for 1.9 GHz PCS

Interface) and HP-437B or Gigatronics Power Meter

S Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) - optional S Rubidium Standard Timebase - optional CDMA2000 1X Operation
Optimization and ATP testing for CDMA2000 1X sites or carriers may be performed using the following test equipment:

S Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generator S Agilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generator S Agilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP
8935) with option 200 or R2K and with E4432B signal generator for 1X FER
NOTE

E4432B signal generator for 1X FER needs to have the options UN8, 1E5, and 201.

Test Equipment Preparation

See Appendix F for specific steps to prepare each type of test set and power meter to perform calibration and ATP .

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-59

Test Equipment Set-up

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Connection Charts

To use the following charts to identify necessary test equipment connections, locate the communications system analyzer being used in the COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER columns, and read down the column. Where a dot appears in the column, connect one end of the test cable to that connector. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end connection(s), reading up the column to identify the appropriate equipment and/or BTS connector.

IS-95A/B-only Test Equipment Connections 3

Table 3-22 depicts the interconnection requirements for currently available test equipment supporting IS-95A/B only which meets Motorola standards and is supported by the LMF. Table 3-22: IS-95A/B-only Test Equipment Interconnection
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT Attenuator & Directional Coupler

SIGNAL
EVEN SECOND SYNCHRONIZATION

Cyber-Test

Advantest R3465

HP 8921A
EVEN SECOND SYNC IN

HP 8921 W/PCS
EVEN SECOND SYNC IN

Power Meter

GPIB Interface

LMF

BTS
SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC REF

EVEN SEC SYNC IN

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

TIME BASE IN

CDMA TIME BASE IN

CDMA TIME BASE IN

CDMA TIME BASE IN

FREQ MONITOR

CONTROL IEEE 488 BUS

IEEE 488

GPIB

HP-I B

HP-IB

HP-IB

GPIB

SERIAL PORT

TX TEST CABLES

RF IN/OUT

INPUT 50W

RF IN/OUT

RF IN/OUT

20 DB BTS ATTEN. PORT

TX1-6

RX TEST CABLES

RF GEN OUT

RF OUT 50W

DUPLEX OUT

RF OUT ONLY

RX1-6

3-60

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Set-up CDMA2000 1X/IS-95A/B-capable Test Equipment Connections

Table 3-23 depicts the interconnection requirements for currently available test equipment supporting both CDMA 2000 1X and IS-95A/B which meets Motorola standards and is supported by the LMF. Table 3-23: CDMA2000 1X/IS-95A/B Test Equipment Interconnection
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER Agilent 8935 (Option 200 or R2K)
EVEN SECOND SYNC IN

ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT Agilent E4432 Signal Gen. Advantest R3562 Signal Generator Attenuator & Directional Coupler

3
BTS
SYNC MONITOR

SIGNAL
EVEN SECOND SYNCHRONIZATION

Advantest R3267

Agilent E4406A

Power Meter

GPIB Interface

LMF

EXT TRIG

TRIGGER IN

PATTERN TRIG IN

EXT TRIG IN

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

EXT REF IN

EXT REF IN

MOD TIME BASE IN

FREQ MONITOR

CONTROL IEEE 488 BUS

HP-IB

GP-IB

GPIB

GPIB

GP-IB

HP-IB

GPIB

SERIAL PORT

10 MHZ

10 MHZ REF OUT

10 MHZ OUT

10 MHZ OUT 10 MHZ (SWITCHED) IN

SYNTHE REF IN

SIGNAL SOURCE CONTROLLED SERIAL I/O

SERIAL I/O

SERIAL I/O

TX TEST CABLES

RF IN/OUT

INPUT 50 W

RF INPUT 50 W

20 DB BTS ATTEN. PORT

TX1-6

RX TEST CABLES

DUPLEX OUT *

RF OUTPUT 50 W

RF OUT 50 W

RX1-6

* WHEN USED ALONE, THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K SUPPORTS IS-95A/B RX TESTING BUT NOT 1X RX TESTING.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-61

Test Equipment Set-up

68P09255A57-O

Equipment Warm-up
NOTE

Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. This assures BTS stability and contributes to optimization accuracy. - Time spent running initial or normal power-up, hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as warm-up time. Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS TX OUT connector, verify there are no CDMA channels keyed. - At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC place the antenna (sector) assigned to the BBX under test OOS. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.

WARNING

Automatic Cable Calibration Set-up

Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13 show the cable calibration setup for the test sets supported by the LMF. The left side of the diagram depicts the location of the input and output connectors of each test equipment item, and the right side details the connections for each test. Table 3-27 provides a procedure for performing automatic cable calibration.

Manual Cable Calibration

If manual cable calibration is required, refer to the procedures in Appendix F.

3-62

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Set-up

Figure 3-12: IS-95A/B Cable Calibration Test Setup CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921A

SUPPORTED TEST SETS Motorola CyberTest

CALIBRATION SET UP A. SHORT CABLE CAL

SHORT CABLE

ANT IN

Note: The 30 dB directional coupler is not used with the Cybertest test set. The TX cable is connected directly to the Cybertest test set. A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest test set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable calibration procedure, not with the test cables for TX calibration and ATP tests.

Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)

SHORT CABLE

ANT IN

DUPLEX OUT

Advantest Model R3465 C. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP

50 ERM. DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)

Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A

DUPLEX OUT

ANT IN

Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannot be used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

TEST SET

3
RF GEN OUT

B. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDC

N-N FEMALE ADAPTER

RX CABLE

TEST SET

RF OUT 50

INPUT 50 100-W ATT (MIN) NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD 20 DB IN-LINE ATTENUATOR TX CABLE

SHORT CABLE

N-N FEMALE ADAPTER

TX CABLE FOR TX TEST CABLE CALIBRATION RX CABLE FOR DRDC RX TEST CABLE CALIBRATION

TEST SET

ti-CDMA-WP-00171-v01-ildoc-ftw

3-63

Test Equipment Set-up

Figure 3-13: IS-95A/B and CDMA 2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562

68P09255A57-O

SUPPORTED TEST SETS

Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)

CALIBRATION SET UP A. SHORT CABLE CAL

SHORT CABLE

TEST SET

3
RF OUTPUT 50

B. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDC

N-N FEMALE ADAPTER RF INPUT 50 NOTE: 10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER (FIGURE F-15). SHORT CABLE RX CABLE

Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)

TEST SET

INPUT 50

D. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP

50 ERM. DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)

RF OUT 50

100-W ATT (MIN) NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD

20 DB IN-LINE ATTENUATOR TX CABLE

NOTE: SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM ANALYZER SHORT CABLE

N-N FEMALE ADAPTER

TX CABLE FOR TX TEST CABLE CALIBRATION RX CABLE FOR DRDC RX TEST CABLE CALIBRATION

TEST SET

ti-CDMA-WP-00172-v01-ildoc-ftw

3-64

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Set-up

Figure 3-14: CDMA2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup Agilent 8935/E4432B and Agilent E7495A
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
Agilent E4432B (Top) and 8935 Series E6380A (Bottom)
SHORT CABLE

CALIBRATION SET UP A. SHORT CABLE CAL

TEST SET

RF OUTPUT 50

3
B. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDC

ANT IN NOTE: 10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE STATION TEST SET (NO TAG). SHORT CABLE

Agilent E7495A

RF IN

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

RF OUT

N-N FEMALE ADAPTER

RX CABLE

TEST SET

D. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP

50 ERM. DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)

100-W ATT (MIN) NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD

20 DB IN-LINE ATTENUATOR TX CABLE

SHORT CABLE

N-N FEMALE ADAPTER

TX CABLE FOR TX TEST CABLE CALIBRATION RX CABLE FOR DRDC RX TEST CABLE CALIBRATION

TEST SET

3-65

Test Equipment Set-up

68P09255A57-O

Set-up for TX Calibration

Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the test set connections for TX calibration. Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup - CyberTest (IS-95A/B) and Agilent 8935 (IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)

TEST SETS

TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP

NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT THE TX TEST CABLE TO THE DRDC ANTENNA CONNECTOR. POWER SENSOR POWER METER (OPTIONAL)* COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET

Motorola CyberTest

FRONT PANEL

NOTE: THE 30 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.

Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)

HP-IB TO GPIB BOX RX ANTENNA CONNECTOR

3-66

100-W ATT (MIN.) NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD RF IN/OUT

RF IN/OUT GPIB TX TEST CABLE * A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/ AUDIT

50 TERM .

DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)

2O DB IN-LINE ATTENUATOR TX TEST CABLE

TX ANTENNA CONNECTOR

TRDC
RX RX BTS ANT CPLD CPLD TX TX BTS ANT CPLD CPLD * BLACK RECTANGLES REPRESENT THE RAISED PART OF SWITCHES DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

GPIB CABLE

RF IN/OUT

INTERNAL RX CABLE

INTERNAL TX CABLE TO LPA TRUNKING MODULE

S MODE DATA FORMAT BAUD RATE

TO MPC

ON

BTS
FREQ MONITOR SYNC MONITOR LAN B LAN A 10BASET/ 10BASE2 CONVERTER CSM

GPIB ADRS RS232-GPIB INTERFACE BOX

G MODE

RS232 NULL MODEM CABLE

CDMA LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

ti-CDMA-WP-00173-v01-ildoc-ftw

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Set-up

Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup - Using Power Meter

TEST SETS
NOTE: THE HP8921A AND ADVANTEST R3465 CANNOT BE USED FOR TX CALIBRATION. A POWER METER MUST BE USED.
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT THE TX TEST CABLE TO THE DRDC ANTENNA CONNECTOR.

TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP

POWER SENSOR

POWER METER

100-W ATT (MIN.) NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD TX TEST CABLE

50 TERM .

DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)

2O DB IN-LINE ATTENUATOR TX TEST CABLE

RX ANTENNA CONNECTOR

TX ANTENNA CONNECTOR

TRDC
RX RX BTS ANT CPLD CPLD TX TX BTS ANT CPLD CPLD * BLACK RECTANGLES REPRESENT THE RAISED PART OF SWITCHES DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

GPIB CABLE

INTERNAL RX CABLE

INTERNAL TX CABLE TO LPA TRUNKING MODULE

S MODE DATA FORMAT BAUD RATE

TO MPC

ON

BTS
FREQ MONITOR SYNC MONITOR LAN B LAN A 10BASET/ 10BASE2 CONVERTER CSM

GPIB ADRS RS232-GPIB INTERFACE BOX

G MODE

RS232 NULL MODEM CABLE

CDMA LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

ti-CDMA-WP-00174-v01-ildoc-ftw

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-67

Test Equipment Set-up

Figure 3-17: TX Calibration Test Setup - Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567 (IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)
TEST SETS
Agilent E4406A
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED RX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECT THE TX TEST CABLE TO THE DRDC ANTENNA CONNECTOR.

68P09255A57-O

TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP

POWER SENSOR POWER METER (OPTIONAL)* COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET

100-W ATT (MIN.) NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD

RF INPUT 50 OR INPUT 50 GPIB TX TEST CABLE * A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/ AUDIT

RF INPUT 50

50 TERM .

DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)

2O DB IN-LINE ATTENUATOR TX TEST CABLE

Advantest R3267
RX ANTENNA CONNECTOR TX ANTENNA CONNECTOR

TRDC
RX RX BTS ANT CPLD CPLD TX TX BTS ANT CPLD CPLD * BLACK RECTANGLES REPRESENT THE RAISED PART OF SWITCHES DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

GPIB CABLE

INTERNAL RX CABLE

INTERNAL TX CABLE TO LPA TRUNKING MODULE

S MODE DATA FORMAT BAUD RATE

TO MPC

ON

INPUT 50

BTS
FREQ MONITOR SYNC MONITOR LAN B LAN A 10BASET/ 10BASE2 CONVERTER CSM

GPIB ADRS RS232-GPIB INTERFACE BOX

G MODE

RS232 NULL MODEM CABLE

CDMA LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

ti-CDMA-WP-00175-v01-ildoc-ftw

3-68

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Set-up

Set-up for Optimization/ATP

Figure 3-18 and Figure 3-19 show the test set connections for optimization/ATP tests. Figure 3-18: IS-95A/B Opto/ATP Test Set-up, TRDC Shown-CyberTest & Advantest R3465
TEST SETS
Motorola CyberTest
SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD RX TEST CABLE

Optimization/ATP SET UP
RF GEN OUT OR RF OUT 50 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER CDMA TIMEBASE IN EVEN SECOND/ SYNC IN RF IN/OUT OR INPUT 50 TX TEST CABLE RF GEN OUT 50 TERM . DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)

NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED RX/TX SIGNALS), BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DRDC ANTENNA CONNECTOR. (SEE FIGURE 3-20.) 100-W ATT (MIN.) NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD

3
GPIB

NOTE: The 30 dB directional coupler is not used with the Cybertest test set. The TX cable is connected directly to the Cybertest test set.
Advantest Model R3465
SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD BNC T RF OUT 50 RX RX BTS ANT CPLD CPLD FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

Jan 2003

RF IN/OUT

2O DB IN-LINE ATTENUATOR TX TEST CABLE TX ANTENNA CONNECTOR

RX ANTENNA CONNECTOR

TRDC
TX TX BTS ANT CPLD CPLD * BLACK RECTANGLES REPRESENT THE RAISED PART OF SWITCHES DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

GPIB CABLE

GPIB CONNECTS TO BACK OF UNIT INPUT 50 TO EXT TRIGGER CONNECTOR ON REAR OF TEST SET (FOR DETAILS, SEE FIGURE F-13)

INTERNAL RX CABLE

INTERNAL TX CABLE TO LPA TRUNKING MODULE

S MODE DATA FORMAT BAUD RATE

TO MPC

ON

BTS
FREQ MONITOR SYNC MONITOR LAN B LAN A 10BASET/ 10BASE2 CONVERTER CSM

GPIB ADRS RS232-GPIB INTERFACE BOX

G MODE

RS232 NULL MODEM CABLE

CDMA LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

ti-CDMA-WP-00176-v01-ildoc-ftw

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-69

Test Equipment Set-up

Figure 3-19: IS-95A/B Optimization/ATP Test Setup - HP 8921A
TEST SETS
Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface (for 1900 MHz)
SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD RX TEST CABLE NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED WITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED RX/TX SIGNALS), BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DRDC ANTENNA CONNECTOR. (SEE FIGURE 3-20.) 100-W ATT (MIN.) NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD

68P09255A57-O

Optimization/ATP SET UP
RF OUT ONLY HP PCS INTERFACE*

PCS INTERFACE INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS

RF IN/OUT

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER CDMA TIMEBASE IN EVEN SECOND/ SYNC IN

GPIB CONNECTS TO BACK OF UNITS

TX TEST CABLE

GPIB

50 TERM . RF IN/OUT RF OUT ONLY

DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)

* FOR 1900 MHZ ONLY

Hewlett Packard Model HP 8921A (for 800 MHz)

SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

2O DB IN-LINE ATTENUATOR TX TEST CABLE TX ANTENNA CONNECTOR

RX ANTENNA CONNECTOR

TRDC
GPIB CONNECTS TO BACK OF UNIT RX RX BTS ANT CPLD CPLD TX TX BTS ANT CPLD CPLD * BLACK RECTANGLES REPRESENT THE RAISED PART OF SWITCHES DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

GPIB CABLE

INTERNAL RX CABLE RF IN/OUT DUPLEX OUT

INTERNAL TX CABLE TO LPA TRUNKING MODULE

S MODE DATA FORMAT BAUD RATE

TO MPC

ON

NOTE: FOR 800 MHZ TESTING, CONNECT CABLES TO THE HP 8921A AS FOLLOWS: RX TEST CABLE TO DUPLEX OUT TX TEST CABLE TO RF IN/OUT LAN B LAN A 10BASET/ 10BASE2 CONVERTER

BTS
FREQ MONITOR SYNC MONITOR CSM

GPIB ADRS RS232-GPIB INTERFACE BOX

G MODE

RS232 NULL MODEM CABLE

CDMA LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

ti-CDMA-WP-00177-v01-ildoc-ftw

3-70

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Set-up

Figure 3-20: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs Agilent Test Equipment
TEST SETS
Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)
SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD HP-IB TO GPIB BOX

Optimization/ATP SET UP
RF OUTPUT 50 OR DUPLEX OUT SIGNAL GENERATOR 10 MHZ IN RX TEST CABLE RF IN/OUT OR RF INPUT 50 100-W ATT (MIN.) NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD PATTERN TRIG IN COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER TRIGGER IN OR EVEN SEC SYNCH IN GPIB TX TEST CABLE GPIB

DUPLEX OUT 10 MHZ REF OUT NOTE:

THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K CAN PERFORM 1X TX ACCEPTANCE TESTING BUT NOT 1X RX ACCEPTANCE TESTING. AN EXTERNAL SIGNAL GENERATOR MUST BE USED TO PERFORM 1X RX TESTING.

Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)

10 MHZ IN 10 MHZ OUT

TO PATTERN TRIG IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR

TO TRIGGER IN ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER

BNC T

SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

Agilent E7495A

RF IN

TO EXT REF IN FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

RF IN/OUT RF OUTPUT 50 RF INPUT 50 ANT CPLD TO EXT REF IN ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER TO BASEBAND GEN. REF. IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR BNC T INTERNAL RX CABLE FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD LAN A RF OUT SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

10 MHZ OUT

EXT REF IN

BNC T

50 TERM . DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB) 2O DB IN-LINE ATTENUATOR TX TEST CABLE

DUPLEXED TX/RX ANTENNA CONNECTOR

GPIB CABLE

DRDC
BTS CPLD

INTERNAL TX CABLE

* BLACK RECTANGLES REPRESENT THE RAISED PART OF SWITCHES DIP SWITCH SETTINGS *

TO MPC

TO LPA TRUNKING MODULE

S MODE DATA FORMAT BAUD RATE

ON

BTS
GPIB ADRS FREQ MONITOR SYNC MONITOR LAN B CSM RS232-GPIB INTERFACE BOX RS232 NULL MODEM CABLE G MODE

10BASET/ 10BASE2 CONVERTER

CDMA LMF

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

INTERNAL PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD ti-CDMA-WP-00178-v01-ildoc-ftw

3-71

Test Equipment Set-up

Figure 3-21: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment
TEST SETS
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
RX TEST CABLE

68P09255A57-O

Optimization/ATP SET UP
RF OUT 50 SIGNAL GENERATOR MOD TIME BASE IN TO EXT TRIG ON REAR OF SPECTRUM ANALYZER EXT TRIG IN SYNTHE REF IN GPIB SPECTRUM ANALYZER 100-W ATT (MIN.) NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD INPUT 50 TX TEST CABLE BNC T BNC T

10 MHZ OUT

INPUT 50

EXT TRIG GPIB

RF OUT 50

50 TERM . DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB) 2O DB IN-LINE ATTENUATOR TX TEST CABLE

FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD NOTE:

SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM ANALYZER

DUPLEXED TX/RX ANTENNA CONNECTOR

GPIB CABLE

DRDC
ANT CPLD BTS CPLD

INTERNAL RX CABLE

INTERNAL TX CABLE

* BLACK RECTANGLES REPRESENT THE RAISED PART OF SWITCHES DIP SWITCH SETTINGS S MODE DATA FORMAT BAUD RATE

TO MPC

TO LPA TRUNKING MODULE

ON

BTS
GPIB ADRS FREQ MONITOR SYNC MONITOR LAN B LAN A 10BASET/ 10BASE2 CONVERTER CSM RS232-GPIB INTERFACE BOX RS232 NULL MODEM CABLE G MODE

CDMA LMF

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

INTERNAL PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD ti-CDMA-WP-00179-v01-ildoc-ftw

3-72

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Set-up

Figure 3-22: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs Agilent Test Equipment
TEST SETS
RX TEST CABLE

Optimization/ATP SET UP
RF OUTPUT 50 OR DUPLEX OUT SIGNAL GENERATOR 10 MHZ IN PATTERN TRIG IN RF IN/OUT OR RF INPUT 50 100-W ATT (MIN.) NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER TRIGGER IN OR EVEN SEC SYNCH IN GPIB TX TEST CABLE BNC T GPIB

Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)

SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD HP-IB TO GPIB BOX

10 MHZ OUT

DUPLEX OUT 10 MHZ REF OUT NOTE:

THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K CAN PERFORM 1X TX ACCEPTANCE TESTING BUT NOT 1X RX ACCEPTANCE TESTING. AN EXTERNAL SIGNAL GENERATOR MUST BE USED TO PERFORM 1X RX TESTING.

Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)

10 MHZ IN 10 MHZ OUT

TO PATTERN TRIG IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR

TO TRIGGER IN ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER

TO EXT REF IN ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER

BNC T

SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

Agilent E7495A

RF IN

TO EXT REF IN FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

RF IN/OUT 50 TERM . RF OUTPUT 50 RX ANTENNA CONNECTOR

EXT REF IN

DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)

2O DB IN-LINE ATTENUATOR

TX TEST CABLE

TX ANTENNA CONNECTOR

GPIB CABLE

TRDC
RX RX BTS ANT CPLD CPLD TX TX BTS ANT CPLD CPLD

RF INPUT 50

TO BASEBAND GEN. REF. IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR BNC T

INTERNAL RX CABLE

INTERNAL TX CABLE

* BLACK RECTANGLES REPRESENT THE RAISED PART OF SWITCHES DIP SWITCH SETTINGS S MODE DATA FORMAT BAUD RATE

TO MPC

TO LPA TRUNKING MODULE

ON

BTS
GPIB ADRS FREQ MONITOR SYNC MONITOR LAN B LAN A 10BASET/ 10BASE2 CONVERTER CSM RS232-GPIB INTERFACE BOX RS232 NULL MODEM CABLE G MODE

CDMA LMF

RF OUT

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

INTERNAL PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD ti-CDMA-WP-00180-v01-ildoc-ftw

3-73

Test Equipment Set-up

68P09255A57-O

Figure 3-23: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs - Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment, Agilent E7495A
TEST SETS
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
RX TEST CABLE

Optimization/ATP SET UP
RF OUT 50 SIGNAL GENERATOR MOD TIME BASE IN TO EXT TRIG ON REAR OF SPECTRUM ANALYZER EXT TRIG IN SYNTHE REF IN GPIB SPECTRUM ANALYZER 100-W ATT (MIN.) NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD INPUT 50 TX TEST CABLE BNC T 50 TERM . DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB) BNC T

10 MHZ OUT

INPUT 50

EXT TRIG GPIB

RF OUT 50

FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

2O DB IN-LINE ATTENUATOR

TX TEST CABLE

NOTE: SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM ANALYZER RX ANTENNA CONNECTOR TX ANTENNA CONNECTOR

GPIB CABLE

TRDC
RX RX BTS ANT CPLD CPLD TX TX BTS ANT CPLD CPLD

Agilent E7495A

INTERNAL RX CABLE

INTERNAL TX CABLE

* BLACK RECTANGLES REPRESENT THE RAISED PART OF SWITCHES DIP SWITCH SETTINGS S MODE DATA FORMAT BAUD RATE

TO MPC

TO LPA TRUNKING MODULE

ON

RF IN

TO EXT REF IN FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

RF OUT

BTS
GPIB ADRS G MODE FREQ MONITOR SYNC MONITOR LAN B LAN A 10BASET/ 10BASE2 CONVERTER CSM RS232-GPIB INTERFACE BOX RS232 NULL MODEM CABLE

SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

CDMA LMF

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

INTERNAL PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD ti-CDMA-WP-00181-v01-ildoc-ftw

3-74

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Set-up

TX ATP Setup
Figure 3-24 shows a typical TX ATP setup. Figure 3-24: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with and without RFDS)
TX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS COBRA RFDS Detail
TX RF FROM BTS FRAME 3 2 1 RX (RFM TX) TX (RFM RX) RFDS RX (RFM TX) COUPLER OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS) ASU2 (SHADED) CONNECTORS RF FEED LINE TO DIRECTIONAL COUPLER REMOVED

Appropriate test sets and the port names for all model test sets are described in Table 3-22.
40W NON-RADIATING RF LOAD

Connect TX test cable between the directional coupler input port and the appropriate TX antenna directional coupler connector.

COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET IN

RVS (REFLECTED) PORT 50-OHM TERMINATION OUTPUT PORT TEST DIRECTIONAL COUPLER

30 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER BTS INPUT PORT

TX TEST CABLE

NOTE: THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.

TX TEST CABLE

FWD (INCIDENT) PORT FW00116 ONE 20 DB 20 W IN LINE ATTENUATOR

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-75

Test Equipment Set-up

Figure 3-25: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with or without RFDS)
COBRA RFDS Detail RX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
RX RF FROM BTS FRAME 2 3 4 5 6 RX (RFM TX) 1 TX (RFM RX) RFDS TX (RFM RX) COUPLER OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS) ASU1 (SHADED) CONNECTORS

68P09255A57-O

RF FEED LINE TO TX ANTENNA REMOVED

Appropriate test sets and the port names for all model test sets are described in Table 3-22.

Connect RX test cable between the test set and the appropriate RX antenna directional coupler.

COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET

OUT

RX Test Cable

NOTE: THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.

FW00115

3-76

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Set Calibration

Test Set Calibration

Background
Proper test equipment setup ensures that the test equipment and associated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and that measurements are correct.
NOTE

If the test equipment set being used to optimize or test the BTS has been calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does not need to be performed. This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization. Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables and adapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) has been calibrated and maintained as a set.

CAUTION

If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter that makes up the calibrated test equipment set has been replaced, the set must be re-calibrated. Failure to do so can introduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrect measurements and degradation to system performance. Motorola recommends repeating cable calibration before testing at each BTS site. Calibration of the communications system analyzer (or equivalent test equipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating the overall test equipment set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a a minimum of 60 minutes.

NOTE

Calibration Procedures Included

Automatic
Procedures included in this section use the LMF automated calibration routine to determine path losses of the supported communications analyzer, power meter, associated test cables, adapters, and (if used) antenna switch that make up the overall calibrated test equipment set. After calibration, the gain/loss offset values are stored in a test measurement offset file on the LMF computer.

Manual
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester - The E4406A does not support the power level zeroing calibration performed by the LMF. If this instrument is to be used for Bay Level Offset calibration and calibration is attempted with the LMF Calibrate Test Equipment function, the LMF will return a status window failure message stating that zeroing power is not supported by the E4406A. Refer to the Equipment Calibration section of Appendix F for instructions on using the instruments self-alignment (calibration) function prior to performing Bay Level Offset calibration. Power Meters - Manual power meter calibration procedures to be performed prior to automated calibration are included in the Equipment Calibration section of Appendix F.
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-77

Test Set Calibration

68P09255A57-O

Cable Calibration - Manual cable calibration procedures using the HP 8921A and Advantest R3465 communications system analyzers are provided in the Manual Cable Calibration section of Appendix F, if needed.

GPIB Addresses
GPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any address in that range, but the numbers entered in the LMF Options window GPIB address box must match the addresses of the test equipment. Motorola recommends using 1 for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18 for a communications system analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the test equipment, refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F.

Selecting Test Equipment

Use LMF Options from the Options menu list to select test equipment automatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.

Prerequisites
A Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided for test equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when the test equipment items are connected directly to the CDMA LMF computer via a GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tab is used when the test equipment is to be connected remotely via a network connection. Ensure the following has been completed before selecting test equipment:

S Test equipment is correctly connected and turned on. S CDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to
the GPIB box.

Selecting Test Equipment

Test equipment may be selected either manually with operator input or automatically using the LMF autodetect feature.

3-78

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Set Calibration

Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab

Test equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the test equipment is connected. CDMA LMF does not check to see if the test equipment is actually detected for manual specification. Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Tools menu, select Options. The LMF Options window appears. Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront). Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1). Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled). Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used. Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box (refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F for directions on verifying and/or changing test equipment GPIB addresses). Motorola-recommended addresses are: 1 = signal generator 13 = power meter 18 = communications system analyzer Action

* IMPORTANT
When test equipment items are manually selected by the operator, the LMF defaults to using a power meter for RF power measurements. The LMF will use a communications system analyzer for RF power measurements only if a power meter is not selected (power meter checkbox not checked). 7 8 Click on Apply. (The button will darken until the selection has been committed.) Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-79

Test Set Calibration

68P09255A57-O

Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab

When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the CDMA LMF examines which test equipment items are actually communicating with CDMA LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to use the auto-detect feature. Table 3-25: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect Step 1 From the Tools menu, select Options. The LMF Options window appears. Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront). Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1). Click on Auto-Detection (if not enabled). Type in the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed). Action

2 3 4 5

NOTE
Refer to the Setting GPIB addresses section of Appendix F for instructions on verifying or changing test equipment GPIB addresses, if necessary. When both a power meter and analyzer are selected, the first item listed in the GPIB addresses to search box will be used for RF power measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a signal generator is normally 1, a power meter is normally 13 and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If 1,13,18 are included in the GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) will be used for RF power measurements. If the test equipment items are manually selected the CDMA analyzer is used only if a power meter is not selected. 6 7 Click Apply. The button will darken until the selection has been committed. A check mark will appear in the Manual Configuration section for detected test equipment items. Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.

3-80

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Set Calibration

Calibrating Test Equipment

The LMF Calibrate Test Equipment function zeros the power measurement level of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit. If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected (for example, an HP 437 and an HP8921A/600), only the power meter is zeroed.
NOTE

The Agilent E4406A transmitter tester does not support power measurement level zeroing. Refer to the Equipment Calibration section of Appendix F for E4406A calibration.

Prerequisites S LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to the
GPIB box.

S Test equipment is turned on and has warmed up for at least 60

minutes.

S Test equipment has been selected in the LMF (Table 3-24 or

Table 3-25) Follow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the test equipment. Table 3-26: Test Equipment Calibration n Step 1 Action From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment from the pull-down menu. A Directions window is displayed. Follow the directions provided. Click on Continue to close the Directions window and start the calibration process. A status report window is displayed. Click on OK to close the status report window.

2 3

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-81

Test Set Calibration

68P09255A57-O

Calibrating Cables Overview

The cable calibration function is used to measure the loss (in dB) for the TX and RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is used to measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable configuration and RX cable configuration). The cable calibration consists of the following procedures.

S Measure the loss of a short cable. This is done to compensate for any
measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable, which is used only for the calibration process, is used in series with both the TX and RX cable configuration when they are measured. The measured loss of the short cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX cable configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX cable configurations. This deduction is done so any error in the analyzer measurement will be adjusted out of both the TX and RX measurements.

S Measure the short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss. The RX
cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable with type-N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX port the test equipment.

S Measure the short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss is

measured. The TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables with type-N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additional attenuator if required by the BTS type. The total loss of the path loss of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS (normally 30 or 50 dB). The Motorola Cybertest analyzer is different in that the required attenuation/load is built into the test set so the TX cable configuration consists only of the required length coax cable.

3-82

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Set Calibration

Calibrating Test Cabling using Communications System Analyzer

NOTE

LMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished with an HP8921A analyzer for 1.9 GHz. A different analyzer type or the signal generator and spectrum analyzer method (Table 3-28 and Table 3-29) must be used. Cable calibration values must be manually entered into the LMF cable loss file if the signal generator and spectrum analyzer method is used. To use the HP8921A for manual test cable configuration calibration for 800 MHz BTSs, refer to the Manual Cable Calibration section of Appendix F.

Prerequisites S Test equipment is turned on and has warmed up for at least 60

minutes. S Test equipment has been selected in the LMF (Table 3-24 or Table 3-25). S Test equipment has been calibrated and correctly connected for the type of test cable configuration to be calibrated.

Procedure
Refer to Figure 3-12, Figure 3-13, or Figure 3-14 and follow the procedure in Table 3-27 to calibrate the test cable configurations. Table 3-27: Cable Calibration n Step 1 2 3 Action From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration. A Cable Calibration window is displayed. Enter one or more channel numbers in the Channels box

NOTE
Multiple channel numbers must be separated by a comma with no spaces (for example, 200,800). When two or more channel numbers are entered, the cables will be calibrated for each channel. Interpolation will be accomplished for other channels, as required, for TX calibration.

4 5

Select TX and RX CABLE CAL, TX CABLE CAL or RX CABLE CAL in the Cable Calibration picklist. Click OK. Follow the directions displayed for each step. A status report window will be displayed with the results of the cable calibration.

Calibrate Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer

Follow the procedure in Table 3-28 to calibrate the TX/RX Duplexed cables using the signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-26, if required. Follow the procedure in Table 3-29 to calibrate the RX cables using the signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-27, if required.
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-83

Test Set Calibration TX and Duplexed RX Cable Calibration

68P09255A57-O

Table 3-28: Calibrating TX/Duplexed RX Cables Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer Step 1 2 3 Action Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator. Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of 869-894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA and 1930-1990 MHz band for North American PCS. Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-26, A) and record the value. Connect the spectrum analyzers short cable to point B, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram, to measure cable output at customer frequency (869-894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA and 1930-1990 MHz for North American PCS) and record the value at point B. Calibration factor = A - B Example: Cal = -1 dBm - (-53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dBm

NOTE
The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor. Figure 3-26: Cal Setup for TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer

Signal Generator Spectrum Analyzer

SHORT TEST CABLE 100W NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE TX PORTS DURING TX CALIBRATION AND TO THE TX/RX PORTS DURING ATP TESTS.

A
50 OHM TERMINATION

Signal Generator

Spectrum Analyzer

ONE 20DB 20 W IN LINE ATTENUATOR SHORT TEST CABLE

30 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER

THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE POWER METER DURING TX CALIBRATION AND TO THE CDMA ANALYZER DURING TX ATP TESTS.

SECOND RF TEST CABLE. FW00293

3-84

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Set Calibration Non-Duplexed RX Cable Calibration

Table 3-29: Calibrating Non Duplexed/RX Cables Using a Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal Generator. Set signal generator to -10 dBm at the customers RX frequency of 824-840 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA and 1850-1910 MHz band for North American PCS. Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-27, A) and record the value for A. Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram, to measure the output at the customers RX frequency in the 1850-1910 MHz band. Record the value at point B. Calibration factor = A - B Example: Cal = -12 dBm - (-14 dBm) = 2 dB

NOTE
The short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not be part of the final test setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor. Figure 3-27: Cal Setup for Non-Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer

Signal Generator Spectrum Analyzer Signal Generator

SHORT TEST CABLE CONNECTION TO THE OUTPUT PORT DURING RX MEASUREMENTS

Spectrum Analyzer

SHORT TEST CABLE

B
LONG CABLE 2 CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTS DURING RX MEASUREMENTS.

BULLET CONNECTOR

FW00294

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-85

Test Set Calibration

68P09255A57-O

Setting Cable Loss Values

Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations are normally set by accomplishing cable calibration with use of the applicable test equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable loss files. The cable loss values can also be set/changed manually.
CAUTION

If cable calibration was performed without using the LMF, cable loss values must be manually entered in the LMF database. Failure to do this will result in inaccurate BTS calibration and reduced site performance.

Prerequisites S Logged into the BTS

Table 3-30: Setting Cable Loss Values Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Click on the Util menu. Select Edit >Cable Loss > TX or RX. A data entry pop-up window will appear. Click on the Add Row button to add a new channel number. Then click in the Channel # and Loss (dBm) columns and enter the desired values. To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value. To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button. Click on the Save button to save displayed values. Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save button was used will not be saved. Action

NOTE S If cable loss values exist for two different channels the LMF will interpolate for all other channels. S Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.

3-86

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Set Calibration

Setting TX Coupler Loss Values

If an in-service coupler is installed the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB) must be manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX calibration and audit calculations and the RX FER test.

Prerequisites S Logged into the BTS

Table 3-31: Setting Coupler Loss Values Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click on the Util menu. Select Edit >Coupler Loss>TX or RX. A data entry pop-up window will appear. Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value. To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value. Click on the Save button to save displayed values. Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save button was used will not be saved. Action

NOTE S The In-Service Calibration check box in the Tools>Options>BTS Options tab must checked
before entered coupler loss values will be used by the TX calibration and audit functions or RX Fer test.

S Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-87

Bay Level Offset Calibration

68P09255A57-O

Bay Level Offset Calibration

Introduction
Bay Level Offset (BLO) calibration is the central activity of the optimization process. BLO calibration compensates for normal equipment variations within the BTS RF paths and assures the correct transmit power is available at the BTS antenna connectors to meet site performance requirements.

RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration

3
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. The BLOs are subsequently downloaded to each BBX. Each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port and terminates at a backplane BBX slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBX backplane slot, travels through the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port. Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. Each transmit path starts at a C-CCP shelf backplane BBX slot, travels through the LPA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX path calibration is performed, the RX path BLO will automatically be set to the default value.

When to Calibrate BLOs

Calibration of BLOs is required after initial BTS installation. The BLO data of an operational BTS site must be re-calibrated once each year. Motorola recommends re-calibrating the BLO data for all associated RF paths after replacing any of the following components or associated interconnecting RF cabling: S BBX board S C-CCP shelf S CIO card S CIO to LPA backplane RF cable S LPA backplane S LPA S TX filter / TX filter combiner S TX thru-port cable to the top of frame

TX Path Calibration
The TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and the first order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper function of each RF path is verified during calibration. The external test equipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.
WARNING

Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT connector you must first verify that there are no CDMA channels keyed. Have the OMC-R place the sector assigned to the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Jan 2003

3-88

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O CAUTION

Bay Level Offset Calibration

Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done, there is a high probability that the card/module could be damaged by ESD. At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of each CCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated with BBX boards), move BBX boards from shelves currently not under test and install them into the empty BBX slots of the shelf currently being tested to insure that all BBX TX paths are tested. - This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites that are due for periodic optimization. - Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the correct BBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as required to include BBX slots not currently equipped (per Systems Engineering documentation).

NOTE

BLO Calibration Data File

During the calibration process, the LMF creates a calibration (BLO) data file. After calibration has been completed, this offset data must be downloaded to the BBXs using the Download BLO function. An explanation of the file is shown below.
NOTE

Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends that you print out a hard copy of a bts.cal file and refer to it for the following descriptions. The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (a slot Block). Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX slots. Slot 20 contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX (see Table 3-33). Each BBX slot header block contains:

S A creation Date and Time - broken down into separate parameters of

createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.

S The number of calibration entries - fixed at 720 entries corresponding

to 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header and actual calibration data.

S The calibration data for a BBX is organized as a large flat array. The
array is organized by branch, BBX slot, and calibration point. - The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch the contained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, main receive and diversity receive offsets as follows: Table 3-32: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments Range C[1]-C[240] C[241]-C[480] C[481]-C[720]
Jan 2003

Assignment Transmit Receive Diversity Receive

3-89

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Bay Level Offset Calibration

68P09255A57-O

- The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Three sectors are allowed. Table 3-33: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector) BBX 1 (Omni) 2 3 4 6 Sector, 1st Carrier Sectorization TX C[1]-C[20] C[21]-C[40] C[41]-C[60] C[61]-C[80] C[81]-C[100] C[101]-C[120] C[121]-C[140] C[141]-C[160] C[161]-C[180] C[181]-C[200] C[201]-C[220] C[221]-C[240] C[1]-C[20] C[21]-C[40] C[41]-C[60] C[61]-C[80] C[81]-C[100] C[101]-C[120] C[121]-C[140] C[141]-C[160] C[161]-C[180] C[181]-C[200] C[201]-C[220] C[221]-C[240] RX C[241]-C[260] C[261]-C[280] C[281]-C[300] C[301]-C[320] C[321]-C[340] C[341]-C[360] C[361]-C[380] C[381]-C[400] C[401]-C[420] C[421]-C[440] C[441]-C[460] C[461]-C[480] C[241]-C[260] C[261]-C[280] C[281]-C[300] C[301]-C[320] C[321]-C[340] C[341]-C[360] C[361]-C[380] C[381]-C[400] C[401]-C[420] C[421]-C[440] C[441]-C[460] C[461]-C[480] RX Diversity C[481]-C[500] C[501]-C[520] C[521]-C[540] C[541]-C[560] C[561]-C[580] C[581]-C[600] C[601]-C[620] C[621]-C[640] C[641]-C[660] C[661]-C[680] C[681]-C[700] C[701]-C[720] C[481]-C[500] C[501]-C[520] C[521]-C[540] C[541]-C[560] C[561]-C[580] C[581]-C[600] C[601]-C[620] C[621]-C[640] C[641]-C[660] C[661]-C[680] C[681]-C[700] C[701]-C[720] Slot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 12) 3-Sector , 1st Carrier i 3-Sector , 3rd Carrier i 3-Sector , 2nd Carrier i 3-Sector , 4th Carrier i

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 (Omni) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 6 Sector, 2nd Carrier 6 Sector, 1st Carrier 6 Sector, 2nd Carrier

Slot[20] (Redundant BBX-13) 3-Sector , 1st Carrier i 3-Sector , 3rd Carrier i 3-Sector , 2nd Carrier i 3-Sector , 4th Carrier i

S Refer to the hard copy of the file. As you can see, 10 calibration
points per sector are supported for each branch. Two entries are required for each calibration point. S The first value (all odd entries) refer to the CDMA channel (frequency) the BLO is measured at. The second value (all even entries) is the power set level. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from 2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to -125 dBm and 27500 corresponds to +125 dBm). S The 20 calibration entries for each slot/branch combination must be stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points (frequencies) are calibrated, the largest frequency that is calibrated is repeated to fill out the 10 points.
3-90

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Bay Level Offset Calibration

Example: C[1]=384,

odd cal entry

= 1 calibration point C[2]=19102, even cal entry C[3]=777, C[4]=19086, . . C[19]=777, C[20]=19086, (since only two cal points were calibrated this would be repeated for the next 8 points)

S When the BBX is loaded with BLO data, the cal file data for the BBX
is downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the CAL file. TxCal data is sent first, C[1] - C[60]. BBX slot 1s 10 calibration points are sent (C[1] - C[20]), followed by BBX slot 2s 10 calibration points (C[21] - C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next, followed by the RxDCal data.

S Temperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for each
slot.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-91

Bay Level Offset Calibration

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Setup for RF Path Calibration

Follow the steps in Table 3-34 to set up test equipment. Table 3-34: Set Up Test Equipment for RF Path Calibration Step 1 2 3 Action If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Figure 3-4 (on page 3-22) to interface the LMF computer terminal to the frame LAN A connector. If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-7 (on page 3-31) to start a GUI LMF session. If required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-26 (on page 3-81).

NOTE
Verify the GPIB controller is properly connected and turned on.

! CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB directional coupler for 800 MHz or via a 30 dB coupler with a 20 dB in-line attenuator for 1900 MHz. 4 For TX path calibration, connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-21, Figure 3-22 and Figure 3-23, depending on the communications analyzer being used.

Transmit (TX) Path Calibration Description

The assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the top of the frame) for transmit calibration is derived from the site CDF file. For each BBX, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelList CDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwr CDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX (located under the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF file parameter). The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dB of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than +1.5 dB. The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupler option, is approximately 42.0 dB 3.0 dB.

S At sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately

42.0 dB 4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output power measured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately -6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.

The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option, is approximately 41.4 dB 3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Output minus BBX output level.

S Example: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler

(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately -2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately -0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.

3-92

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Bay Level Offset Calibration

TX Calibration and the LMF

The LMF Tests > TX > TX Calibration... and Tests > All Cal/Audit... selections perform TX BLO calibration testing for installed BBX(s). The All Cal/Audit... selection initiates a series of actions to perform TX calibration, and if calibration is successful, download BLO and perform TX audit. The TX Calibration... selection performs only TX calibration. When TX Calibration... is used, BLO download and TX audit must be performed as separate activities. The CDMA Test Parameters window which opens when TX Calibration... or All Cal/Audit... is selected contains several user-selectable features which are described in the following subsections.

Rate Set Drop-down Pick List

The Rate Set Drop-down Box is enabled if at least one MCC card is selected for the test. The available options for TX tests are 1 = 9600, and 3 = 9600 1X. Option 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test. The available transfer rate options for RX tests are 1 = 9600 and 2 = 14400. Option 2 is only available if no 1X cards are selected.

Verify BLO Checkbox

In both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a Verify BLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TX calibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or All Cal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared to a standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations, additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additional change in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failure and, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either the Verify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path losses should be added into each applicable sector using the Util>Edit>TX Coupler Loss function.

Single-Sided BLO Checkbox

Normally valid values are some value plus-or-minus some offset. If single-sided BLO is selected, the result will only be considered a success if its in the lower half of the range. If it was normally success from 37-47 (which is 42 5), single-sided BLO would make it a success only if the result was from 37-42.

Test Pattern Drop-down Pick List

Pilot is shown as the default setting in this pick list box. The full range of available selections and their descriptions are as follows: Standard - performs calibration or audit using pilot, paging, synch, and six traffic channels with IS-97-specified gain. This pattern setting should be used for all non-in-service calibrations and audits. Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC. Pilot (default) - performs calibration using only the pilot channel. This pattern setting should be used for in-service calibrations, and requires selection of only a BBX.
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-93

Bay Level Offset Calibration

68P09255A57-O

CDFPilot -This pattern setting is for advanced users. It performs calibration or audit using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values for all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC. CDF - This pattern setting is for advanced users who need to use CDF gain settings for all channels included in the Standard pattern setting (pilot, paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.

TX Calibration
WARNING

Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage. Always wear an approved anti-static wrist strap while handling any circuit card or module. If this is not done, there is a high probability that the card or module could be damaged by ESD.

CAUTION

3-94

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Bay Level Offset Calibration

All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure

The LMF All Cal/Audit and TX calibration procedures are essentially identical, except for the step that selects the type of procedure desired (Refer to Step 4 in Table 3-35).

Prerequisites
Before running this procedure, be sure that the following have been done:

S The card in slot CSM 1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have correct code
and data loads.

S Primary CSM and MGLI are INS_ACT (bright green). S All BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow). S If running calibration or audit using a test pattern other than Pilot,
MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).

S Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
calibration.

S LMF is logged into the BTS in the GUI environment.

NOTE

Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have been returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards moved since they were downloaded will have to be downloaded again.

Table 3-35: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Action If it has not already been done, configure test equipment for TX calibration by following the procedure in Table 3-34. Click on the BBX(s) to be calibrated. If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot, or CDF, select at least one MCC (refer to Test Pattern Drop-down Pick List under TX Calibration and the LMF in this section). For All Cal Audit... - Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > All Cal/Audit... from the pull-down menus. A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear. For TX Calibration - Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Calibration from the pull-down menus. A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear. Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.

NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to select multiple carrier(s)-sector(s). 6 Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts-#.cdf (or bts-#.necf ) and cbsc-#.cdf files from the CBSC.

NOTE
If necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box. . . . continued on next page
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-95

Bay Level Offset Calibration

Table 3-35: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure Step 7 Action

68P09255A57-O

If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600 1X) from the drop-down list in the Rate Set box.

NOTE
The rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test. 8 9 If Verify BLO is to be used during the calibration, leave the checkbox checked (default). If Single-Sided BLO is to be used during the calibration, click on the checkbox.

* IMPORTANT
Single-Sided BLO should only be used for primary BBXs. Do not check the box when calibrating the redundant BBX. 10 11 12 13 In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the calibration from the drop-down list (refer to Test Pattern Drop-down Pick List under TX Calibration and the LMF in this section). Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window. Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed. - When the calibration process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window. Click OK to close the status report window.

Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL message in the status report window and provides information in the Description field. Recheck the test setup and connection and re-run the test. If the tests fail again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6, Troubleshooting.

3-96

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Bay Level Offset Calibration

Download BLO Procedure

After a successful TX path calibration, download the BLO calibration file data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the CAL file for the BTS and downloaded to the selected BBX devices.
NOTE

If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.

Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding.

S BBXs being downloaded are OOS-RAM (yellow). S TX calibration is successfully completed.

Follow the steps in Table 3-36 to download the BLO data to the BBXs. Table 3-36: Download BLO n Step 1 2 Action Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded. Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > BLO from the pull-down menus. A status report window displays the result of the download.

NOTE
Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded. 3 Click OK to close the status report window.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-97

Bay Level Offset Calibration

68P09255A57-O

Calibration Audit Introduction

The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation and storage of the BLO calibrations. The calibration audit procedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path at the site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the success or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is used.
NOTE

RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data download to BBXs must have been successfully completed prior to performing the calibration audit.

Transmit (TX) Path Audit

Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slots, per the steps in Table 3-37.
WARNING

Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage. If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.

NOTE

TX Audit Test
The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for a BBX(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.

Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:

S S S S

CSM-1,GLI3s, BBXs have correct code load. Primary CSM and MGLI3 are INS. All BBXs are OOS_RAM. Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX BLO calibration.

S LMF is logged into the BTS.

3-98

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Bay Level Offset Calibration TX Path Audit procedure

After a TX calibration has been performed, or if verification of BLO data in the CAL file is required, follow the procedure in Table 3-37 to perform a BTS TX path audit. Table 3-37: BTS TX Path Audit

n Step 1 2 3 4 5

Action If it has not already been done, configure test equipment for TX path audit by following the procedure in Table 3-34 (TX audit uses the same configuration as TX calibration). Select the BBX(s) to be audited. If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot or CDF, select at least one MCC (refer to Test Pattern Drop-down Pick List under TX Calibraton and the LMF in this section). Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX>TX Audit... from the pull-down menus. A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear. Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.

NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to select multiple carrier(s)-sector(s). 6 Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts-#.cdf (or bts-#.necf ) and cbsc-#.cdf files from the CBSC.

NOTE
The correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box. 7 If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600 1X) from the drop-down list in the Rate Set box.

NOTE
The rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test. 8 Select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.

NOTE
Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers. 9 From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern. - Selecting PILOT (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only. - Selecting STANDARD performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This requires an MCC to be selected. - Selecting CDFPILOT performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values for all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC. - Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file. Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window. Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. When the calibration process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window. Click on the Save Results or Dismiss button, as desired, to close the status report window.

10 11 12

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-99

Bay Level Offset Calibration Exception Handling

68P09255A57-O

In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL message in the status report window and provides information in the Description field. Recheck the test setup and connection and re-run the test. If the tests fail again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6, Troubleshooting.

3-100

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Bay Level Offset Calibration

All Cal/Audit Test

The Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibration and Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
NOTE

If the TX calibration portion of the test passed, the BLO data will automatically be downloaded to the BBX(s) before the audit portion of the test is run.

Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:

S S S S

CSM-1, GLI3s, BBXs have correct code and data load. Primary CSM and MGLI3 are INS. All BBXs are OOS_RAM. Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX BLO calibration.

S LMF is logged into the BTS.

Follow the procedures in Table 3-38 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.
WARNING

Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.

Table 3-38: All Cal/Audit Test n Step 1 Select the BBX(s) to be tested. Action

NOTE
If STANDARD, CDF or CDFPILOT is selected for TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCC must be also selected. 2 3 4 5 From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit. Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list. Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items. Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box. Select Verify BLO or Single-sided BLO.

NOTE
Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers. 6 From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern. . . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-101

Bay Level Offset Calibration

Table 3-38: All Cal/Audit Test n Step Action

68P09255A57-O

NOTE S Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only. S Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels. This
requires an MCC to be selected.

S Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values for
all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.

3
7 8 9

S Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels, however, the
gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file. Click on OK. Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. A status report window displays the test results. Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.

3-102

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Bay Level Offset Calibration

Create CAL File

The Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist a new one is created. If a CAL file already exists it is updated. After a BTS has been fully optimized a copy of the CAL file must exist so it can be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file will exist. Note the following:

S The Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)

BBXs.
WARNING

Editing the CAL file is not encouraged as this action can cause interface problems between the BTS and the LMF. To manually edit the CAL file you must first logout of the BTS. If you manually edit the CAL file and then use the Create Cal File function the edited information will be lost.

Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:

S LMF is logged in to the BTS S BBXs are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded
Table 3-39: Create CAL File Step 1 2 3 4 Action Select the applicable BBXs. The CAL file will only be updated for the selected BBXs. Click on the Device menu. Click on the Create Cal File menu item. The status report window is displays the results of the action. Click OK.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-103

RFDS Set-up and Calibration

68P09255A57-O

RFDS Set-up and Calibration

RFDS Description
The optional RFDS is used to perform RF tests of the site from the CBSC or from the LMF. The RFDS contains the following FRUs:

S Antenna Select Unit (ASU) S Fixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card (FWTIC) S Subscriber Unit Assembly (SUA) 3
For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA CDMA RFDS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A93, CDMA RFDS Users Guide; 68P64114A51, and the LMF Help function on-line documentation.

RFDS Parameters
The bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must match the installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the editable parameters and their defaults. Table 3-40 explains how to edit the parameter settings.

S RfdsEquip - valid inputs are 0 through 2.

0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped 1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS 2 = Cobra RFDS

S TsuEquip - valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) TSU not equipped 1 = TSU is equipped in the system

S MC1....4 - valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) Not equipped 1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system (SC9600 internal RFDS only)

S Asu1/2Equip - valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) Not equipped 1 = Equipped

S TestOrigDN - valid inputs are (default) or a numerical string up to

15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch, and is to be used in this field.)
NOTE

Any text editor may be used to open the bts-#.cdf file to verify, view, or modify data. Because the bts-#.cdf file is generated on a Unix system, a more sophisticated editor, such as MicroSoft WordPad, will display file content in a more easily-read format than many simple text editors.

3-104

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

RFDS Set-up and Calibration

Checking and Setting RFDS Parameters

Follow the procedure in Table 3-40 to review and/or edit RFDS parameters. Table 3-40: RFDS Parameter Settings Step 1 Action

* IMPORTANT
Log out of the BTS prior to perform this procedure. Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts-#.cdf file: EXAMPLE:
Asu1Equip = 1 Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed) Mc1Equip = 0 Mc2Equip = 0 Mc3Equip = 0 Mc4Equip = 0 RfdsEquip = 2 TestOrigDN = 123456789 TsuEquip = 1

NOTE
The above is an example of entries extracted from the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated by the OMC-R and copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC-R if the RFDSPARM database is modified for the RFDS. 2 3 4 5 Save changes and/or quit the editor. Log into the BTS using an LMF GUI session(refer to Table 3-7). If no changes were made to the bts-#.cdf file fields listed in step 1, proceed to Step 7. If changes were made, continue with Step 5.

* IMPORTANT
To make certain the complete data download is accepted, the MGLI should be OOS_RAM (yellow) when RFDS parameter settings are downloaded. When changes are made to RFDS parameters in the bts-#.cdf file, data must be downloaded to the MGLI by performing the following:

5a

- To be sure it does not take control when the MGLI is disabled, manually disable the redundant GLI card by unseating it from the backplane connectors and sliding it partially out of the shelf slot. - Click on the MGLI. - Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Disable from the pull-down menu. -- A status report window is displayed showing status of the operation. - When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window. - Click on the MGLI (now OOS_RAM (yellow)).
. . . continued on next page

5b 5c 5d 5e

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-105

RFDS Set-up and Calibration

Table 3-40: RFDS Parameter Settings Step 5f Action

68P09255A57-O

- Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Data from the pull-down menus (selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded). -- A status report window is displayed showing status of the download. - Click OK to close the status report window. - Click on the MGLI. - Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable from the pull-down menu. -- A status report window is displayed showing status of the operation. - When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.

5g 5h 5i

3
5j

! CAUTION
When the MGLI changes to INS_ACT, data will automatically be downloaded to the RFDS. During this process, the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green for approximately 2-3 minutes. DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED remains steady green. 5k 5l 6 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e 7 8 8a 8b - Re-seat the redundant GLI card into the backplane connectors and lock it in place with the ejector tabs. - Once the redundant GLI initializes, download data to it by selecting the card and, in the BTS menu bar, clicking Device and selecting Download > Data from the pull-down menus. Any MCCs which were INS_ACT when the MGLI was disabled must be disabled, re-enabled, and downloaded with code as follows: - Select the devices to be reset by clicking on them or using Select from the BTS menu bar and clicking on MCCs in the pull-down menu. - In the BTS menu bar, click on Device and select Disable from the pull-down menu. -- A status window report window is displayed showing status of the operation. - Click OK to close the status report window. - Download data to the MCCs by following the procedure in Table 3-15. - When data download is complete, enable the MCCs by following the procedure in Table 3-18. Click on the RFDS tab. Status the RFDS TSU by performing the following: - Click on the SUA to select it. - Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Status TSU from the pull-down menu. -- A status report is displayed showing the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.
. . . continued on next page

3-106

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

RFDS Set-up and Calibration

Table 3-40: RFDS Parameter Settings

Step 8c

Action - Click OK to close the status report window.

* IMPORTANT
If the LMF displays an error message, check the following:

S S S S S

Ensure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS. Verify RFDS has power. Verify RFDS status LED is green. Verify entries in RFDS fields of the bts-#.cdf file are correct (refer to step 1). Status the MGLI and ensure it is communicating (by Ethernet) with the LMF, and is in the proper state (INS_ACT (bright green)).

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-107

RFDS Set-up and Calibration

68P09255A57-O

RFDS TSU NAM Programming

The Number Assignment Module (NAM) information needs to be programmed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, or be used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must be programmed with the appropriate system parameters and phone number during hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must be recorded for each BTS used for OMC-R RFDS software configuration.
NOTE

The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial installation of the RFDS.

Explanation of Parameters Used When Programming the TSU NAM

Table 3-41 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file. Table 3-41: Definition of Parameters Access Overload Code Slot Index System ID Network ID Primary Channel A Primary Channel B Secondary Channel A Secondary Channel B Lock Code Security Code Service Level Station Class Mark IMSI MCC IMSI 11 12 These parameters are obtained from the switch.

These parameters are the channels which are to be used in operation of the system.

Do NOT change.

These fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:
OMC000>disp bts-# imsi

If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0, otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC. MIN Phone Number These fields are the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN and MIN must be entered into the switch as well.

NOTE
This field is different from the TODN field in the bts-#.cdf file. The MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and the TODN is the number the subscriber calls.

3-108

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

RFDS Set-up and Calibration

Valid NAM Ranges

Table 3-42 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are missing or out-of-range, the RFDS will error out. Table 3-42: Valid NAM Field Ranges Valid Range NAM Field Name Access Overload Code Slot Index System ID Network ID Primary Channel A Primary Channel B Secondary Channel A Secondary Channel B Lock Code Security Code Service Level Station Class Mark IMSI 11 12 IMSI MCC MIN Phone Number Minimum 0 0 0 0 25 25 25 25 0 0 N/A 0 0 0 N/A Maximum 15 7 32767 32767 1175 1175 1175 1175 999 999999 N/A 255 99 999 N/A

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-109

RFDS Set-up and Calibration

68P09255A57-O

Set Antenna Map Data

The antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed. Antenna map data does not need to be entered if an RFDS is not installed. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is required if an RFDS is installed.

Prerequisite S LMF is logged into the BTS 3

Step 1 2 3 4 Follow the procedure in Table 3-43 to set antenna map data for the RFDS. Table 3-43: Set Antenna Map Data Action Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Antenna Map... from the pull-down menus. - A tabbed data entry pop-up window will appear. In the data entry pop-up window, click on the TX Antenna Map or RX Antenna Map tab to select the antenna map to be edited. Locate the carrier and sector number for which data is to be entered or edited, and click in the column where entry or editing is needed. Enter/edit Antenna # and Antenna Label column data as needed for each carrier.

NOTE
Refer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit-Antenna Map... section of LMF Help function on-line documentation for antenna map examples. 5 6 For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values. Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.

NOTE S Values entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window is
dismissed.

S Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out and
log back into the LMF for changes to take effect.

3-110

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

RFDS Set-up and Calibration

Set RFDS Configuration Data

If an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manually entered.

Prerequisite S LMF is logged into the BTS

NOTE

The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to the antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps. Follow the procedure in Table 3-44 to set RFDS configuration data.

Table 3-44: Set RFDS Configuration Data Step 1 Action Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > RFDS Configuration... from the pull-down menus. - A tabbed data entry pop-up window will appear. In the data entry pop-up window, click on the TX RFDS Configuration or RX RFDS Configuration tab, as required. To add a new antenna number, perform the following: - Click on the Add Row button. - Click in the Antenna #, Cal Antenna, Scap Antenna, or Populate [Y/N] columns, as required. - Enter the desired data. To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.

2 3 3a 3b 3c 4

NOTE
Refer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit-RFDS Configuration... section of LMF Help function on-line documentation for RFDS configuration data examples. 5 6 7 To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button. For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values. Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.

NOTE S Values entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window is
dismissed.

S Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out and
log back into the LMF for changes to take effect.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-111

RFDS Set-up and Calibration

68P09255A57-O

RFDS Calibration
The RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RX paths. TX Path Calibration - For a TX antenna path calibration the BTS XCVR is keyed at a pre-determined power level and the BTS power output level is measured by the RFDS. The power level is then measured at the TX antenna directional coupler by the power measuring test equipment item being used (power meter or analyzer). The difference (offset) between the power level at the RFDS and the power level at the TX antenna directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration offset value. RX Path Calibration - For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS is keyed at a pre-determined power level and the power input level is measured by the BTS BBX. A CDMA signal at the same power level measured by the BTS BBX is then injected at the RX antenna directional coupler by the communications system analyzer. The difference (offset) between the RFDS-keyed power level and power level measured at the BTS BBX is the RFDS RX calibration offset value. RFDS calibration and the CAL file - The TX and RX RFDS calibration offset values are written to the CAL file in the slot[385] Block. TSIC channel frequency - For each RFDS TSIC, the channel frequency is determined at the lower third and upper third of the appropriate band using the frequencies listed in Table 3-45. Table 3-45: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies System 800 MHz (A and B) 1.9 GHz
WARNING

Channel Calibration Points 341 and 682 408 and 791

Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.

Prerequisites S Test equipment has been selected. S Test equipment and test cables have been calibrated. S TX calibration has been performed and BLO data has been
downloaded to the BBXs.

S Test equipment and test cables are connected for TX calibration. S Antenna map data has been entered for the site. S BBXs are INS_TEST.
3-112

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

RFDS Set-up and Calibration RFDS Calibration Procedure

Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to perform RFDS calibration. Table 3-46: RFDS Calibration

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 In the LMF, select the FRAME tab.

Action If it is not selected (no black dot showing), click on the B button in the BTS menu bar to select it. Select the BBX(s) assigned to the carrier(s) and sector(s) which will be used in RFDS calibration (refer to Table 1-5 for BBX carrier and sector assignments). Click on RFDS in the BTS menu bar, and select RFDS Calibration... from the pull-down menu. - An RFDS Calibration set-up window will be displayed. In the Tests to Perform box, select TX Calibration or RX Calibration, as required Enter the appropriate channel number(s) (refer to Table 3-45) in the Channel Field box.

S To enter more than one channel number, use the following methods:
- Separate non-sequential channel numbers with a comma and no spaces; for example: 247,585,742. - Enter a range of sequential channels by typing the first and last channel numbers in the range separated by a dash and no spaces; for example: 385-395. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 If the frame is equipped with TX combiners, click in the Has Combiners checkbox. Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) from the Carriers pick list (hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to select multiple carrier(s)-sector(s)). Select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the drop-down list. In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate transfer rate (1=9600, 2=14400) from the drop-down list. Click on the OK button. - A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop-up window. Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. When the test is completed, test results are displayed in the status report window. Click on the OK button to close the status report window. Click on the Frame tab. Select the MGLI by clicking on it. Download the CAL file, now updated with the RFDS offset data, to the MGLI by clicking on Device on the BTS menu bar, and selecting Download > Data from the pull-down menus.

NOTE
The MGLI will automatically transfer the RFDS offset data from the CAL file to the RFDS.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-113

RFDS Set-up and Calibration

68P09255A57-O

Program TSU NAM

The NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test calls, or be used for any type of RFDS test. Prerequisites

S MGLI is INS_ACT (bright green). S SUA is powered up and has a code load.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-47 to program the TSU NAM.

3
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6

Table 3-47: Program NAM Procedure Action In the LMF, select the RFDS tab. Select the SUA by clicking on it. Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Program TSU NAM from the pull-down menu. - A NAM programming window will appear. Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-41 and Table 3-42) . Click on the OK button to display the status report. Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

3-114

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Alarms Testing

Alarms Testing
Alarms Verification
The alarms testing should be performed at a convenient point in the optimization/ATP process, since the LMF is necessary to ensure that the RF cabinet is receiving the appropriate alarms from the power cabinet. The SC 4812ET is capable of concurrently monitoring 10 customer defined input signals and four customer defined outputs, which interface to the 50-pin punchblock. All alarms are defaulted to Not Equipped during ATP testing. Testing of these inputs is achieved by triggering the alarms and monitoring the LMF for state-transition messages from the active MGLI3. All customer alarms are routed through the 50 pair punchblock located in the I/O compartment at the back of the frame. Testing is best accomplished by using a specialized connector that interfaces to the 50-pair punchblock. This connector is wired so that customer return 1 (2 for the B side) is connected to every input, CDI 0 through CDI 17.

Alarm Reporting Display

The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur after the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window, select Util>Alarm Monitor. The following buttons are included:

S The Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor,

Major, Critical, and Unknown) selection. The default is all levels. To change the level of alarms reported click on the Options button and highlight the desired alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press the Ctrl key (for individual selections) or Shift key (for a range of selections) while clicking on the desired levels.

S The Pause button can be used to pause/stop the display of alarms.

When the Pause button is clicked the name of the button changes to Continue. When the Continue button is click the display of alarms will continue. Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is clicked and the Continue button is clicked will not be displayed.

S The Clear button can be used to clear the Alarm Monitor display.
New alarms that occur after the Clear button is clicked will be displayed.

S The Dismiss button is used to dismiss/close the Alarm Monitor

display.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-115

Alarms Testing

68P09255A57-O

Alarm Testing Set-up

Prepare for any alarm testing by following the procedures in Table 3-48. Table 3-48: Alarm Testing Preparation Step 1 2 Action If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-6 to connect the LMF computer terminal to the frame LAN A connector. If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-7 to start a GUI LMF session. Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Alarm Monitor... from the pull-down menu. - An Alarm Monitor window will open.

Heat Exchanger Alarm Test

Table 3-49 gives instructions on testing the Heat Exchanger alarm. Table 3-49: Heat Exchanger Alarm Step 1 2 3 Action Turn circuit breaker B of the Heat Exchanger circuit breakers OFF. This will generate a Heat Exchanger alarm, ensure that the LMF reports the correct alarm condition in the RF Cabinet. Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #25 - Heat Exchanger Alarm makes contact. Turn the circuit breaker B ON. Ensure that the alarm condition is now removed.

NOTE
The Heat Exchanger will go through the Start Up sequence.

Door Alarm
Table 3-50 gives instructions on testing the door alarms.
NOTE

When conducting this test connect the LMF via the LAN port on the back of the frame thru the Rear I/O Door. Table 3-50: Door Alarm

Step 1 2 3

Action Close all doors on the power cabinet. Ensure that no alarms are reported on the LMF. Individually open and then close each power supply cabinet door. Ensure that the LMF reports an alarm when each door is opened. Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #27 Door Alarm makes contact.

3-116

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Alarms Testing

AC Fail Alarm
Table 3-51 gives instructions on testing the AC Fail Alarm. Table 3-51: AC Fail Alarm Step 1 Action

NOTE
The batteries should have a stable charge before performing this test. Turn the Main AC breaker on the power cabinet OFF. The LMF should report an alarm on an AC Fail (Rectifier Fail, Minor Alarm & Major Alarm) condition.

2 3

Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #23, BTS # 21, BTS # 24 and BTS Relay # 29 AC Fail Alarm makes contact respectively. Turn the Main AC breaker on the power cabinet ON. The AC Fail alarm should clear.

Minor Alarm
Table 3-52 gives instructions on testing minor alarm. Table 3-52: Minor Alarm Step 1 Action Turn the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) power switch OFF. This will generate a minor alarm. Verify that the minor alarm LED (amber) is illuminated on the Meter Alarm Panel and the LMF reports this minor alarm. Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #24 Minor Alarm makes contact. Turn the TCP power switch ON. The alarm condition should clear.

2 3

Rectifier Alarms
The following series of tests are for single rectifier modules in a multiple rectifier system. The systems include a three rectifier and a six rectifier system.

Single Rectifier Failure (Three Rectifier System)

Table 3-53 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minor alarm in a three rectifier system. Table 3-53: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm Step 1 2 3 Action Remove a single rectifier module and place it into the unused rectifier shelf #2. Turn the AC breaker OFF, for this 2nd shelf. Verify that a rectifier fail alarm is generated. The single rectifier module will lite two RED fail LED (DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will also indicate a minor alarm and rectifier fail status. The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite. . . . continued on next page
1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x
3-117

Jan 2003

Alarms Testing
Table 3-53: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm Step 4 Action Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions.

68P09255A57-O

NOTE
Alarm conditions reported as BTS #24 and BTS #21, contacts respectively. 5 Turn the AC breaker for the 2nd shelf ON and verify that Rectifier Fail and minor alarm conditions clear on the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF.

3 Multiple Rectifier Failure

Table 3-54 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or major alarm in a three rectifier system. Table 3-54: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm Step 1 2 Action With the rectifier module still in the unused shelf position fromTable 3-53 test procedures, turn the AC breaker for the 1st shelf OFF. Verify that a rectifier alarm is generated. Each of the two rectifier modules will lite two RED fail LED (DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will indicate a major alarm (Rectifier Fail and Major Alarm). The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite. Verify that the LMF reports both alarm conditions. (BTS #29, BTS #21, and BTS #24) Turn the AC breaker for the 1st shelf ON. Verify that all alarms have cleared. Return the rectifier module to its original location. This completes the alarm test on the power cabinet.

3 4 5

Single Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System)

Table 3-55 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minor alarm in a six rectifier system. Table 3-55: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm Step 1 2 3 Action Remove two(2) rectifier modules from shelf #2. Turn the AC breaker OFF, for shelf #2. Verify that a rectifier fail alarm is generated. The single rectifier module will lite two RED fail LED (DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will also indicate a minor alarm and rectifier fail status. The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite. Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions. (BTS #24 and BTS #21) conditions Turn the AC breaker for this shelf ON and verify that Rectifier Fail and Minor Alarm conditions have cleared.

4 5

3-118

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Alarms Testing Multiple Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System)

Table 3-56 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or major alarm in a six rectifier system. Table 3-56: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm

Step 1 2

Action Replace one rectifier module previously removed and turn the AC breaker for this shelf, OFF. Verify that a rectifier alarm is generated. Each of the two rectifier modules will lite a RED fail LED, and the Meter Alarm Panel will indicate a major alarm (Rectifier Fail, Major and Minor Alarm).The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite. Verify that the LMF reports both alarm conditions. (BTS #29) Turn the AC breaker for this shelf ON. Verify that all alarms have cleared. Return all rectifier module to their original location. This completes the rectifier alarm tests on the power cabinet.

3 4 5

Battery Over Temperature Alarm (Optional)

CAUTION

Use special care to avoid damaging insulation on cables, or damaging battery cases when using a power heat gun.

Table 3-57 gives instructions on testing the battery over temperature alarm system. Table 3-57: Battery Over Temperature Alarm Step 1 Action Use a low powered heat gun and gently heat the battery over temperature sensor (see location in Figure 3-28). Do Not hold the hot air gun closer than 7.6 cm (3 in.) to the sensor. This will avoid burning the cable insulation. When the sensor is heated to approximately 50 C, a battery Over Temperature alarm is generated.

NOTE
An audible click will sound as K1 contact engage and K2 contacts disengage. 3 4 5 Visually inspect the K1 and K2 relays to verify state changes. The LMF should be displaying correct alarms. (BTS #22) Verify that the CHARGE DISABLE LED (amber) on the Meter Alarm Panel and the BATTERY MAIN LED (green) are both illuminated. Switch the hot air gun to cool. Cool the sensor until the K1 and K2 contact return to normal position (K1 open and K2 closed). Use the LMF verify that all alarms have cleared.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-119

Alarms Testing
Figure 3-28: Battery Over-temperature Sensor

68P09255A57-O

Buss Bar 6 AWG Cables Battery Overtemp Sensor Negative Temperature Compensation Sensor

FW00408

3-120

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Alarms Testing

Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm

NOTE

This is connector J8 on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel itself, this is not connector J8 on the connector bulkhead at the rear of the cabinet. Table 3-58 gives instructions on testing the battery over temperature alarm system.

Table 3-58: Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm Step 1 Action Remove the J8 link on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel (see Figure 3-29 for J8 location).

NOTE
This is the J8 on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel itself, this is not connector J8 on the connector bulkhead at the rear of the cabinet. 2 3 4 5 Verify that RECTIFIER OVERTEMP LED (red) is lite. Contacts on K1 and K2 change states (K1 now closed and K2 open). Verify that the LMF has reported an alarm condition. (BTS #26) Reinstall J8 connector and verify that all alarm conditions have cleared. K1 and K2 should now be in their normal states (K1 open and K2 closed). This completes the system tests of the SC 4812ET power cabinet.

Figure 3-29: Location of Connector J8 on the Meter Alarm Panel

FRONT VIEW

VOLT VOLT + -

AMP AMPS + PWR OFF ON

TEST POINTS

TEST POINTS

REAR VIEW
YEL VIOLENT OR Terminal Block RED BLK OR BRWN J1 J2 J3 J8 J9 J6 J4 J5

Rear Connector Panel

Not Used J6

Terminal Block

J4

J5

J1

J2

J3

FW00245

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

3-121

Alarms Testing

68P09255A57-O

Before Leaving the site

Table 3-59 gives instructions on what to check before leaving the site. Table 3-59: Check Before Leaving the Site Step 1 2 3 Action Verify that ALL battery circuit breakers (for occupied shelves) are CLOSED (pushed in). Verify that the Heat Exchanger is running. Verify that the Meter Alarm Panel and TCP modules are switched ON. Verify that the Battery Test Switch on the Meter Alarm Panel is in the OFF position. Verify that no alarm conditions are being reported (with all doors closed).

4 5

3-122

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

Chapter 4
4

Automated Test Procedures (ATP)

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

4-1

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure

68P09255A57-O

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure

Introduction
The Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular Field Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTS subsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) and supported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File (CDF) assignment. The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to a file that can be printed. All tests are controlled via the LMF platform using the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipment supported by the LMF can be used. This chapter describes the tests run from the GUI environment, which is the recommended method. The GUI provides the advantages of simplifying the LMF user interface, reducing the potential for miskeying commmands and associated parameters, and speeding up the execution of complex operations involving multiple command strings. If you feel the command line interface (CLI) will provide additional insight into the progress of ATPs and problems that could possibly be encountered, refer to LMF CLI Commands.
NOTE

- Before using the LMF, read the CAVEATS section in the readme.txt file in the c:\wlmf folder for any applicable information. - The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service sectors only. - DO NOT substitute test equipment with other models not supported by the LMF. Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed interconnection information needed for calibrating equipment, cables, and other test equipment set components.

Reduced ATP
NOTE

Equipment has been factory-tested for FCC compliance. If license-governing bodies require documentation supporting SITE compliance with regulations, a full ATP may be necessary. Perform the Reduced ATP only if reports for the specific BTS site are NOT required. After downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the CFE must perform these procedures (minimal recommendation): 1 2 Verify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Audit and FER tests. Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.

Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to the Basic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining the failure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected, refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix (Table C-1) to determine the applicable test that must be performed.
4-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure

In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forward link problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform the additional TX tests for troubleshooting: TX spectral mask, TX rho, and TX code domain.
NOTE

Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test set connections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test set components, if required. Customer requirements determine which ATP tests are to be performed and the field engineer selects the appropriate ATP tests to run.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

4-3

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure

68P09255A57-O

ATP Test Options

ATP tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:

S All TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit line up.
These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, and CIO cards, the LPAs and passive components including splitters, combiners, bandpass filter, and RF cables.

S All RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver line up.
These includes the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (for expansion frames), CIO, BBX, MCC, and GLI cards and the passive components including RX filter (starter frame only), and RF cables.

S All TX/RX: Executes all the TX and RX tests. S Full Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, download BLO, and
TX audit before running all of the TX and RX tests.

ATP Test Prerequisites

Before attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following:

S BTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3). S LMF is logged into the BTS. S CSMs, GLIs, BBXs, MCCs and TSU (if the RFDS is installed)have
correct code load and data load

S S S S S S S S S
WARNING

Primary CSM and GLI are INS_ACT MCCs are INS_ACT. BBXs are OOS-RAM. BBXs are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded. Test cables are calibrated. Test equipment is selected. Test equipment is connected for ATP tests. Test equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated. GPIB is on. Before the FER is run, be sure that all LPAs are turned OFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter ports are properly terminated. All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP tests. Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily injury or equipment damage.

TX/RX OUT Connections

NOTE

Many of the acceptance test procedures require taking measurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. At sites with RFDS, all measurements are through the RFDS directional coupler TX OUT connector.
Jan 2003

4-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure

ATP Test Procedure

There are three different ATP testing options that can be performed to completely test a BTS. Depending on your requirements, one of the following ATP testing options should be run. Table 4-1 provides the procedure to execute an ATP test. To completely test a BTS, run the ATP tests according to one of the following ATP testing options.

ATP Testing Option 1 S All TX/RX test ATP Testing Option 2 S All TX test S All RX test ATP Testing Option 3 S TX Mask test S Rho test S Pilot Time Offset test S Code Domain Power test S FER test
NOTE

The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TX path calibrated before all the TX and RX tests are run. If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer, remove the manual control/system memory card from the card slot and set the IO CONFIG to the Talk & Listen mode before starting the automated testing.

NOTE

CDMA 2000 Testing

Software release 2.16.x supports two new pieces of test equipment. These are the Agilent E4406A with E4432B, as well as the Advantest R3267 with R3562. The E4406A/E4432B pair, or the R3267/R3562 pair, should be connected together using a GPIB cable. This test equipment is capable of performing tests in both IS95 mode as well as cdma2000 mode if the required options are installed: The HP 8935 with option 200 or R2k for 1X TX and with Agilent E4432B Signal Generator for 1X FER (see note for options).
NOTE

E4432B Signal Generator for 1X FER. The options are: UN8-Real Time I/Q Baseband Generator 1E5-High Stability Timebase 201-Real Time CDMA2000

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

4-5

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure

68P09255A57-O

Individual Acceptance Tests

The following individual ATP tests can be used to verify the results of specific tests:

Spectral Purity TX Mask

This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform, generated on each sector, meets the transmit spectral mask specification with respect to the assigned CDF file values.

Waveform Quality (rho)

This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in ANSI-J_STD-019. Rho represents the correlation between actual and perfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents 100% (or perfect correlation).

Pilot Time Offset

The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzer measurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and the incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Pilot Gain = 262, PN Offset = 0).

Code Domain Power

This test verifies code domain power levels, which have been set for all ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to 10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered OFF Walsh channels measures < -27 dB .

Frame Error Rate

The Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entire CDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to all respective sector/antennas. The test verifies the BTS sensitivity on all traffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs at an RF input level of -119 dBm (or -116 dBm if using TMPC). Follow the procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.
NOTE

The STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.

4-6

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure

ATP Test Procedure

Table 4-1 describes the step-by-step procedures to run any APT Test. Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure Step 1 2 3 Select the device(s) to be tested. From the Tests menu, select the desired test. Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier - bts# - sector# - carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list. To select multiple items, hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key while making the selections. Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box. The default channel number displayed is determined by the CdmaChans[n] number in the cbsc-n.cdf file for the BTS. If applicable, select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO. Action

NOTE
Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers. 6 7 For RX select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the drop-down list. In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from the drop-down list.

NOTE
8 9 10 11 The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test. In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the calibration from the drop-down list: Pilot (default), CDF, CDFPilot or Standard. Click on the OK button. The status report window and a Directions pop-up are displayed. Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. Click Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window. If Dismiss is used the test results will not be saved in the test report file.

Background: Tx Mask Test

This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a specific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the same command. All measurements are through the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna and all channel elements from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up, using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channel element only). BBX2 power output is set to obtain +40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).
NOTE

TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS power level to +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase from pilot gain set to 541.
4-7

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure

68P09255A57-O

The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the attenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolution bandwidth with respect to the mean power of the CDMA channel, measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth, in dB, verifying that results meet system tolerances at the following test points:

S 1.9 GHz
- at least -45 dB @ + 885 kHz from center frequency - at least -45 dB @ - 885 kHz from center frequency

S 800 MHz:
at least -55 at least -55 at least -60 at least -60 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency dB @ - 750 kHz from center frequency dB @ + 1980 kHz from center frequency dB @ - 1980 kHz from center frequency

The BBX2 then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to assign the applicable redundant BBX2 to the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated. Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display

.5 MHz Span/Div Ampl 10 dB/Div

Mean CDMA Bandwidth Power Reference Center Frequency Reference

Attenuation level of all spurious and IM products with respect to the mean power of the CDMA channel

- 1980 kHz - 900 kHz - 750 kHz

+ 1980 kHz + 900 kHz +750 kHz

FW00282

4-8

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure

Background: Rho Test

This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveform quality of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elements from the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX2 power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler). The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot channel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying that result meets system tolerances. Waveform quality (rho) should be > 0.912 (-0.4 dB). The BBX2 then de-keys and the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated. The LMF Tests menu list item, Rho, performs the waveform quality test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.

Background: Pilot Offset Acceptance Test

This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offset of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements will be via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna and all TCH elements from the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler). The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot Time Offset in uS, verifying results meet system tolerances. Pilot Time Offset should be within < 3 s of the target PT Offset (0 mS). The BBX2 then de-keys, and the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

4-9

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure

68P09255A57-O

Background: Code Domain Power Test

This test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262 and all MCC channel elements under test are configured to generate Orthogonal Channel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes, and are assigned a full-rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs to be tested at any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32 CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made, so all channel elements are verified on all sectors. BBX2 power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).

Code domain power levels, which have been set for all ODD numbered Walsh channels, are verified using the OCNS command. This is done by verifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) is equal to 10.2 + 2 dB and that the noise floor of all OFF Walsh channels measures < -27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power). The BBX2 then de-keys and, the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated. Upon completion of the test, OCNS is disabled on the specified MCC/CE.

4-10

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure

Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels

Pilot Channel
MAX OCNS CHANNEL 8.2 dB

PILOT LEVEL 12.2 dB MAX OCNS SPEC.

Active channels

MIN OCNS SPEC.

MIN OCNS CHANNEL MAX NOISE FLOOR MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR: < -27 dB SPEC.

Inactive channels

Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

...

64

Showing all OCNS Passing

Pilot Channel
FAILURE - EXCEEDS MAX OCNS SPEC. 8.2 dB

PILOT LEVEL 12.2 dB MAX OCNS SPEC.

Active channels
FAILURE - DOES NOT MEET MIN OCNS SPEC.

MIN OCNS SPEC.

FAILURE - EXCEEDS MAX NOISE FLOOR SPEC. MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR: < -27 dB

Inactive channels

Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

...

64

Indicating Failures

FW00283

Background: FER Test

This test verifies the BTS FER on all traffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1% FER) at an RF input level of -119 dBm [or -116 dBm if using Tower Top Amplifier (TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set as the signal source controlled by the same command. All measurements will be via the LMF. The pilot gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna and all channel elements from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channel element only). BBX2 power output is set to -20 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler). The BBX2 must be keyed in order to enable the RX receive circuitry.
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

4-11

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure

68P09255A57-O

The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcode and provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverse link for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying the results meet the following specification: FER returned less than 1% and total frames measured is 1500. All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. The BBX then de-keys and, the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned to the current RX antenna paths under test. The test is then repeated.

4-12

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Generating an ATP Report

Generating an ATP Report

Background
Each time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include the results of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used to close the status report window. The ATP report will not be updated if the status reports window is closed with use of the Dismiss button.

ATP Report
A separate report is created for each BTS and includes the following for each test:

S S S S S S S S S S S S

Test name BBX number Channel number Carrier number Sector number Upper test limit Lower test limit Test result PASS or FAIL Description information (if applicable) Time stamp Details/Warning information (if applicable)

Follow the procedure in the Table 4-2 to view and create a printable file for the ATP report of a BTS. Table 4-2: Generate an ATP Report Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action Click on the Login tab if it is not in the forefront. Select the desired BTS from the Available Base Stations pick list. Click on the Report button. Sort the report if desired by clicking on a column heading. Click on the Dismiss button if you do not want to create a printable file copy. To create a printable file, select the desired file type in the picklist and then click on the Save button.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

4-13

Generating an ATP Report

Notes

68P09255A57-O

4-14

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

Chapter 5

Prepare to Leave the Site

5

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

5-1

Initializing Active Service

68P09255A57-O

Initializing Active Service

External Test Equipment Removal
Perform the procedure in Table 5-1 to disconnect the test equipment and configure the BTS for active service. Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal Step 1 2 Action Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors at the rear of the frame. Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the rear of the frame.

CAUTION

Verify all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the correct ports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables will cause system degradation of call processing.

Reset All Devices

Reset all devices by cycling power before leaving the site. The CBSC configuration data and code loads could be different from data and code on the LMF. By resetting all devices, the CBSC can load the proper data and code when the span is active again.

Updating BTS CAL LMF Files in the CBSC

Updated CAL file information is moved from the LMF Windows environment back to the CBSC which resides in a Unix environment. The procedures that follow detail how to move files from the Windows environment to the CBSC.

Copying CAL files from LMF to a Disk

Follow the procedures in Table 5-2 to copy CAL files from a LMF computer to a 3.5 diskette. Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a Diskette Step 1 Insert a disk into the LMF A drive. Action

NOTE
If your disk has not been formatted, format it using Windows. The disk must be DOS formatted before copying any files. Consult your Windows/DOS documentation or online helps on how to format diskettes. 2 3 4 5 6 Click on the Start button and launch the Windows Explorer program from your Programs menu list. Click on your C: drive. Double Click on the wlmf folder. Double Click on the CDMA folder. Click on the bts-# folder for the calibration file you want to copy. . . . continued on next page
5-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Initializing Active Service

Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a Diskette

Step 7 8

Action Drag the BTS-#.cal file to the 3-1/2 floppy (A:) icon on the top left of the screen and release the mouse button. Continue step 6 and 7 until you have copied each file desired and close the Windows Explorer program by selecting Close from the File menu option.

Copying CAL files from diskette to the CBSC

Follow the procedure in Table 5-3 to copy CAL files from a diskette to the CBSC. Table 5-3: Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC Step 1 2 3 4 Log into the CBSC workstation. Place your diskette containing CAL file(s) in the CBSC workstation diskette drive. Enter eject -q and press the Enter key. Enter mount and press the Enter key. Verify that floppy/no_name is displayed. Action

NOTE
If the eject command has been previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number. Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Enter cd /floppy/no_name and press the Enter key. Enter ls -lia and press the Enter key. Verify that the bts-#.cal file is on the disk. Enter cd and press the Enter key. Enter pwd and press the Enter key. Verify that you are in your home directory (/home/<name>). Enter dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts-#.cal bts-#.cal and press the Enter key (where # is the BTS number). Enter ls -l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify that the CAL file was successfully copied. Enter eject and press the Enter key. Remove the floppy disk from the workstation.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

5-3

Initializing Active Service

68P09255A57-O

BTS Site Span Configuration Verification

Perform the procedure in Table 5-4 to verify the current Span Framing Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI3/SGLI3 boards in all C-CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should be verified. Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration Step 1 2 Action Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of the MGLI3 MMI port (see Figure 5-1). Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon.

NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being used for the MMI session. 3 Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI3/SGLI3 framing format and line code configuration (in bold type):
span view <cr>

Observe a display similar to the options shown below:

COMMAND ACCEPTED: span view

5
The parameter in NVM is set to T1_2. The frame format in flash Equalization: Span A - Default (0-131 Span B - Default (0-131 Span C - Default (0-131 Span D - D f lt (0 131 S Default (0-131 Span E - Default (0-131 Span F - Default (0-131 is set to use T1_2. feet feet feet f t feet feet feet for for for f for for for T1/J1, T1/J1, T1/J1, T1/J1 T1/J1, T1/J1, T1/J1, 120 120 120 120 120 120 Ohm Ohm Ohm Oh Ohm Ohm Ohm for for for f for for for E1) E1) E1) E1) E1) E1)

Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise) Currently, the link is running at the default rate The actual rate is 0

NOTE
Defaults for span equalization are 0-40 m for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1. Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types. There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC-R/CBSC span configuration requires it. If the current MGLI3/SGLI3 framing format and line code configuration does not display the correct choice, proceed to Table 5-5. 4 5 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all remaining GLIs. Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection window menu bar, and then Exit from the dropdown menu.

5-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Initializing Active Service

Figure 5-1: MGLI3/SGLI3 MMI Port Connection

RS-232 CABLE FROM LMF COM1 PORT GLI BOARD

NULL MODEM BOARD (PART# 8484877P01)

9-PIN TO 9- PIN RS-232 CABLE

MMI SERIAL PORT

REF-FW00344

Set BTS Site Span Configuration

Perform the procedure in Table 5-5 to configure the Span Framing Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI3/SGLI3 boards in all C-CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must be configured.
NOTE

Perform the following procedure ONLY if span configurations loaded in the MGLI3/GLI3s do not match those in the OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the exact configuration data is available. Loading incorrect span configuration data will render the site inoperable.

Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration Step 1 2 Action If not already done, connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of the MGLI3 MMI port (see Figure 5-1). Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see Table 3-3 on page 3-13).

NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being used for the MMI session. . . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

5-5

Initializing Active Service

Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration Step 3 Action

68P09255A57-O

If required only, enter the following MMI command for each span line to set the BTS span parameters to match that of the physical spans a - f run to the site: span_config <option#1> <option#2> <option#3> <option#4> <option#5> option#1 = the span to change (a - f) option#2 = the span type (0 - 8): 0 - E1_1 (HDB3, CCS, CRC-4) 1 - E1_2 (HDB3, CCS) 2 - E1_3 (HDB3, CAS, CRC-4, TS16) 3 - E1_4 (HDB3, CAS, TS16) 4 - T1_1 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, without ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable) 5 - T1_2 (B8ZS, DS1 AT&T ESF, 4 to 1 packing, 64K link) 6 - J1_1 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, Japan CRC6, 4 to 1 packing) 7 - J1_2 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, US CRC6, 4 to 1 packing) 8 - T1_3 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, with ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable) option#3 = the link speed (56 or 64) Kbps option#4 = the span equalization (0 - 7): 0 - T1_6 (T1,J1:long haul) 1 - T1_4 (T1,J1:393-524 feet) 2 - T1_4 (T1,J1:131-262 feet) 3 - E1_75 (E1:75 Ohm) 4 - T1_4 (T1,J1:0-131 feet) 5 - T1_4 (T1,J1:524-655 feet) 6 - T1_4 (T1,J1:262-393 feet) 7 - E1_120 (E1:120 Ohm) option#5 = the slot that has LAPD channel (0 - 31) Example for setting span configuration to E1_2, 64 Kbps, E1_120-Ohm, LAPD channel 1: span_config a 1 64 7 1 . . span_config f 1 64 7 1 Example for setting span configuration to T1_2, 64 Kbps, T1_4 (0-131 feet), LAPD channel 0: span_config a 5 64 4 0 . . span_config f 5 64 4 0

* IMPORTANT
Make sure that spans a - f are set to the same span type and link speed. The equalization may be different for each individual span. After executing the span_config command, the affected MGLI3/SGLI3 board MUST be reset and re-loaded for changes to take effect. Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rate used at the site. Press the RESET button on the GLI3 for changes to take effect. . . . continued on next page

5-6

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Initializing Active Service

Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration

Step 5 6

Action This completes the site specific BTS Span setup for this GLI. Move the MMI cable to the next SGLI3 and repeat steps 1 and 4 for ALL MGLI3/SGLI3 boards. Terminate the Hyperterm session and disconnect the LMF from the MGLI/SGLI.

Re-connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem

Before leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors which were removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-6. Table 5-6: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections Step 1 2 3 Ensure that the CSU is powered ON. Verify the span status. Action Connect the surge protectors on the 50-pin punch block for the spans.

LMF Removal
CAUTION

DO NOT power down the CDMA LMF without performing the procedure indicated below. Corrupted/lost data files may result, and in some cases, the CDMA LMF may lock up.

Follow the procedures in Table 5-7 to terminate the LMF session and remove the terminal. Table 5-7: Terminate the LMF Session and Remove the LMF Step 1 2 3 4 From the CDMA window select File>Exit. From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown. Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows message appears. Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet. Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and the GPIB cables as required for equipment transport. Action

Reestablish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1

NOTE

After all activities at the site have been completed, including disconnecting the LMF, place a phone call to the OMC-R and request the BTS be placed under control of the OMC-R.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

5-7

Initializing Active Service

68P09255A57-O

5-8

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

Chapter 6

Troubleshooting

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

6-1

Troubleshooting

68P09255A57-O

Troubleshooting
Overview
The information in this chapter addresses some of the scenarios likely to be encountered by Customer Field Engineering (CFE) team members. This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference document for use in the field. It provides basic what to do if basic troubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform per the procedure documented in the manual. Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the field and information gained form experience in Motorola labs and classrooms.

Cannot Log into Cell-Site

Follow the procedure in Table 6-1 to troubleshoot any Login Failure problem during normal operation. Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedure n Step 1 Action If MGLI LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI by re-seating it. If this persists, install RGLI card in MGLI slot and retry. A Red LED may also indicate no Ethernet termination at top of frame. Verify that T1 is disconnected at the Channel Signaling Unit (CSU). If T1 is still connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS. Try pinging the MGLI. Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in front of the BTS. Verify the LMF was configured properly. Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 (flexible black cable of less than 2.5 feet length). Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly. Verify a T-adapter is not used on LMF side port if connected to the BTS front LMF primary port. Try connecting to the I/O panel (back of frame). Use Tri-Ax to BNC adapter at the LMF port for this connection. Re-boot the CDMA LMF and retry. Re-seat the MGLI and retry. Verify IP addresses are configured properly.

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

6-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Troubleshooting

Cannot Communicate to Power Meter

Follow the procedure in Table 6-2 to troubleshoot a power meter communication failure. Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure n Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Verify Power Meter is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter. Verify cable setup as specified in Chapter 3. Verify the GP-IB address of the Power Meter is set to 13. Refer to Test Equipment setup section of Chapter 3 for details. Verify that Com1 port is not used by another application. Verify that the communications analyzer is in Talk&Listen, not Control mode.

Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer

Follow the procedure in Table 6-3 to troubleshoot a communication analyzer failure. Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure n Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Verify analyzer is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter. Verify cable setup. Verify the GPIB address is set to 18. Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to Test Equipment setup section for details. Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be ON (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ON, then power-cycle the GPIB Box and retry. If a Hyperterm window is open for MMI, close it. Verify the LMF GPIB address is set to 18 Verify the analyzer is in Talk and Listen not Control mode.

6 7 8

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

6-3

Troubleshooting

68P09255A57-O

Code Download Failure

Follow the procedure in Table 6-4 to troubleshoot any code download failure. Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure n Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS at CSU. Verify LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function. Communication to MGLI must first be established before trying to talk to any other BTS device. MGLI must be INS_ACT state (green). Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up. If card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure. Reset card by re-seating it. If this persists, replace card from another slot & retry.

NOTE
The card can only be replaced by a card of the same type. 6 7 8 9 Re-seat card and try again. If a BBX reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK. Use the LMF Status function to verify the load. If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by selecting the device and Reset. If a BBX or an MCC remains OOS_ROM (blue) after code download, use the LMF Device > Status function to verify that the code load was accepted. If the code load was accepted, use LMF Device > Download > Flash to load RAM code into flash memory.

10

Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-5 to troubleshoot any data download failure. Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure n Step 1 2 Action Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure. Verify the ROM and RAM code loads are of the same release by statusing the card. Refer to Chapter 3, Download the BTS for more information.

6-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Troubleshooting

Cannot ENABLE Device

Before a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in the OOS_RAM state (yellow on the LMF) with data downloaded to the device. The color of the device on the LMF changes to green, once it is enabled. The three states that devices can be displayed:

S Enabled (green, INS) S Disabled (yellow, OOS_RAM) S Reset (blue, OOS_ROM)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-6 to troubleshoot device enable failure. Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure n Step 1 2 3 Action Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure. If CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude data for cell site location and GPS sync. Ensure primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.

NOTE
MCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS. 4 5 6 Verify 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise. The BBX should not be enabled for ATP tests. If MCCs give invalid or no system time, verify the CSM is enabled.

LPA Errors
Follow the procedure in Table 6-7 to troubleshoot any LPA errors. Table 6-7: LPA Errors n Step 1 Action If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers, then connect an MMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection. Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window. The resulting LMF display may provide an indication of the problem. (Call Field Support for further assistance.)

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

6-5

Troubleshooting

68P09255A57-O

Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure

Follow the procedure in Table 6-8 to troubleshoot a BLO calibration failure. Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure n Step 1 2 Action Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup section) and connection is made to the proper TX port. Verify the parameters in the bts-#.cdf file are set correctly for the following bands: For 1900 MHz: BandClass=1; FreqBand=16 For 800 MHz: BandClass=0; FreqBand=8 Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and after 5 seconds, pushing back in. Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from sensor head. Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be ON (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ON, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and retry. Verify sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Ref signal. If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operational, the Meter display will show RES : Verify the combiner frequency is the same as the test freq/chan.

3 4 5

6 7

6-6

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Troubleshooting

Calibration Audit Failure

Follow the procedure in Table 6-9 to troubleshoot a calibration audit failure. Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure n Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Verify Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup section of chapter 3). Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from sensor head. Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in. Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Ref signal. After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBX2s before auditing. Click on the BBX(s) and select Device>Download BLO Re-try the audit. Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be ON (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ON, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GP-IB Box and retry.

Forward link problem

If the BTS passes the reduced ATP tests but has a forward link problem during normal operation follow the procedure in Table 6-10 to troubleshoot. Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP) n Step 1 Action Perform these additional TX tests to troubleshoot a forward link problem: - TX mask - TX rho - TX code domain

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

6-7

Troubleshooting

68P09255A57-O

Cannot Perform Txmask Measurement

Follow the procedure in Table 6-11 to troubleshoot a TX Mask Measurement failure. Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure n Step 1 2 3 Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX(s). If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup. Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Re-set the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in. Action

Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement

Follow the procedure in Table 6-12 to troubleshoot a rhoand pilot time offset measurement failure. Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure n Step 1 2 3 4 Action Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen. Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the CDF file. Re-load MGLI data and repeat the test. If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup. Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in. If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may indicate that the GPS is still phasing (i.e. trying to reach and maintain 0 freq. error). Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz. Press <Shift-avg> and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is an indication the GPS has not stabilized before going INS and may need to be re-initialized.

5 6

Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement

Follow the procedure in Table 6-13 to troubleshoot code domain and noise floor measurement failure. Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure n Step 1 2 3 Action Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen. Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the CDF file. Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure).

6-8

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Troubleshooting

Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement

Follow the procedure in Table 6-14 to troubleshoot carrier measurement failure. Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure n Step 1 Action Perform the test manually, using the spread CDMA signal. Verify High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard is warmed up (60 minutes) and properly connected to test set-up.

Multi-FER Test Failure

Follow the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot multi-FER failure. Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure n Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action Verify test equipment set up is correct for a FER test. Verify test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks. The yellow LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF. Verify MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS-ACT. Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on extent of failure). Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure). Verify antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages.

Problem Description
Many of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) boards may be resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for repair. This section describes known CSM problems identified in field returns, some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before returning suspect CSM boards.

Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation

If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 or SGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version AB, then replace with version BC or higher, and return model AB to the repair center.

No GPS Reference Source

Check the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. RF-GPS (Local GPS) - CSM kit SGLN1145, which should be installed in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit SGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Remote GPS (R-GPS) - Kit SGLN4132ED or later, which should be installed in both Slot 1 and Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any incorrectly configured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not attempt to change hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the GPS antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended guidelines.
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

6-9

Troubleshooting

68P09255A57-O

Checksum Failure
The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical disturbance, or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return CSM board back to repair center if the attempt to reload fails.

GPS Bad RX Message Type

This is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM software (3.5 or higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an earlier version of CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from the CBSC. Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher. Return CSM board back to repair center if attempt to reload fails.

CSM Reference Source Configuration Error

This is caused by incorrect reference source configuration performed in the field by software download. CSM kit SGLN1145 and SGLN4132 must have proper reference sources configured (as shown below) to function correctly. CSM Kit No. SGLN1145 SGLN4132ED or later Hardware Configuration With GPS Receiver Without GPS Receiver CSM Slot No. 1 2 Reference Source Configuration Primary = Local GPS Backup = Either LFR or HSO Primary = Remote GPS Backup = Either LFR or HSO

Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS

This may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the accuracy flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM system time/GPS and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least 1 satellite should be visible and tracked for the surveyed mode and 4 satellites should be visible and tracked for the estimated mode. Also, verify correct base site position data used in surveyed mode.

6-10

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Troubleshooting

C-CCP Backplane
The C-CCP backplane is a multi-layer board that interconnects all the C-CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possible improper diagnoses when problems occur.

Connector Functionality
The following connector overview describes the major types of backplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This will allow the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) to:

S Determine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem

type.

S Allow the isolation of problems to a specific cable or connector. Primary A and Redundant B ISB (Inter Shelf Bus) connectors
The 40 pin ISB connectors provide an interface bus from the master GLI to all other GLIs in the modem frame. Its basic function is to provide clock synchronization from the master GLI to all other GLIs in the frame. The ISB is also provides the following functions:

S Groom span line when a single span is used for multiple cages. S Provide MMI connection to/from the master GLI to cell site modem. S Provide interface between GLIs and the AMR (for reporting BTS
alarms).

Span Line Connector

The span line input is an 8 pin RJ-45 connector that provides a primary and secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI in the C-CCP shelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master GLI and also all the BBX traffic.

Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)

Provides a +27 Volt input for use by the power supply modules.

Power Supply Module Interface

Each power supply module has a series of three different connectors to provide the needed inputs/outputs to the C-CCP backplane. These include a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin interface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The Transceiver Power Module converts 27/48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, +5.0 Volts to be used by the C-CCP shelf cards.

GLI Connector
This connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a 6-conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectors provide inputs/outputs for the GLIs in the C-CCP backplane.
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

6-11

Troubleshooting GLI Ethernet A and B Connections

68P09255A57-O

These BNC connectors are located on the C-CCP backplane and routed to the GLI board. This interface provides all the control and data communications between the master GLI and the other GLIs, between gateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.

BBX Connector
Each BBX connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connector and two 6-conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC, digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBXs in the C-CCP backplane.

CIO Connectors S RX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri-Filters
(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules the six A (main) signals go to one MPC; the six B (diversity) to the other. The MPC outputs the low-noise-amplified signals via the C-CCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to the appropriate BBX.

S A digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX, to the
backplane, then on to the MCC slots.

S Digital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCC24s. Each

output is routed from the MCC slot via the backplane appropriate BBX.

S TX RF path signal originates from the BBX, through the backplane to

the CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cabling to the LPAs in the LPA shelf.

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure

The following table provides a standard procedure for troubleshooting problems that appear to be related to a defective C-CCP backplane. The table is broken down into possible problems and steps which should be taken in an attempt to find the root cause.
NOTE

It is important to note that all steps be followed before replacing ANY C-CCP backplane.

6-12

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Troubleshooting

Digital Control Problems

No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-16 for problems with GLI control. Table 6-16: No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs) Step 1 2 3 4 Action Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens. Verify C-CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly. Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage. Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.

No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (All GLIs)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-17 for problems with GLI control. Table 6-17: No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs) Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Verify C-CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly. Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR/CBSC data base. Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage. Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI. Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the master GLI for proper connection and damage.

MGLI Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI

Follow the procedure in Table 6-18 for problems with GLI control. Table 6-18: MGLI Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI Step 1 2 3 4 Action Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR CBSC data base. Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens. Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage. Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.

No AMR Control (MGLI good)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-19 for problems with AMR control. Table 6-19: MGLI Control Good - No Control over AMR Step 1 2 3
Jan 2003

Action Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage. Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI. Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.
1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x
6-13

Troubleshooting No BBX Control in the Shelf

68P09255A57-O

Follow the procedure in Table 6-20 for problems with co-located GLI. Table 6-20: MGLI Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLIs Step 1 2 3 4 Action Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage. Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI. Visually check BBX connectors (both board and backplane) for damage. Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.

No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic

Follow the procedure in Table 6-21 for problems with span line traffic. Table 6-21: BBX Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic Step 1 2 3 4 Action Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage. Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI. Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage. If the problem seems to be limited to 1 BBX, replace the BBX with a known good BBX.

No (or Missing) MCC24 Channel Elements 6

Step 1 2 3 4 Follow the procedure in Table 6-22 for problems with channel elements. Table 6-22: No MCC-1X/MCC24E/MCC8E Channel Elements Action Verify channel elements on a co-located MCC of the same MCC8E = 0; MCC24E = 2; MCC-1X = 3) type (CDF MccType codes:

Check MCC connectors (both module and backplane) for damage. If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace it with a known good MCC of the same type. If no channel elements on any MCC, verify clock reference to CIO.

6-14

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Troubleshooting

DC Power Problems
WARNING

Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to the BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a second person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all rings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning this test.

No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module

Follow the procedure in Table 6-23 for problems with DC input voltage. Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module Step 1 Action Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame. Verify there are no breakers tripped.

* IMPORTANT
If a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the applicable shelf supplied by the breaker and attempt to reset it. - If breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame. - If breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or sub-assembly within the shelf. 2 3 Verify that the C-CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker panel is functional. Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to the C-CCP backplane by measuring the DC voltage level on the PWR_IN cable. - If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame. - If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and measure the level at the VCC power feed clip on the distribution backplane. If the voltage is correct at the power clip, inspect the clip for damage. If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power supply module connectors. Replace the power supply module with a known good module. If steps 1 through 4 fail to indicate a problem, the C-CCP backplane failure (possibly an open trace) has occurred.

4 5 6

No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI, BBX2, or Switchboard

Follow the procedure in Table 6-24 for problems with DC input voltage. Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module Step 1 2 3 Action Verify steps outlined in Table 6-23 have been performed. Inspect the defective board/module (both board and backplane) connector for damage. Replace suspect board/module with known good board/module.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

6-15

Troubleshooting

68P09255A57-O

No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module

Follow the procedure in Table 6-25 for problems with DC input voltage. Table 6-25: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module Step 1 2 Action Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back-plane connectors for damage in all the affected board slots. Perform steps outlined in the RF path troubleshooting flowchart in this manual.

RFDS
The RFDS is used to perform Pre-Calibration Verification and Post-Calibration Audits which limit-check the RFDS-generate and reported receive levels of every path from the RFDS through the directional coupler coupled paths. In the event of test failure, refer to the following tables.

All tests fail

Follow the procedure in Table 6-26 for problems with RFDS. Table 6-26: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail Step 1 Action Check the calibration equipment for proper operation by manually setting the signal generator output attenuator to the lowest output power setting and connecting the output port to the spectrum analyzer rf input port. Set the signal generator output attenuator to -90 dBm, and switch on the rf output. Verify that the spectrum analyzer can receive the signal, indicate the correct signal strength, (accounting for the cable insertion loss), and the approximate frequency. Visually inspect RF cabling. Make sure each directional coupler forward and reflected port connects to the RFDS antenna select unit on the RFDS. Check the wiring against the site documentation wiring diagram or the BTS Site Installation manual. Verify RGLI and TSU have been downloaded. Check to see that all RFDS boards show green on the front panel indicators. Visually check (both board and backplane) for damage. Replace any boards that do not show green with known good boards one at a time in the following order. Re-test after each is replaced. - RFDS ASU board. - RFDS Transceiver board.

6
2

3 4 5 6 7

6-16

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Troubleshooting

All RX and TX paths fail

If every receive or transmit path fails, the problem most likely lies with the rf converter board or the transceiver board. Refer to Table 6-27 for fault isolation procedures. Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation - All RX and TX paths fail Step 1 2 3 4 Action Visually check the master RF converter board (both board and backplane) for damage. Replace the RF converter board with a known good RF converter board. Visually check RXCVR TSU (both board and backplane) for damage. Replace the TSU with a known good TSU.

All tests fail on a single antenna

If all path failures are on one antenna port, forward and/or reflected, follow the procedures in Table 6-28 checks. Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail on single antenna path Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Visually inspect the site interface cabinet internal cabling to the suspect directional coupler antenna port. Verify the forward and reflected ports connect to the correct RFDS antenna select unit positions on the RFDS backplane. Refer to the installation manual for details. Visually check ASU connectors (both board and backplane) for damage. Replace the ASU with a known good ASU. Replace the RF cables between the affected directional coupler and RFDS.

NOTE
Externally route the cable to bypass suspect segment.

Module Status Indicators

Each of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red) LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator is labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow. Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED. The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR. Based on the status of this signal the AMR controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED on the fan module.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

6-17

Troubleshooting

68P09255A57-O

LED Status Combs All Modules (except GLI, CSM, BBX2, MCC8/24E)
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the module status indicator.

S Solid GREEN - module operating in a normal (fault free) condition. S Solid RED - module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware failure. Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a complete module failure and normal service may or may not be reduced or interrupted.

DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations

The PWR CNVTR has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.

PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.

S Solid GREEN - module operating in a normal (fault free) condition. S Solid RED - module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware problem.

CSM LED Status Combinations

6 PWR/ALM LED
The CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware and software/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators. After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS-RAM code from the Flash EPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS-ROM code is loaded from the Flash EPROM.

S Solid GREEN - module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm. S Solid RED - Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)
condition.

S Slowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm. S Long RED/Short GREEN - OOS_ROM alarm. S Rapidly Flashing GREEN - OOS_RAM no alarm or
INS_ACT in DUMB mode.

S S S S

Short RED/Short GREEN - OOS_RAM alarm. Long GREEN/Short RED - INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm. Off - no DC power or on-board fuse is open. Solid YELLOW - After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. During SRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (If SRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED and the CSM attempts to reboot.)
Jan 2003

6-18

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Troubleshooting

Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports

SYNC MONITOR

PWR/ALM Indicator

FREQ MONITOR

FW00303

FREQ Monitor Connector

A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. When both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2 clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1. The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm (800 mVpp) into a 50 load connected to this port.

SYNC Monitor Connector

A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows monitoring of the Even Second Tick reference signal generated by the CSMs. At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulse width of 153 nanoseconds.

MMI Connector
Only accessible behind front panel. The RS-232 MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in the development or factory environment, but may be used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

6-19

Troubleshooting

68P09255A57-O

GLI2 LED Status Combinations

The GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as described below and shown in Figure 6-2. The operating states of the 5 LEDs are:

ACTIVE
Solid GREEN - GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelf control and is providing control of the digital interfaces. Off - GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should be active.

MASTER S Solid GREEN - GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2). S Off - GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave). ALARM S Solid RED - GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset. S While in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 is
performing ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).

S While in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 is

performing RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).

S Off - No Alarm. STATUS S Flashing GREEN- GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operating
condition.

S On - GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code. S Off - GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code. SPANS S Solid GREEN - Span line is connected and operating. S Solid RED - Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.

6-20

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Troubleshooting

GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors

RESET Pushbutton
Depressing the RESET pushbutton causes a partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices. The GLI2 is placed in the OOS_ROM state

MMI Connector
The RS-232MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.

LAN Connectors (A & B)

The two 10BASE2 Ethernet circuit board mounted BNC connectors are located on the bottom front edge of the GLI2; one for each LAN interface, A & B. Ethernet cabling is connected to tee connectors fastened to these BNC connectors. Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel
LED
STATUS

OPERATING STATUS
OFF operating normally ON briefly during powerup when the Alarm LED turns OFF. SLOW GREEN when the GLI2 is INS (inservice) All functions on the GLI2 are reset when pressing and releasing the switch. OFF operating normally ON briefly during powerup when the Alarm LED turns OFF. SLOW GREEN when the GLI2 is INS (inservice) OFF card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby GREEN operating normally YELLOW one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving a remote alarm indication signal from the far end RED one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm state The pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in the top shelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card in the bottom shelf is in the standby mode. ON operating normally in active mode OFF operating normally in standby mode An RS232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of 115,200 baud communications. Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails ON active card operating normally OFF standby card operating normally

STATUS LED

RESET ALARM

STATUS RESET

RESET PUSHBUTTON ALARM LED

SPANS
ALARM SPANS

SPANS LED

MASTER
MASTER

MASTER LED

MMI

MMI PORT CONNECTOR ACTIVE LED

MMI PORT CONNECTOR ACTIVE

ACTIVE

FW00225

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

6-21

Troubleshooting

68P09255A57-O

GLI3 Front Panel

Figure 6-3 shows the GLI3 front panel. Figure 6-3: GLI3 Front Panel

LED
BPR A BPR B AUX

OPERATING STATUS
Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as an ethernet client. Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as an ethernet client. Wired as an ethernet client for direct connection to a personal com puter with a standard ethernet cable. It allows connection of ethernet sniffer" when the ethernet switch is properly configured for port mon itoring. This port may also be connected to the optional Motorola MOSCADL using a crossover network. Supports the crosscoupled ethernet circuits to the mate GLI using a double crossover cable. Pressing and releasing the switch resets all functions on the GLI3. OFF operating normally ON briefly during powerup when the Alarm LED turns OFF SLOW GREEN when the GLI3 is INS (inservice) OFF card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby GREEN operating normally YELLOW one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving a remote alarm indication signal from the far end RED one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm state An RS232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of 115,200 baud communications. OFF operating normally ON briefly during powerup when the Alarm LED turns OFF SLOW GREEN when the GLI3 is INS (inservice) Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails ON active card operating normally OFF standby card operating normally
ti-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftw

BPR A

GLI RESET ALARM

100BASE-T to BTS Packet Router or Expansion cage

BPR B AUX

100BASE-T Auxiliary Monitor Port Dual 100BASE-T in a single RJ45 to Redundant (Mate) GLI3 Reset Switch
SPAN

Span

GLI ALARM RESET

Span (LED) Alarm (LED) MMI Port

MMI

MMI STA ACT

Active (LED) Status (LED)

STATUS

ACTIVE

6-22

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Troubleshooting

BBX LED Status Combinations

PWR/ALM LED
The BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED. The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:

S S S S S S S

Solid GREEN - INS_ACT no alarm Solid RED Red - initializing or power-up alarm Slowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm Long RED/Short GREEN - OOS_ROM alarm Rapidly Flashing GREEN - OOS_RAM no alarm Short RED/Short GREEN - OOS_RAM alarm Long GREEN/Short RED - INS_ACT alarm

MCC LED Status Combinations

The MCC module has LED indicators and connectors as described below. See Figure 6-4. Note that the figure does not show the connectors as they are concealed by the removable lens. The LED indicators and their states are as follows:

PWR/ALM LED S RED - fault on module ACTIVE LED S Off - module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic. S Slowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm. S Rapidly Flashing Green - OOS_RAM no alarm. S Solid GREEN - module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic. PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs S Solid RED - module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive. MMI Connectors S The RS-232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used in the field for debugging purposes.

S The RJ-11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be used

primarily in the development environment but may be used in the field for high data rate debugging purposes.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

6-23

Troubleshooting
Figure 6-4: MCC24/8E Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators

68P09255A57-O

PWR/ALM

PWR/ALM LED

LED
PWR/ALM

COLOR
RED

OPERATING STATUS

LENS (REMOVABLE)

OFF operating normally ON briefly during powerup and during failure conditions An alarm is generated in the event of a failure GREEN RAPIDLY BLINKING Card is codeloaded but not enabled SLOW BLINKING Card is not codeloaded ON card is codeloaded and enabled (INS_ACTIVE) ON fault condition SLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) CHI bus inactive on powerup
FW00224

ACTIVE

RED
ACTIVE

ACTIVE LED

LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations

6 LPA Module LED
Each LPA module contains a bi-color LED just above the MMI connector on the ETIB module. Interpret this LED as follows: S GREEN LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normal condition). S Flashing GREEN/RED LPA module is active but is reporting an low input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and does not constitute a failure. S Flashing RED LPA is in alarm.

Span Problems (No Control Link)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-29 when troubleshooting a control link failure. Table 6-29: Troubleshooting Control Link Failure n Step 1 Action Verify the span settings using the span view command on the active master GLI MMI port. If these are set correctly, verify the edlc parameters using the show command. Any alarms conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly. - Try looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the mobility manager (MM) and verify that the looped signal is good. - Listen for control tone on appropriate timeslot from base site and MM.
1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x
Jan 2003

6-24

Appendix A

System Data

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

A-1

Site Operation Verification A

68P09255A57-O

Site Operation Verification

Verification of Test Equipment Used
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used Manufacturer Model Serial Number

Comments:________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________
A-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Site Operation Verification A

Table A-2: Site Checklist

Site Checklist
OK Deliveries Floor Plan Inter Frame Cables: Ethernet Frame Ground Power Factory Data: BBX Test Panel RFDS Site Temperature Dress Covers/Brackets Parameter Specification Per established procedures Verified Per procedure Per procedure Per procedure Per procedure Per procedure Per procedure Comments

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

A-3

Site Operation Verification A

68P09255A57-O

Preliminary Operations
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations OK Parameter Shelf ID Dip Switches Ethernet LAN verification Specification Per site equipage Verified per procedure Comments

Comments:_________________________________________________________

A-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Site Operation Verification A

Pre-Power and Initial Power Tests

Table A3a: Pre-power Checklist OK Parameter Pre-power-up tests Specification Verify power supply output voltage at the top of each BTS frame is within specifications verified verified verified verified verified isolated isolated installed installed Verify power supply output voltage at the top of each BTS frame is within specifications: Comments

Internal Cables: ISB (all cages) CSM (all cages) Power (all cages) Ethernet Connectors LAN A ohms LAN B ohms LAN A shield LAN B shield Ethernet Boots Air Impedance Cage (single cage) Initial power-up tests

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

A-5

Site Operation Verification A

68P09255A57-O

General Optimization Checklist

Table A3b: Pre-power Checklist OK LEDs Frame fans LMF to BTS Connection Preparing the LMF Log into the LMF PC Create site specific BTS directory Download device loads Ping LAN A Ping LAN B Download/Enable MGLI3s Download/Enable GLI3s Set Site Span Configuration Download CSMs Enable CSMs Enable CSMs Download/Enable MCCs* Download BBXs* Download TSU (in RFDS) Program TSU NAM Test Set Calibration Parameter Specification illuminated operational per procedure per procedure per procedure per procedure per procedure per procedure per procedure per procedure per procedure per procedure per procedure per procedure per procedure per procedure per procedure per procedure Comments

*MCCs may be MCC8Es, MCC24s or MCC-1Xs. BBXs may be BBXs or BBX-1Xs Comments:_________________________________________________________

A-6

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Site Operation Verification A

Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation

GPS Receiver Operation

OK Parameter GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites Initial Position Accuracy: Current Position: lat lon height Current Position: satellites tracked Estimated: (>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visible Surveyed: (>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visible GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): (<30) Current reference source: Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes Specification Verify parameter Verify Estimated or Surveyed RECORD in msec and cm also convert to deg min sec Verify parameter as appropriate: Comments

Verify parameter

Verify parameter

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

A-7

Site Operation Verification A

68P09255A57-O

LFR Receiver Operation

Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation OK Parameter Station call letters M X Y Z assignment. SN ratio is > 8 dB LFR Task State: 1fr locked to station xxxx Current reference source: Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: Yes Verify parameter Verify parameter Specification as specified in site documentation Comments

Comments:_________________________________________________________

A-8

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Site Operation Verification A

Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction
Parameter Comments Specification Dual BP 6-Sector CARRIER

LPA IM Reduction

OK

LPA #

4:1 & 2:1 3-Sector

2:1 6-Sector

Dual BP 3-Sector

1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D 3A 3B 3C 3D 4A 4B 4C 4D

C1 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2 C2 C2 C3 C3 C3 C3 C4 C4 C4 C4

C1 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2 C2 C2 C1 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2 C2 C2

C1 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2 C2 C2

C1 C1 C1 C1

No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms

C1 C1 C1 C1

No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms No Alarms

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

A-9

Site Operation Verification A

68P09255A57-O

TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3-Sector Configurations

1-Carrier 2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels 4-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels
Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-and 4-Carrier Non-adj Channels) OK Calibration Audit carrier 1 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution post calibration Calibrate carrier 4 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB) prior to calibration Calibrate carrier 3 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB) prior to calibration Calibrate carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB) prior to calibration Calibrate carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB) prior to calibration Parameter Specification Comments BBX-1, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-2, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-3, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = BBX-7, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-8, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-9, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = BBX-4, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-5, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-6, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = BBX-10, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-1 1, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-12, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = BBX-1, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-2, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-3, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB . . . continued on next page

A-10

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Site Operation Verification A

Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-and 4-Carrier Non-adj Channels) OK Calibration Audit carrier 4 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution post calibration Calibration Audit carrier 3 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution post calibration Calibration Audit carrier 2 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution post calibration Parameter Specification Comments BBX-7, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-8, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-9, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = BBX-4, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-5, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-6, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = BBX-10, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-1 1, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-12, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

2-Carrier Adjacent Channel

Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 2-Carrier Adjacent Channels) OK Calibrate carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical), 38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration Parameter Specification Comments BBX-1, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-2, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-3, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = dB dB dB dB dB dB . . . continued on next page
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

A-11

Site Operation Verification A

OK Calibration Audit carrier 2 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution post calibration Calibration Audit carrier 1 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution post calibration Calibrate carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical), 38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration

68P09255A57-O

Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 2-Carrier Adjacent Channels) Parameter Specification Comments BBX-7, ANT-4 = BBX-r , ANT-4 = BBX-8, ANT-5 = BBX-r , ANT-5 = BBX-9, ANT-6 = BBX-r , ANT-6 = BBX-1, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-2, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-3, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = BBX-7, ANT-4 = BBX-r , ANT-4 = BBX-8, ANT-5 = BBX-r , ANT-5 = BBX-9, ANT-6 = BBX-r , ANT-6 = dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

3-Carrier Adjacent Channels 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels

Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels) OK Calibrate carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB before calibration Parameter Specification Comments BBX-1, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-2, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-3, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = dB dB dB dB dB dB . . . continued on next page
A-12

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Site Operation Verification A

Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels) OK Calibration Audit carrier 2 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution post calibration Calibration Audit carrier 1 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution post calibration Calibrate carrier 4 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB before calibration Calibrate carrier 3 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB before calibration Calibrate carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset =37 dB before calibration Parameter Specification Comments BBX-7, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-8, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-9, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = BBX-4, ANT-4 = BBX-r , ANT-4 = BBX-5, ANT-5 = BBX-r , ANT-5 = BBX-6, ANT-6 = BBX-r , ANT-6 = BBX-10, ANT-4 = BBX-3, ANT-4 = BBX-1 1, ANT-5 = BBX-r , ANT-5 = BBX-12, ANT-6 = BBX-r , ANT-6 = BBX-1, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-2, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-3, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = BBX-7, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-8, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-9, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB . . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

A-13

Site Operation Verification A

OK Calibration Audit carrier 4 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution post calibration Calibration Audit carrier 3 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution post calibration

68P09255A57-O

Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels) Parameter Specification Comments BBX-4, ANT-4 = BBX-r , ANT-4 = BBX-5, ANT-5 = BBX-r , ANT-5 = BBX-6, ANT-6 = BBX-r , ANT-6 = BBX-10, ANT-4 = BBX-r , ANT-4 = BBX-1 1, ANT-5 = BBX-r , ANT-5 = BBX-12, ANT-6 = BBX-r , ANT-6 = dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB

Comments:________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________

A-14

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Site Operation Verification A

TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 6-Sector Configurations

1-Carrier 2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels
Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels) OK Parameter Specification Comments BBX-1, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-2, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-3, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = BBX-4, ANT-4 = BBX-r , ANT-4 = BBX-5, ANT-5 = BBX-r , ANT-5 = BBX-6, ANT-6 = BBX-r , ANT-6 = BBX-7, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-8, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = BBX-9, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = BBX-10, ANT-4 = BBX-3, ANT-4 = BBX-1 1, ANT-5 = BBX-r , ANT-5 = BBX-12, ANT-6 = BBX-r , ANT-5 = dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB . . . continued on next page

Calibrate carrier 1

TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB ( yp ), y (typical), 38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration

Calibrate carrier 2

TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB ( yp ), y (typical), 38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

A-15

Site Operation Verification A

OK -

68P09255A57-O

Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels) Parameter Specification Comments BBX-1, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-2, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = Calibration Audit carrier 1 BBX-3, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = BBX-4, ANT-4 = BBX-r , ANT-4 = BBX-5, ANT-5 = BBX-r , ANT-5 = BBX-6, ANT-6 = BBX-r , ANT-6 = BBX-7, ANT-1 = BBX-r , ANT-1 = BBX-8, ANT-2 = BBX-r , ANT-2 = Calibration Audit carrier 2 BBX-9, ANT-3 = BBX-r , ANT-3 = BBX-10, ANT-4 = BBX-r , ANT-4 = BBX-1 1, ANT-5 = BBX-r , ANT-5 = BBX-12, ANT-6 = BBX-r , ANT-6 = dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution ( ) g post calibration

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution ( ) g post calibration

Comments:________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________

A-16

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Site Operation Verification A

Table A-11: TX Antenna VSWR

TX Antenna VSWR

OK -

Parameter VSWR Antenna 1 VSWR Antenna 2 VSWR Antenna 3 VSWR Antenna 4 VSWR Antenna 5 VSWR Antenna 6

Specification < (1.5 : 1) < (1.5 : 1) < (1.5 : 1) < (1.5 : 1) < (1.5 : 1) < (1.5 : 1)

Data

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

RX Antenna VSWR
Table A-12: RX Antenna VSWR OK Parameter VSWR Antenna 1 VSWR Antenna 2 VSWR Antenna 3 VSWR Antenna 4 VSWR Antenna 5 VSWR Antenna 6 Specification < (1.5 : 1) < (1.5 : 1) < (1.5 : 1) < (1.5 : 1) < (1.5 : 1) < (1.5 : 1) Data

Comments:_________________________________________________________
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

A-17

Site Operation Verification A

68P09255A57-O

Alarm Verification
Table A-13: CDI Alarm Input Verification OK Parameter Verify CDI alarm input operation per Table 3-5. Specification BTS Relay #XX Contact Alarm Sets/Clears Data

Comments:_________________________________________________________

C-CCP Shelf
Site I/O A & B C-CCP Shelf CSM-1 CSM-2 HSO CCD-1 CCD-2 AMR-1 AMR-2 MPC-1 MPC-2 Fans 1-3 GLI3-1 GLI3-2 BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 BBX-10 BBX-1 1 BBX-12 BBX-r MCC-1 MCC-2 MCC-3 MCC-4 MCC-5 MCC-6 MCC-7 MCC-8 MCC-9 MCC-10 MCC-1 1
A-18

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Site Operation Verification

MCC-12 CIO SWITCH PS-1 PS-2 PS-3

LPAs
LPA 1A LPA 1B LPA 1C LPA 1D LPA 2A LPA 2B LPA 2C LPA 2D LPA 3A LPA 3B LPA 3C LPA 3D LPA 4A LPA 4B LPA 4C LPA 4D

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

A-19

Appendix B

PN Offset

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

B-1

PN Offset

68P09255A57-O

PN Offset
Background
B
All channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHz CDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 64 possible Walsh code functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair of PN sequences unique to each sector. Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmitted from the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronize to the next strongest sector. The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBXs, where the corresponding I & Q registers reside. The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna) basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown of this information is found in Table B-1.

Usage
There are three basic RF chip delays currently in use. It is important to determine what RF chip delay is valid to be able to test the BTS functionality. This can be done by ascertaining if the CDF file FineTxAdj value was set to on when the MCC was downloaded with image data. The FineTxAdj value is used to compensate for the processing delay (approximately 20 mS) in the BTS using any type of mobile meeting IS-97 specifications. Observe the following guidelines: S If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 101 (65 HEX), the FineTxAdj has not been set. The I and Q values from the 0 table MUST be used. If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj has been set for the 14 chip table. S If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 197 (C5 HEX), FineTxAdj has been set for the 13 chip table.
NOTE

CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL or HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If necessary, convert HEX values in Table B-1 to decimal before comparing them to cdf file I & Q value assignments. - If you are using a Qualcomm mobile, use the I and Q values from the 13 chip delay table. - If you are using a mobile that does not have the 1 chip offset problem, (any mobile meeting the IS-97 specification), use the 14 chip delay table.

NOTE

If the wrong I and Q values are used with the wrong FineTxAdj parameter, system timing problems will occur. This will cause the energy transmitted to be smeared over several Walsh codes (instead of the single Walsh code that it was assigned to), causing erratic operation. Evidence of smearing is usually identified by Walsh channels not at correct levels or present when not selected in the Code Domain Power Test.
Jan 2003

B-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

PN Offset
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

Pilot PN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

14-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

23459 32589 17398 26333 4011 2256 18651 1094 21202 13841 31767 18890 30999 22420 20168 12354 11187 11834 10395 28035 27399 22087 2077 13758 11778 3543 7184 2362 25840 12177 10402 1917 17708 10630 6812 14350 10999 25003 2652 19898 2010 25936 28531 11952 31947 25589 11345 28198 13947 8462 9595 4473 7E24 125C 3846 3A33 4281 3999 0ADF 16C8 3077 7A3F 1D9D 485B 74E0 6260 66AA 779F 3CB4 59F2 4E33 0FD2 0615 7636 4650 4E58 2F6F 441D 441E 13EE 2456 4302 144E 11FE 60E4 431C 290B 27AD 5D2A 7AC1 0FEB 272E 4258 3791 6797 6C7F 7594 1EF2 3777 44E5 5A29 13EB 5BA3 7F4D 43F6 66DD 0FAB 08D0 48DB 0446 52D2 3611 7C17 49CA 7917 5794 4EC8 3042 2BB3 2E3A 289B 6D83 6B07 5647 081D 35BE 2E02 0DD7 1C10 093A 64F0 2F91 28A2 077D 452C 2986 1A9C 380E 2AF7 61AB 0A5C 4DBA 07DA 6550 6F73 2EB0 7CCB 63F5 2C51 6E26 367B 210E 257B

13-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

25581 29082 8699 32082 18921 1128 27217 547 10601 21812 28727 9445 29367 11210 10084 6177 23525 5917 23153 30973 31679 25887 18994 6879 5889 18647 3592 1181 12920 23028 5201 19842 8854 5315 3406 7175 23367 32489 1326 9949 1005 12968 31109 5976 28761 32710 22548 14099 21761 4231 23681 73E9 3F12 092E 1C23 4CC9 7090 4D1C 54BF 0B64 49EB 6CCF 5F1E 75FD 3A70 3130 3355 6A1F 1E5A 2CF9 76C9 07E9 52DA 3B1B 2328 272C 4667 73DE 220F 09F7 122B 2181 0A27 08FF 3072 218E 4555 4206 2E95 6CB0 5625 1397 212C 4A18 621B 67EF 3ACA 0F79 4A6B 73A2 7CC4 5825 63ED 719A 21FB 7D52 49E9 0468 6A51 0223 2969 5534 7037 24E5 72B7 2BCA 2764 1821 5BE5 171D 5A71 78FD 7BBF 651F 4A32 1ADF 1701 48D7 0E08 049D 3278 59F4 1451 4D82 2296 14C3 0D4E 1C07 5B47 7EE9 052E 26DD 03ED 32A8 7985 1758 7059 7FC6 5814 3713 5501 1087 5C81

0-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

4096 1571 7484 6319 2447 24441 27351 23613 29008 5643 28085 18200 21138 21937 25222 109 6028 22034 15069 4671 30434 11615 19838 14713 241 24083 7621 19144 1047 26152 22402 21255 30179 7408 115 1591 1006 32263 1332 12636 4099 386 29231 25711 10913 8132 20844 13150 18184 19066 29963 1000 23CF 5791 03C6 376D 71DE 4745 06B4 2E8B 51F5 6076 2E59 18F1 6CF8 6298 789D 779A 6705 013A 446E 55A7 08C5 46B9 2258 53C0 3C85 6835 2C23 2F31 5D19 4F39 29B4 4255 7CDC 6921 3700 5D22 6A3D 5995 760C 309B 4D8E 39FA 3A9E 02BE 537D 5D42 0D8C 7A5B 7252 40AA 1000 0623 1D3C 18AF 098F 5F79 6AD7 5C3D 7150 160B 6DB5 4718 5292 55B1 6286 006D 178C 5612 3ADD 123F 76E2 2D5F 4D7E 3979 00F1 5E13 1DC5 4AC8 0417 6628 5782 5307 75E3 1CF0 0073 0637 03EE 7E07 0534 315C 1003 0182 722F 646F 2AA1 1FC4 516C 335E 4708 4A7A 750B

17523 32292 4700 14406 14899 17025 14745 2783 5832 12407 31295 7581 18523 29920 25184 26282 30623 15540 23026 20019 4050 1557 30262 18000 20056 12143 17437 17438 5102 9302 17154 5198 4606 24804 17180 10507 10157 23850 31425 4075 10030 16984 14225 26519 27775 30100 7922 14199 17637 23081 5099

29673 16146 2350 7203 19657 28816 19740 21695 2916 18923 27855 24350 30205 14960 12592 13141 27167 7770 11513 30409 2025 21210 15131 9000 10028 18023 29662 8719 2551 4651 8577 2599 2303 12402 8590 17749 16902 11925 27824 22053 5015 8492 18968 25115 26607 15050 3961 19051 29602 31940 22565

4096 9167 22417 966 14189 29150 18245 1716 11915 20981 24694 11865 6385 27896 25240 30877 30618 26373 314 17518 21927 2245 18105 8792 21440 15493 26677 11299 12081 23833 20281 10676 16981 31964 26913 14080 23842 27197 22933 30220 12443 19854 14842 15006 702 21373 23874 3468 31323 29266 16554

. . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

B-3

PN Offset
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot PN I 14-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)
4670 14672 29415 20610 6479 10957 18426 22726 5247 29953 5796 16829 4528 5415 10294 17046 7846 10762 13814 16854 795 9774 24291 3172 2229 21283 16905 7062 7532 25575 14244 28053 30408 5094 16222 7159 174 25530 2320 23113 23985 2604 1826 30853 15699 2589 25000 18163 12555 8670 7FE7 1BCA 1E13 4B8B 6E34 7393 4D03 3A35 4EC0 56E9 67D6 1BF1 3B17 3BAA 5A6D 3FD4 69AC 34CF 297C 3E6A 6D3E 30BF 0600 0C7F 11C5 45E0 333D 1D52 6BEA 7985 743B 6857 4FAD 48B0 1CDF 5A80 5BAA 3E3C 64C6 6DE6 6D78 18BF 5404 66E2 4322 57BE 0F44 632E 6CF3 2594 123E 3950 72E7 5082 194F 2ACD 47FA 58C6 147F 7501 16A4 41BD 11B0 1527 2836 4296 1EA6 2A0A 35F6 41D6 031B 262E 5EE3 0C64 08B5 5323 4209 1B96 1D6C 63E7 37A4 6D95 76C8 13E6 3F5E 1BF7 00AE 63BA 0910 5A49 5DB1 0A2C 0722 7885 3D53 0A1D 61A8 46F3 310B 21DE

68P09255A57-O

13-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

2335 7336 30543 10305 17051 23386 9213 11363 17411 29884 2898 28386 2264 17583 5147 8523 3923 5381 6907 8427 20401 4887 24909 1586 19046 26541 28472 3531 3766 32719 7122 30966 15204 2547 8111 17351 87 12765 1160 25368 24804 1302 913 29310 20629 19250 12500 27973 22201 4335 6E23 0DE5 5ED9 7415 371A 6819 7751 4CCA 2760 7AA4 33EB 5C28 4C5B 1DD5 7CE6 1FEA 34D6 4BB7 14BE 1F35 369F 498F 0300 57EF 5932 22F0 484E 0EA9 35F5 6D12 6BCD 65FB 7606 2458 5FBF 2D40 2DD5 1F1E 3263 36F3 36BC 5D8F 2A02 3371 2191 2BDF 07A2 3197 67A9 12CA 091F 1CA8 774F 2841 429B 5B5A 23FD 2C63 4403 74BC 0B52 6EE2 08D8 44AF 141B 214B 0F53 1505 1AFB 20EB 4FB1 1317 614D 0632 4A66 67AD 6F38 0DCB 0EB6 7FCF 1BD2 78F6 3B64 09F3 1FAF 43C7 0057 31DD 0488 6318 60E4 0516 0391 727E 5095 4B32 30D4 6D45 56B9 10EF

0-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

6605 29417 22993 27657 5468 8821 20773 4920 5756 28088 740 23397 19492 26451 30666 15088 26131 15969 24101 12762 19997 22971 12560 31213 18780 16353 12055 30396 24388 1555 13316 31073 6187 21644 9289 4624 467 18133 1532 1457 9197 13451 25785 4087 31190 8383 12995 27438 9297 1676 582F 7AE0 1FD4 4A63 635E 2ABA 0907 1CE0 77FA 00B4 22F4 4030 2596 1D64 05A3 0712 1B1D 0CA6 1FCD 28A8 498A 58B1 0F27 536F 7885 469E 3E26 51FD 708A 7827 49D3 1E3B 1887 26F0 217B 102F 4CB5 2E5B 1CCE 28B7 2700 1D15 1025 5876 3C6A 0874 3FFC 3AA0 7C0B 7B94 19CD 72E9 59D1 6C09 155C 2275 5125 1338 167C 6DB8 02E4 5B65 4C24 6753 77CA 3AF0 6613 3E61 5E25 31DA 4E1D 59BB 3110 79ED 495C 3FE1 2F17 76BC 5F44 0613 3404 7961 182B 548C 2449 1210 01D3 46D5 05FC 05B1 23ED 348B 64B9 0FF7 79D6 20BF 32C3 6B2E 2451 068C

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

32743 7114 7699 19339 28212 29587 19715 14901 20160 22249 26582 7153 15127 15274 23149 16340 27052 13519 10620 15978 27966 12479 1536 3199 4549 17888 13117 7506 27626 31109 29755 26711 20397 18608 7391 23168 23466 15932 25798 28134 28024 6335 21508 26338 17186 22462 3908 25390 27891 9620

28195 3557 24281 29717 14106 26649 30545 19658 10080 31396 13291 23592 19547 7637 31974 8170 13526 19383 5310 7989 13983 18831 768 22511 22834 8944 18510 3753 13813 27922 27597 26107 30214 9304 24511 11584 11733 7966 12899 14067 14012 23951 10754 13169 8593 11231 1954 12695 26537 4810

22575 31456 8148 19043 25438 10938 2311 7392 30714 180 8948 16432 9622 7524 1443 1810 6941 3238 8141 10408 18826 22705 3879 21359 30853 18078 15910 20989 28810 30759 18899 7739 6279 9968 8571 4143 19637 11867 7374 10423 9984 7445 4133 22646 15466 2164 16380 15008 31755 31636

. . . continued on next page

B-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

PN Offset
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

Pilot PN
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150

14-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

1290 4407 1163 12215 7253 8978 25547 3130 31406 6222 20340 25094 23380 10926 22821 31634 4403 689 27045 27557 16307 22338 27550 22096 23136 12199 1213 936 6272 32446 13555 8789 24821 21068 31891 5321 551 12115 4902 1991 14404 17982 19566 2970 23055 15158 29094 653 19155 23588 195B 41EC 428A 7E95 6B19 20BE 15F8 0590 32EA 3D42 69DD 2149 7618 191D 69EC 108E 1408 39FE 32E0 2981 7BEC 35F3 6153 04BD 08F2 7B3F 2F38 1E2A 6AB0 5A5A 0252 64CC 7925 7F49 0C05 434F 7B42 223C 3C0F 3474 44FA 34A3 564F 60E5 10D3 5AFC 0561 6FEE 18CE 4182 050A 1137 048B 2FB7 1C55 2312 63CB 0C3A 7AAE 184E 4F74 6206 5B54 2AAE 5925 7B92 1133 02B1 69A5 6BA5 3FB3 5742 6B9E 5650 5A60 2FA7 04BD 03A8 1880 7EBE 34F3 2255 60F5 524C 7C93 14C9 0227 2F53 1326 07C7 3844 463E 4C6E 0B9A 5A0F 3B36 71A6 028D 4AD3 5C24

13-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

645 18087 19577 23015 16406 4489 32729 1565 15703 3111 10170 12547 11690 5463 25262 15817 18085 20324 31470 31726 20965 11169 13775 11048 11568 23023 19554 468 3136 16223 21573 24342 32326 10534 28789 17496 20271 22933 2451 19935 7202 8991 9783 1485 25403 7579 14547 20346 27477 11794 5D7D 20F6 2145 6E9A 645C 105F 0AFC 02C8 1975 1EA1 653E 4174 3B0C 5D5E 34F6 0847 0A04 1CFF 1970 4510 3DF6 4B29 6179 538E 0479 6C4F 179C 0F15 3558 2D2D 0129 3266 6D42 6E74 57D2 7077 3DA1 111E 4FD7 1A3A 227D 4B81 7AF7 61A2 59B9 2D7E 5360 37F7 0C67 20C1 0285 46A7 4C79 59E7 4016 1189 7FD9 061D 3D57 0C27 27BA 3103 2DAA 1557 62AE 3DC9 46A5 4F64 7AEE 7BEE 51E5 2BA1 35CF 2B28 2D30 59EF 4C62 01D4 0C40 3F5F 5445 5F16 7E46 2926 7075 4458 4F2F 5995 0993 4DDF 1C22 231F 2637 05CD 633B 1D9B 38D3 4F7A 6B55 2E12

0-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

12596 19975 20026 8958 19143 17142 19670 30191 5822 22076 606 9741 9116 12705 17502 18952 15502 17819 4370 31955 30569 7350 26356 32189 1601 19537 25667 4415 2303 16362 28620 6736 2777 24331 9042 107 4779 13065 30421 20210 5651 31017 30719 23104 7799 17865 26951 25073 32381 16581 6346 1BBE 5024 4C27 431E 2D34 63E2 18B2 1F49 6854 185D 7F08 7B8B 0DCC 5E1A 4F26 473E 07F1 63DE 6238 73EF 13C8 6BE7 32C8 7A8D 3328 671B 3C7F 723D 6869 3118 6059 22DB 4CB2 71D5 0049 6772 18FD 747A 1FD9 012E 6DE8 71C5 21B1 682F 1918 325D 4846 1E55 638B 3134 4E07 4E3A 22FE 4AC7 42F6 4CD6 75EF 16BE 563C 025E 260D 239C 31A1 445E 4A08 3C8E 459B 1112 7CD3 7769 1CB6 66F4 7DBD 0641 4C51 6443 113F 08FF 3FEA 6FCC 1A50 0AD9 5F0B 2352 006B 12AB 3309 76D5 4EF2 1613 7929 77FF 5A40 1E77 45C9 6947 61F1 7E7D 40C5

6491 16876 17034 32405 27417 8382 5624 1424 13034 15682 27101 8521 30232 6429 27116 4238 5128 14846 13024 10625 31724 13811 24915 1213 2290 31551 12088 7722 27312 23130 594 25804 31013 32585 3077 17231 31554 8764 15375 13428 17658 13475 22095 24805 4307 23292 1377 28654 6350 16770

23933 8438 8517 28314 25692 4191 2812 712 6517 7841 25918 16756 15116 23902 13558 2119 2564 7423 6512 17680 15862 19241 24953 21390 1145 27727 6044 3861 13656 11565 297 12902 27970 28276 22482 28791 15777 4382 20439 6714 8829 19329 31479 24994 22969 11646 21344 14327 3175 8385

25414 7102 20516 19495 17182 11572 25570 6322 8009 26708 6237 32520 31627 3532 24090 20262 18238 2033 25566 25144 29679 5064 27623 13000 31373 13096 26395 15487 29245 26729 12568 24665 8923 19634 29141 73 26482 6397 29818 8153 302 28136 29125 8625 26671 6424 12893 18502 7765 25483

. . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

B-5

PN Offset
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot PN I 14-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)
10878 31060 30875 11496 24545 9586 20984 30389 7298 18934 23137 24597 23301 7764 14518 21634 11546 26454 15938 9050 3103 758 16528 20375 10208 17698 8405 28634 1951 20344 26696 3355 11975 31942 9737 9638 30643 13230 22185 2055 8767 15852 16125 6074 31245 15880 20371 8666 816 22309 3986 6455 536C 2F75 7126 5972 06B1 753A 093D 6A2B 742C 1621 5C77 0690 6505 6470 4B2D 6907 78B1 2CE8 04FE 7B43 71F3 4FF8 16B8 763E 56AC 1826 7E4D 36DE 3E01 4D83 72B7 3428 59C1 7BCB 298D 636E 48B2 18E0 1ECF 1E32 5BB4 0379 5295 5028 54A5 3E5F 5487 7990 2A7E 7954 789B 2CE8 5FE1 2572 51F8 76B5 1C82 49F6 5A61 6015 5B05 1E54 38B6 5482 2D1A 6756 3E42 235A 0C1F 02F6 4090 4F97 27E0 4522 20D5 6FDA 079F 4F78 6848 0D1B 2EC7 7CC6 2609 25A6 77B3 33AE 56A9 0807 223F 3DEC 3EFD 17BA 7A0D 3E08 4F93 21DA 0330 5725

68P09255A57-O

13-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

5439 15530 29297 5748 25036 4793 10492 30054 3649 9467 25356 32310 25534 3882 7259 10817 5773 13227 7969 4525 18483 379 8264 27127 5104 8849 24150 14317 19955 10172 13348 18609 22879 15971 23864 4819 30181 6615 25960 19007 24355 7926 20802 3037 29498 7940 27125 4333 408 26030 1CC3 63FA 29B6 466A 3893 2CB9 5288 3A9D 554E 64C5 3A16 5AC0 7FEB 0348 6352 3238 7446 6553 6D88 1674 027F 6C71 6929 27FC 0B5C 3B1F 2B56 0C13 6EF6 1B6F 4ED0 7711 688B 1A14 7D30 6C35 4516 31B7 2459 0C70 5EB7 0F19 2DDA 506C 789A 2814 7B82 4EFF 7B93 3CC8 153F 3CAA 7271 1674 61CC 12B9 28FC 7566 0E41 24FB 630C 7E36 63BE 0F2A 1C5B 2A41 168D 33AB 1F21 11AD 4833 017B 2048 69F7 13F0 2291 5E56 37ED 4DF3 27BC 3424 48B1 595F 3E63 5D38 12D3 75E5 19D7 6568 4A3F 5F23 1EF6 5142 0BDD 733A 1F04 69F5 10ED 0198 65AE

0-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

32087 97 7618 93 16052 14300 11129 6602 14460 25458 15869 27047 26808 7354 27834 11250 552 27058 14808 9642 32253 26081 21184 11748 32676 2425 19455 19889 18177 2492 15086 30632 27549 6911 9937 2467 25831 32236 12987 11714 19283 11542 27928 26637 10035 10748 24429 29701 14997 32235 3C30 190E 1FE4 286B 72B9 2895 60CF 47E0 5677 1211 574A 09F1 1E6A 4EF1 672E 05C6 3B12 601B 02A5 3589 33D9 3A1F 19F3 5A62 70A6 2355 2A28 6442 2D1A 3CAF 3F06 20A8 3841 65BD 5E06 765C 3522 7FA7 3F8B 2367 4C1F 31EA 6AAD 30EF 03B9 3E56 17B4 5C19 7D9C 7FC5 7D57 0061 1DC2 005D 3EB4 37DC 2B79 19CA 387C 6372 3DFD 69A7 68B8 1CBA 6CBA 2BF2 0228 69B2 39D8 25AA 7DFD 65E1 52C0 2DE4 7FA4 0979 4BFF 4DB1 4701 09BC 3AEE 77A8 6B9D 1AFF 26D1 09A3 64E7 7DEC 32BB 2DC2 4B53 2D16 6D18 680D 2733 29FC 5F6D 7405 3A95 7DEB

151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200

14726 25685 21356 12149 28966 22898 1713 30010 2365 27179 29740 5665 23671 1680 25861 25712 19245 26887 30897 11496 1278 31555 29171 20472 5816 30270 22188 6182 32333 14046 15873 19843 29367 13352 22977 31691 10637 25454 18610 6368 7887 7730 23476 889 21141 20520 21669 15967 21639 31120

7363 25594 10678 18026 14483 11449 21128 15005 21838 25797 14870 23232 32747 840 25426 12856 29766 25939 28040 5748 639 27761 26921 10236 2908 15135 11094 3091 28406 7023 20176 30481 26763 6676 32048 27701 17686 12727 9305 3184 24247 3865 11738 20588 30874 10260 31618 20223 31635 15560

15408 6414 8164 10347 29369 10389 24783 18400 22135 4625 22346 2545 7786 20209 26414 1478 15122 24603 677 13705 13273 14879 6643 23138 28838 9045 10792 25666 11546 15535 16134 8360 14401 26045 24070 30300 13602 32679 16267 9063 19487 12778 27309 12527 953 15958 6068 23577 32156 32709

. . . continued on next page

B-6

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

PN Offset
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

Pilot PN
201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250

14-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

29563 13078 10460 17590 20277 19988 6781 32501 6024 20520 31951 26063 27203 6614 10970 5511 17119 16064 31614 4660 13881 16819 6371 24673 6055 10009 5957 11597 22155 15050 16450 27899 2016 17153 15849 30581 3600 4097 671 20774 24471 27341 19388 25278 9505 26143 13359 2154 13747 27646 0E72 3FC2 4415 54E2 4590 7574 31C1 6E51 4F93 3605 3436 6484 4D98 1443 5AB3 6E52 1863 01BD 5362 33C8 4828 6559 794B 0445 16C5 7B3A 7489 46E2 60ED 002F 0C82 5443 1D2D 62D1 1FEF 6F67 137F 1EE3 4540 384F 7900 6708 4A77 4AD8 0ED8 2073 3276 4CBA 6129 5637 737B 3316 28DC 44B6 4F35 4E14 1A7D 7EF5 1788 5028 7CCF 65CF 6A43 19D6 2ADA 1587 42DF 3EC0 7B7E 1234 3639 41B3 18E3 6061 17A7 2719 1745 2D4D 568B 3ACA 4042 6CFB 07E0 4301 3DE9 7775 0E10 1001 029F 5126 5F97 6ACD 4BBC 62BE 2521 661F 342F 086A 35B3 6BFE

13-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

30593 6539 5230 8795 27046 9994 17154 28998 3012 10260 28763 31963 31517 3307 5485 17663 28499 8032 15807 2330 21792 28389 16973 32268 17903 23984 17822 22682 25977 7525 8225 30785 1008 28604 20680 30086 1800 17980 20339 10387 25079 31578 9694 12639 23724 32051 21547 1077 21733 13823 0739 1FE1 73DA 2A71 22C8 3ABA 4930 66F8 7619 4AD2 1A1B 3242 26CC 5BF1 7C89 3729 5DE1 510E 29B1 19E4 2414 637C 6D75 53F2 5AB2 3D9D 6B94 2371 61A6 51C7 0641 7BF1 5F46 60B8 5E27 6663 586F 5EA1 22A0 4DF7 3C80 3384 74EB 256C 076C 41E9 193B 265D 6144 7ACB 7781 198B 146E 225B 69A6 270A 4302 7146 0BC4 2814 705B 7CDB 7B1D 0CEB 156D 44FF 6F53 1F60 3DBF 091A 5520 6EE5 424D 7E0C 45EF 5DB0 459E 589A 6579 1D65 2021 7841 03F0 6FBC 50C8 7586 0708 463C 4F73 2893 61F7 7B5A 25DE 315F 5CAC 7D33 542B 0435 54E5 35FF

0-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

30766 5985 6823 20973 10197 9618 22705 5234 12541 8019 22568 5221 25216 1354 29335 6682 26128 29390 8852 6110 11847 10239 6955 10897 14076 12450 8954 19709 1252 15142 26958 8759 12696 11936 25635 17231 22298 7330 30758 6933 2810 8820 7831 19584 2944 19854 10456 17036 2343 14820 5C05 44E6 0DD9 2453 18B3 4C86 1BA3 3A91 4DCC 1984 43A5 40B2 692B 23C3 4F13 7E87 4EDE 6BAC 5185 263F 02CA 1D4A 5AEE 20A6 24FC 5CB3 622D 09A6 445D 605F 2E9A 23C2 1CDC 0D70 6C12 5968 338A 6856 1C62 3B47 3E13 6844 39A5 7055 7A6E 4BEB 0985 505D 495D 4A04 782E 1761 1AA7 51ED 27D5 2592 58B1 1472 30FD 1F53 5828 1465 6280 054A 7297 1A1A 6610 72CE 2294 17DE 2E47 27FF 1B2B 2A91 36FC 30A2 22FA 4CFD 04E4 3B26 694E 2237 3198 2EA0 6423 434F 571A 1CA2 7826 1B15 0AFA 2274 1E97 4C80 0B80 4D8E 28D8 428C 0927 39E4

3698 16322 17429 21730 17808 30068 12737 28241 20371 13829 13366 25732 19864 5187 23219 28242 6243 445 21346 13256 18472 25945 31051 1093 5829 31546 29833 18146 24813 47 3202 21571 7469 25297 8175 28519 4991 7907 17728 14415 30976 26376 19063 19160 3800 8307 12918 19642 24873 22071

1849 8161 29658 10865 8904 15034 18736 26360 30233 19154 6683 12866 9932 23537 31881 14121 24033 20750 10673 6628 9236 25468 28021 21490 23218 15773 27540 9073 24998 20935 1601 31729 24390 24760 24103 26211 22639 24225 8864 19959 15488 13188 29931 9580 1900 16873 6459 9821 24900 31435

23557 17638 3545 9299 6323 19590 7075 14993 19916 6532 17317 16562 26923 9155 20243 32391 20190 27564 20869 9791 714 7498 23278 8358 9468 23731 25133 2470 17501 24671 11930 9154 7388 3440 27666 22888 13194 26710 7266 15175 15891 26692 14757 28757 31342 19435 2437 20573 18781 18948

. . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

B-7

PN Offset
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot PN I 14-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)
1056 1413 3311 4951 749 6307 961 2358 28350 31198 11467 8862 6327 7443 28574 25093 6139 22047 32545 7112 28535 10378 15065 5125 12528 23215 20959 3568 26453 29421 24555 10779 25260 16084 26028 29852 14978 12182 25143 15838 5336 21885 20561 30097 21877 23589 26060 9964 25959 3294 3650 6A3E 0E65 41B4 57CF 1AC2 3C4A 4B84 2146 396A 53E4 770B 5DB0 0778 686F 3D59 0F29 4FD2 418B 7AB5 41DC 2082 6F72 6936 4976 4EF8 241D 204F 48FC 201C 1AB5 258D 7B90 6B38 3081 78B5 2496 2FC1 53D2 1942 2327 685E 0C9E 6D39 6F31 1A87 43BA 2E38 2C8F 3CC1 0420 0585 0CEF 1357 02ED 18A3 03C1 0936 6EBE 79DE 2CCB 229E 18B7 1D13 6F9E 6205 17FB 561F 7F21 1BC8 6F77 288A 3AD9 1405 30F0 5AAF 51DF 0DF0 6755 72ED 5FEB 2A1B 62AC 3ED4 65AC 749C 3A82 2F96 6237 3DDE 14D8 557D 5051 7591 5575 5C25 65CC 26EC 6567 0CDE

68P09255A57-O

13-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

528 19710 18507 18327 20298 17005 20444 1179 14175 15599 22617 4431 16999 16565 14287 32574 17857 25907 29100 3556 31111 5189 21328 17470 6264 25451 26323 1784 32150 30538 25033 23345 12630 8042 13014 14926 7489 6091 32551 7919 2668 25730 26132 29940 25734 24622 13030 4982 31887 1647 1B28 351F 56E2 20DA 7A37 0D61 1E25 25C2 10A3 1CB5 29F2 6A55 2ED8 03BC 65E7 4F7C 5644 27E9 7115 6C8A 20EE 1041 37B9 349B 24BB 277C 43DE 41F7 247E 100E 5C8A 4316 3DC8 359C 4990 6D8A 124B 4630 29E9 0CA1 4043 342F 064F 674C 6648 5C93 21DD 171C 4797 4FB0 0210 4CFE 484B 4797 4F4A 426D 4FDC 049B 375F 3CEF 5859 114F 4267 40B5 37CF 7F3E 45C1 6533 71AC 0DE4 7987 1445 5350 443E 1878 636B 66D3 06F8 7D96 774A 61C9 5B31 3156 1F6A 32D6 3A4E 1D41 17CB 7F27 1EEF 0A6C 6482 6614 74F4 6486 602E 32E6 1376 7C8F 066F

0-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

1756 19068 28716 31958 16097 1308 3320 16682 6388 12828 3518 3494 6458 10717 8463 27337 19846 9388 21201 31422 166 28622 6477 10704 25843 25406 21523 8569 9590 22466 12455 27506 21847 28392 1969 30715 23674 22629 12857 30182 21880 6617 27707 16249 24754 31609 22689 3226 4167 25624 5B61 15F3 429C 532C 0B34 4C52 5EE6 596F 6C04 74D1 53A7 04BA 577C 67B8 60FD 21D7 03DF 55A6 5B0A 354E 0094 6104 5E8A 265C 328B 093C 39E4 07DB 34ED 6EB3 649F 2B6C 7AD8 6D20 0DFA 3053 31B1 2818 6300 33BE 0220 26BA 11F9 3F6A 5F9B 66CE 1850 3445 753D 56B3 06DC 4A7C 702C 7CD6 3EE1 051C 0CF8 412A 18F4 321C 0DBE 0DA6 193A 29DD 210F 6AC9 4D86 24AC 52D1 7ABE 00A6 6FCE 194D 29D0 64F3 633E 5413 2179 2576 57C2 30A7 6B72 5557 6EE8 07B1 77FB 5C7A 5865 3239 75E6 5578 19D9 6C3B 3F79 60B2 7B79 58A1 0C9A 1047 6418

251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300

13904 27198 3685 16820 22479 6850 15434 19332 8518 14698 21476 30475 23984 1912 26735 15705 3881 20434 16779 31413 16860 8322 28530 26934 18806 20216 9245 8271 18684 8220 6837 9613 31632 27448 12417 30901 9366 12225 21458 6466 8999 26718 3230 27961 28465 6791 17338 11832 11407 15553

6952 13599 22242 8410 31287 3425 7717 9666 4259 7349 10738 27221 11992 956 26087 20348 22084 10217 28949 27786 8430 4161 14265 13467 9403 10108 17374 16887 9342 4110 23690 17174 15816 13724 18832 28042 4683 17968 10729 3233 16451 13359 1615 26444 26184 23699 8669 5916 18327 20400

23393 5619 17052 21292 2868 19538 24294 22895 27652 29905 21415 1210 22396 26552 24829 8663 991 21926 23306 13646 148 24836 24202 9820 12939 2364 14820 2011 13549 28339 25759 11116 31448 27936 3578 12371 12721 10264 25344 13246 544 9914 4601 16234 24475 26318 6224 13381 30013 22195

. . . continued on next page

B-8

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

PN Offset
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

Pilot PN
301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350

14-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

30173 15515 5371 10242 28052 14714 19550 8866 15297 10898 31315 19475 1278 11431 31392 4381 14898 23959 16091 9037 24162 6383 27183 16872 9072 12966 28886 25118 20424 6729 20983 12372 13948 27547 8152 17354 17835 14378 7453 26317 5955 10346 13200 30402 7311 3082 21398 31104 24272 27123 440A 3A68 0034 6A76 3AD8 2ABE 0179 37DF 5F6B 6805 4E2B 3ED6 5F36 26F1 72B4 63D8 6E79 1C9F 7EC1 66DE 39A8 3B18 74D8 1094 2133 2492 27BF 78ED 31D3 4B96 0481 7278 1799 54A4 6D90 2770 5B5C 3CB6 5DCD 0A7C 4A4A 639D 1189 7923 7308 6375 2E46 767B 295C 7D9A 75DD 3C9B 14FB 2802 6D94 397A 4C5E 22A2 3BC1 2A92 7A53 4C13 04FE 2CA7 7AA0 111D 3A32 5D97 3EDB 234D 5E62 18EF 6A2F 41E8 2370 32A6 70D6 621E 4FC8 1A49 51F7 3054 367C 6B9B 1FD8 43CA 45AB 382A 1D1D 66CD 1743 286A 3390 76C2 1C8F 0C0A 5396 7980 5ED0 69F3

13-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

29906 20593 17473 5121 14026 7357 9775 4433 21468 5449 29461 26677 639 22639 15696 18098 7449 24823 20817 24474 12081 16971 31531 8436 4536 6483 14443 12559 10212 17176 26311 6186 6974 31729 4076 8677 27881 7189 16562 32090 17821 5173 6600 15201 16507 1541 10699 15552 12136 31429 2205 1D34 001A 353B 1D6C 155F 516C 4A3F 7E65 65D2 76C5 1F6B 2F9B 42A8 395A 31EC 66EC 5F9F 6EB0 336F 1CD4 1D8C 3A6C 084A 4149 1249 420F 6DA6 4939 25CB 5390 393C 5A1C 2A52 36C8 13B8 2DAE 1E5B 7F36 053E 2525 601E 5914 6D41 3984 606A 1723 6AED 14AE 3ECD 74D2 5071 4441 1401 36CA 1CBD 262F 1151 53DC 1549 7315 6835 027F 586F 3D50 46B2 1D19 60F7 5151 5F9A 2F31 424B 7B2B 20F4 11B8 1953 386B 310F 27E4 4318 66C7 182A 1B3E 7BF1 0FEC 21E5 6CE9 1C15 40B2 7D5A 459D 1435 19C8 3B61 407B 0605 29CB 3CC0 2F68 7AC5

0-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

10924 23096 22683 10955 17117 15837 22647 10700 30293 5579 11057 30238 14000 22860 27172 307 20380 26427 10702 30024 14018 4297 13938 25288 27294 31835 8228 12745 6746 1456 27743 27443 31045 12225 21482 14678 30656 13721 21831 30208 9995 3248 12030 5688 2082 23143 25906 15902 21084 25723 76AC 3BE9 29DC 3518 096C 3C5D 35F2 329C 774A 2A3E 49FB 4D37 5043 7418 7C57 66AF 2C2E 647C 53AF 1446 0102 369A 123E 5BC8 5DB2 0347 2C20 78C1 6AA1 286D 7EF8 47E5 0DC6 4AD9 5D17 5384 10BA 7E7E 0326 185E 28F8 4C33 6A98 0956 4A96 3624 2409 09C9 6C9E 0968 2AAC 5A38 589B 2ACB 42DD 3DDD 5877 29CC 7655 15CB 2B31 761E 36B0 594C 6A24 0133 4F9C 673B 29CE 7548 36C2 10C9 3672 62C8 6A9E 7C5B 2024 31C9 1A5A 05B0 6C5F 6B33 7945 2FC1 53EA 3956 77C0 3599 5547 7600 270B 0CB0 2EFE 1638 0822 5A67 6532 3E1E 525C 647B

17418 14952 52 27254 15064 10942 377 14303 24427 26629 20011 16086 24374 9969 29364 25560 28281 7327 32449 26334 14760 15128 29912 4244 8499 9362 10175 30957 12755 19350 1153 29304 6041 21668 28048 10096 23388 15542 24013 2684 19018 25501 4489 31011 29448 25461 11846 30331 10588 32154

8709 7476 26 13627 7532 5471 20844 19007 32357 26066 30405 8043 12187 17064 14682 12780 26348 24479 28336 13167 7380 7564 14956 2122 16713 4681 16911 28070 18745 9675 21392 14652 23068 10834 14024 5048 11694 7771 32566 1342 9509 24606 22804 27969 14724 24682 5923 27373 5294 16077

30380 15337 10716 13592 2412 15453 13810 12956 30538 10814 18939 19767 20547 29720 31831 26287 11310 25724 21423 5190 258 13978 4670 23496 23986 839 11296 30913 27297 10349 32504 18405 3526 19161 23831 21380 4282 32382 806 6238 10488 19507 27288 2390 19094 13860 9225 2505 27806 2408

. . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

B-9

PN Offset
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot PN I 14-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)
5578 25731 10662 11084 31098 16408 6362 2719 14732 22744 1476 8445 21118 22198 22030 10363 25802 2496 31288 24248 14327 23154 13394 1806 17179 10856 25755 15674 7083 29096 3038 16277 25525 20465 28855 32732 20373 9469 26155 6957 12214 21479 31914 32311 11276 20626 423 2679 15537 10818 7384 3375 29EF 00E0 2F33 5926 0B76 6C2C 27DD 1B63 5652 0A50 1138 0066 6BF0 4CBE 6957 7D08 1EC1 028F 62BA 3F52 2D6F 2157 4B5D 2F4E 5422 2953 32E8 397D 2D92 64D1 1390 7EA2 569F 2DDE 5812 53A5 0085 1333 2220 0575 4668 3CAC 68F6 1710 5F15 32F1 5BB6 0746 15CA 6483 29A6 2B4C 797A 4018 18DA 0A9F 398C 58D8 05C4 20FD 527E 56B6 560E 287B 64CA 09C0 7A38 5EB8 37F7 5A72 3452 070E 431B 2A68 649B 3D3A 1BAB 71A8 0BDE 3F95 63B5 4FF1 70B7 7FDC 4F95 24FD 662B 1B2D 2FB6 53E7 7CAA 7E37 2C0C 5092 01A7 0A77 3CB1 2A42

68P09255A57-O

13-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

2789 31869 5331 5542 15549 8204 3181 19315 7366 11372 738 24130 10559 11099 11015 23041 12901 1248 15644 12124 21959 11577 6697 903 28593 5428 31857 7837 17385 14548 1519 20982 32742 27076 30311 16366 27126 23618 32041 17322 6107 26575 15957 28967 5638 10313 20207 19207 20580 5409 39C2 486A 4527 0070 4649 2C93 05BB 3616 423E 5C61 2B29 0528 089C 0033 35F8 265F 657B 3E84 5EB0 5097 315D 1FA9 4767 417B 747E 17A7 2A11 4579 1974 4D6E 16C9 63B8 09C8 3F51 7A9F 16EF 2C09 7802 5192 5849 1110 536A 2334 1E56 347B 0B88 7E5A 48A8 2DDB 03A3 0AE5 7C7D 14D3 15A6 3CBD 200C 0C6D 4B73 1CC6 2C6C 02E2 5E42 293F 2B5B 2B07 5A01 3265 04E0 3D1C 2F5C 55C7 2D39 1A29 0387 6FB1 1534 7C71 1E9D 43E9 38D4 05EF 51F6 7FE6 69C4 7667 3FEE 69F6 5C42 7D29 43AA 17DB 67CF 3E55 7127 1606 2849 4EEF 4B07 5064 1521

0-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

13427 31084 24023 23931 15836 6085 30324 27561 13821 269 28663 29619 2043 6962 29119 22947 9612 18698 16782 29735 2136 8086 10553 11900 19996 5641 28328 25617 26986 5597 14078 13247 499 30469 17544 28510 23196 13384 4239 20725 6466 28465 19981 16723 4522 678 15320 29116 5388 22845 3423 1ECD 1A0D 1FFB 46E1 371D 3797 6BD6 030F 189D 13CB 3C17 0570 1DD9 6464 62AB 4D65 51C5 027E 3FBE 1ADE 0530 3998 5910 653F 12BB 48FB 7F92 0632 6A48 446D 0257 3F7D 21ED 7514 5670 4D9F 4BCD 4634 2197 279E 68D2 5C9E 6A90 19AA 1CE8 6706 56CA 73D6 32F3 3473 796C 5DD7 5D7B 3DDC 17C5 7674 6BA9 35FD 010D 6FF7 73B3 07FB 1B32 71BF 59A3 258C 490A 418E 7427 0858 1F96 2939 2E7C 4E1C 1609 6EA8 6411 696A 15DD 36FE 33BF 01F3 7705 4488 6F5E 5A9C 3448 108F 50F5 1942 6F31 4E0D 4153 11AA 02A6 3BD8 71BC 150C 593D

351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400

29572 13173 10735 224 12083 22822 2934 27692 10205 7011 22098 2640 4408 102 27632 19646 26967 32008 7873 655 25274 16210 11631 8535 19293 12110 21538 10579 13032 14717 11666 25809 5008 32418 22175 11742 22546 21413 133 4915 8736 1397 18024 15532 26870 5904 24341 13041 23478 1862

14786 18538 17703 112 17993 11411 1467 13846 16958 23649 11049 1320 2204 51 13816 9823 25979 16004 24240 20631 12637 8105 18279 16763 29822 6055 10769 17785 6516 19822 5833 25528 2504 16209 31391 5871 11273 30722 20882 22601 4368 21354 9012 7766 13435 2952 32346 18600 11739 931

13347 7885 6669 8187 18145 14109 14231 27606 783 6301 5067 15383 1392 7641 25700 25259 19813 20933 638 16318 6878 1328 14744 22800 25919 4795 18683 32658 1586 27208 17517 599 16253 8685 29972 22128 19871 19405 17972 8599 10142 26834 23710 27280 6570 7400 26374 22218 29654 13043

. . . continued on next page

B-10

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

PN Offset
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

Pilot PN
401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450

14-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

23074 20250 14629 29175 13943 11072 29492 5719 7347 12156 25623 27725 28870 31478 28530 24834 9075 32265 3175 17434 12178 25613 31692 25384 18908 25816 4661 31115 7691 1311 16471 15771 16112 21062 29690 10141 19014 22141 11852 26404 30663 32524 28644 10228 23536 18045 25441 27066 13740 13815 16DA 15B0 312D 59E0 6BF4 44C0 4268 5599 7670 6E50 1C5C 45F2 16FA 5640 2F97 5A2A 441B 485F 7C9E 495F 4E3B 1F2E 506B 2714 3493 3447 7102 12FC 3334 5E61 4E63 0A6B 343C 7047 5FA9 00F9 4DF8 73F2 797D 6A0C 6852 141C 1078 1682 00F5 557A 0EB3 00CE 707E 7E92 5A22 4F1A 3925 71F7 3677 2B40 7334 1657 1CB3 2F7C 6417 6C4D 70C6 7AF6 6F72 6102 2373 7E09 0C67 441A 2F92 640D 7BCC 6328 49DC 64D8 1235 798B 1E0B 051F 4057 3D9B 3EF0 5246 73FA 279D 4A46 567D 2E4C 6724 77C7 7F0C 6FE4 27F4 5BF0 467D 6361 69BA 35AC 35F7

13-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

11537 10125 21166 30407 21767 5536 14746 17687 16485 6078 31799 30746 14435 15739 14265 12417 24453 28984 18447 8717 6089 31802 15846 12692 9454 12908 18214 29433 16697 19635 28183 20721 8056 10531 14845 24050 9507 25858 5926 13202 30175 16262 14322 5114 11768 27906 32652 13533 6870 21703 0B6D 0AD8 4946 2CF0 35FA 2260 2134 7B1C 3B38 3728 0E2E 22F9 0B7D 2B20 461B 2D15 73DD 75FF 3E4F 757F 76CD 0F97 79E5 138A 4B99 4BF3 3881 097E 199A 7EE0 76E1 54E5 1A1E 69F3 7E04 51AC 26FC 39F9 6D6E 3506 3429 0A0E 083C 0B41 51AA 2ABD 5689 0067 383F 3F49 2D11 278D 52AE 76C7 5507 15A0 399A 4517 4065 17BE 7C37 781A 3863 3D7B 37B9 3081 5F85 7138 480F 220D 17C9 7C3A 3DE6 3194 24EE 326C 4726 72F9 4139 4CB3 6E17 50F1 1F78 2923 39FD 5DF2 2523 6502 1726 3392 75DF 3F86 37F2 13FA 2DF8 6D02 7F8C 34DD 1AD6 54C7

0-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

28430 8660 2659 8803 19690 22169 8511 17393 11336 13576 22820 13344 20107 8013 18835 16793 9818 4673 13609 10054 10988 14744 17930 25452 11334 15451 11362 2993 11012 5806 20180 8932 23878 20760 32764 32325 25993 3268 25180 12149 10193 9128 7843 25474 11356 11226 16268 14491 8366 26009 5F89 4309 5342 7038 5692 6693 56A4 08DA 2833 67FC 4CC2 379C 2CDA 62C9 2EEB 3644 43B8 2A07 68C0 7959 2182 5DD7 3F47 5726 76C2 40E5 331C 0D6D 06A7 5883 6910 06C7 3F32 4ADE 0299 4F03 5F7F 4183 6A49 17A2 71A0 1DB1 1329 171B 1819 5337 6DC0 22C9 6975 3AC7 6F0E 21D4 0A63 2263 4CEA 5699 213F 43F1 2C48 3508 5924 3420 4E8B 1F4D 4993 4199 265A 1241 3529 2746 2AEC 3998 460A 636C 2C46 3C5B 2C62 0BB1 2B04 16AE 4ED4 22E4 5D46 5118 7FFC 7E45 6589 0CC4 625C 2F75 27D1 23A8 1EA3 6382 2C5C 2BDA 3F8C 389B 20AE 6599

5850 5552 12589 23008 27636 17600 17000 21913 30320 28240 7260 17906 5882 22080 12183 23082 17435 18527 31902 18783 20027 7982 20587 10004 13459 13383 28930 4860 13108 24161 20067 2667 13372 28743 24489 249 19960 29682 31101 27148 26706 5148 4216 5762 245 21882 3763 206 28798 32402

2925 2776 18758 11504 13818 8800 8500 31516 15160 14120 3630 8953 2941 11040 17947 11541 29661 30207 15951 30079 30413 3991 31205 5002 19353 19443 14465 2430 6554 32480 30433 21733 6686 27123 32260 20908 9980 14841 28014 13574 13353 2574 2108 2881 20906 10941 22153 103 14399 16201

24457 17161 21314 28728 22162 26259 22180 2266 10291 26620 19650 14236 11482 25289 12011 13892 17336 10759 26816 31065 8578 24023 16199 22310 30402 16613 13084 3437 1703 22659 26896 1735 16178 19166 665 20227 24447 16771 27209 6050 29088 7601 4905 5915 6169 21303 28096 8905 26997 15047

. . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

B-11

PN Offset
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
Pilot PN I 14-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)
3684 23715 15314 32469 9816 4444 5664 7358 27264 28128 30168 29971 3409 16910 20739 10191 12819 19295 10072 15191 27748 720 29799 27640 263 24734 16615 20378 25116 19669 14656 27151 28728 25092 22601 2471 25309 15358 17739 12643 32730 19122 16870 10787 18400 20295 1937 17963 7438 12938 3497 3C39 5A3D 3A6D 5B85 32BE 3085 70CB 0FA9 0750 3B63 759D 5DC1 12FE 370B 1A2E 0BFB 6FE3 5383 4F34 62F9 4CE3 27A3 4197 43CF 33C0 58D4 3327 2869 7686 6CDA 2557 2268 31C8 2D62 6A1A 45EB 7431 7C94 5D9C 5C0A 0B94 4720 3AB4 558D 5FF6 4A32 3528 6B64 2DBA 0E64 5CA3 3BD2 7ED5 2658 115C 1620 1CBE 6A80 6DE0 75D8 7513 0D51 420E 5103 27CF 3213 4B5F 2758 3B57 6C64 02D0 7467 6BF8 0107 609E 40E7 4F9A 621C 4CD5 3940 6A0F 7038 6204 5849 09A7 62DD 3BFE 454B 3163 7FDA 4AB2 41E6 2A23 47E0 4F47 0791 462B 1D0E 328A

68P09255A57-O

13-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

1842 24685 7657 29014 4908 2222 2832 3679 13632 14064 15084 29877 18580 8455 26301 24027 22325 27539 5036 21399 13874 360 29711 13820 20159 12367 28239 10189 12558 26710 7328 31547 14364 12546 25112 19183 32594 7679 27801 22157 16365 9561 8435 23341 9200 27039 19956 27945 3719 6469 4B9B 4FCC 7CCE 4CE6 7C12 195F 4992 69B5 5604 03A8 4C61 6B1E 7F30 097F 4A55 0D17 542D 6621 7811 279A 60AC 77A1 4201 711B 7037 19E0 2C6A 4843 45E4 3B43 366D 437B 1134 18E4 16B1 350D 7325 6BC8 3E4A 2ECE 2E05 05CA 2390 1D5A 7B16 2FFB 2519 1A94 35B2 16DD 0732 606D 1DE9 7156 132C 08AE 0B10 0E5F 3540 36F0 3AEC 74B5 4894 2107 66BD 5DDB 5735 6B93 13AC 5397 3632 0168 740F 35FC 4EBF 304F 6E4F 27CD 310E 6856 1CA0 7B3B 381C 3102 6218 4AEF 7F52 1DFF 6C99 568D 3FED 2559 20F3 5B2D 23F0 699F 4DF4 6D29 0E87 1945

0-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

5164 17126 21566 21845 28149 9400 19459 7190 3101 491 25497 29807 26508 4442 4871 31141 9864 12589 5417 8549 14288 8503 20357 15381 18065 24678 23858 7610 18097 20918 7238 30549 16320 20853 26736 10327 24404 7931 5310 554 27311 6865 7762 15761 12697 24850 15259 24243 30508 13982 4434 44DD 28DD 5472 2CEA 00C1 3F0C 346B 2A70 7107 494D 6BFC 543C 1416 04BB 04B3 144F 4231 1313 61D0 1BCF 45A2 1343 6469 29E6 43D3 0ABA 2AC8 4B71 743C 37D9 532A 0775 2322 33EF 5456 6764 3544 1457 7335 4A30 3117 2F2B 6822 5255 3CEB 1339 36E3 1744 52D2 142C 42E6 543E 5555 6DF5 24B8 4C03 1C16 0C1D 01EB 6399 746F 678C 115A 1307 79A5 2688 312D 1529 2165 37D0 2137 4F85 3C15 4691 6066 5D32 1DBA 46B1 51B6 1C46 7755 3FC0 5175 6870 2857 5F54 1EFB 14BE 022A 6AAF 1AD1 1E52 3D91 3199 6112 3B9B 5EB3 772C 369E

451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500

13463 15417 23101 14957 23429 12990 12421 28875 4009 1872 15203 30109 24001 4862 14091 6702 3067 28643 21379 20276 25337 19683 10147 16791 17359 13248 22740 13095 10345 30342 27866 9559 8808 12744 11618 27162 17899 29745 31892 23964 23562 2964 18208 15028 21901 24566 18994 13608 27492 11706

19355 20428 31950 19686 31762 6495 18834 27061 22020 936 19553 27422 32560 2431 19029 3351 21549 26145 30737 10138 24748 30625 16897 28955 28727 6624 11370 18499 17892 15171 13933 17275 4404 6372 5809 13581 29477 27592 15946 11982 11781 1482 9104 7514 31510 12283 9497 6804 13746 5853

17460 17629 10461 21618 11498 193 16140 13419 10864 28935 18765 27644 21564 5142 1211 1203 5199 16945 4883 25040 7119 17826 4931 25705 10726 17363 2746 10952 19313 29756 14297 21290 1909 8994 13295 21590 26468 13636 5207 29493 18992 12567 12075 26658 21077 15595 4921 14051 5956 21202

. . . continued on next page

B-12

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

PN Offset
Table B-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn

Pilot PN
501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511

14-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

19272 29989 8526 18139 3247 28919 7292 20740 27994 2224 6827 37DD 5B54 2C4A 0BB3 5B5E 3889 1982 4FE4 2FC2 0422 2EFA 4B48 7525 214E 46DB 0CAF 70F7 1C7C 5104 6D5A 08B0 1AAB

13-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

9636 29870 4263 27985 18539 30279 3646 10370 13997 1112 17257 4A3E 2DAA 1625 5409 2DAF 4D94 0CC1 27F2 17E1 0211 177D 25A4 74AE 10A7 6D51 486B 7647 0E3E 2882 36AD 0458 4369

0-Chip Delay Q I Q (Dec.) (Hex.)

25039 24086 21581 21346 28187 23231 18743 11594 7198 105 4534 2BE7 7556 760E 34A4 09C1 7C62 5F16 6501 6C0E 6012 4196 61CF 5E16 544D 5362 6E1B 5ABF 4937 2D4A 1C1E 0069 11B6

14301 23380 11338 2995 23390 14473 6530 20452 12226 1058 12026

19006 11690 5669 21513 11695 19860 3265 10226 6113 529 6013

11239 30038 30222 13476 2497 31842 24342 25857 27662 24594 16790

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

B-13

PN Offset
Notes

68P09255A57-O

B-14

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

Appendix C

ATP Matrix Table

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

C-1

Re-optimization

68P09255A57-O

Re-optimization
Usage & Background
Periodic maintenance of a site may also mandate re-optimization of specific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines is included in the following tables.
NOTE

Re-optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed in the tables below must be performed anytime an RF cable associated with it is replaced.

Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix

Table C-1 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to be performed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. It is also assumes that all modules are placed OOS-ROM via the LMF until full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented. The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.
NOTE

Not every procedure required to bring the site back in service is indicated in Table C-1. It is meant to be used as a guideline ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiar enough with the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure to understand which test equipment set ups, calibrations, and BTS site preparation will be required before performing the Table # procedures referenced. Various passive BTS components (such as the DRDCs, filter; etc.) only require a TX calibration audit to be performed in lieu of a full path calibration. If the TX path calibration audit fails, the entire RF path calibration will need to be repeated. If the RF path calibration fails, further troubleshooting is warranted. Whenever any C-CCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed that only power to the C-CCP shelf being replaced is turned off via the breaker supplying that shelf.

NOTE

If any significant change in signal level results from any component being replaced in the RX or TX signal flow paths, it would be identified by re-running the RX and TX calibration audit command. When the CIO is replaced, the C-CCP shelf remains powered up. The BBX boards may need to be removed, then re-installed into their original slots, and re-downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TX calibration audits should then be performed.

C-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Re-optimization
Table C-1: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix
SCCP Shelf Assembly (Backplane) RGD/20-pair Punchblock w/RGD LPA Bandpass Filter or Combiner

50-pair Punchblock w/RGPS

ETIB or Associated Cables

MCC24E/MCC8E/MCC-1X

DRDC or TRDC

BBX2/BBX-1X

LPA or LPA Trunking Module

Swithch Card

MPC / EMPC

CSM/GPS

HSO/HSOX

RX Cables

TX Cables

Description

CCD Card

RFDS

CIO

LFR

GLI3

Doc Tbl #
Table 3-14/ Table 3-15/ Table 3-17 Table 3-20 Table 3-21 Table 3-35 Table 3-36 Table 3-37 Table 3-46 [ Table 4-1 Table 4-1 Table 4-1 Table 4-1 Table 4-1 Table 3-49/ Table 3-58

RFDS cables

LPAC Cable

Download Code/Data Enable CSMs GPS &HSO Initialization / Verification LFR Initialization / Verification TX Path Calibration Download Offsets to BBX TX Path Audit RFDS Path Calibration and Offset Data Download (see Note [)
4 4 4 6 5 4 4 1 1 4 1

S S S S
1

S S S
D D

S 9 9

S S S
4 1 4

S S S S
* * * *

1 1

4 6

3 3

4 4

7 6 6

RFDS Path Calibration should be performed at initial BTS installation AND after replacement of the RFDS FRU. RFDS Path Calibration is NOT required for other FRU replacement but may be used as an additional fault isolation tool. Spectral Purity TX Mask Waveform Quality (rho) Pilot Time Offset Code Domain Power / Noise Floor FER Test Alarm Tests
4 4 4 4 5 5 5 2 2 * * 1 1 1 4 4 4 1 5 4 8 * * 8 8 8 8 8 * * 8 8 * * * * * 1 * * * * * * * * 7 *

S
. . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

C-3

Re-optimization
Table C-1: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix
SCCP Shelf Assembly (Backplane) RGD/20-pair Punchblock w/RGD

68P09255A57-O

ETIB or Associated Cables

MCC24E/MCC8E/MCC-1X

DRDC or TRDC

LPA Bandpass Filter or Combiner

50-pair Punchblock w/RGPS

BBX2/BBX-1X

LPA or LPA Trunking Module

Swithch Card

MPC / EMPC

CSM/GPS

HSO/HSOX

RX Cables

TX Cables

Description

CCD Card

OPTIMIZATION AND TEST LEGEND:

D Required * Perform if determined necessary for addtional fault isolation, repair assurance, or required for site certification. ** Replace power supply modules one at a time so that power to the C-CCP shelf is not interrupted. If power to the shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again. 1. Perform on all carrier and sector TX paths to the C-CCP cage. 2. Perform on all carrier and sector RX paths to the C-CCP cage. 3. Perform on all primary and redundant TX paths of the affected carrier. 4. Perform on the affected carrier and sector TX path(s) (BBXR replacement affects all carrier and sector TX paths) 5. Perform on the affected carrier and sector RX path(s) (BBXR replacement affects all carrier RX paths) 6. Perform on all RF paths of the affected carrier and sector (RFDS replacement affects all carriers) 7. Perform with redundant BBX for at least one sector on one carrier. 8. Verify performance by performing on one sector of one carrier only.
9 10 Perform only if RGD/RGPS, LFR antenna, or HSO or LFR expansion was installed Verify performance by performing testing on one sector of each carrier.

C-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

RFDS

CIO

LFR

GLI3

Doc Tbl #

RFDS cables

LPAC Cable

Appendix D
D

BBX Gain

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

D-1

BBX Gain Set Point

68P09255A57-O

BBX Gain Set Point

Usage & Background
Table D-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domain channel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and the BBX Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant RF output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in the table. The table assumes that the BBX Bay Level Offset (BLO) values have been calculated. As an illustration, consider a BBX keyed up to produce a CDMA carrier with only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled). Pilot gain is set to 262. In this case, the BBX Gain Set Point is shown to correlate exactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44 dBm output range. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).

D
dBm' Gainb

Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) 44 43 42 41 40 43.6 43.4 39 43.6 43.4 43.3 43.1 43 42.8 42.6 42.4 38 43.5 43.4 43.2 43.1 42.9 42.8 42.6 42.4 42.3 42.1 42 41.8 41.6 41.4 37 43.3 43.2 43 42.9 42.8 42.6 42.5 42.4 42.2 42.1 41.9 41.8 41.6 41.4 41.3 41.1 41 40.8 40.6 40.4 36 42.3 42.2 42 41.9 41.8 41.6 41.5 41.4 41.2 41.1 40.9 40.8 40.6 40.4 40.3 40.1 40 39.8 39.6 39.4 35 41.3 41.2 41 40.9 40.8 40.6 40.5 40.4 40.2 40.1 39.9 39.8 39.6 39.4 39.3 39.1 39 38.8 38.6 38.4 34 40.3 40.2 40 39.9 39.8 39.6 39.5 39.4 39.2 39.1 38.9 38.8 38.6 38.4 38.3 38.1 38 37.8 37.6 37.4 33 39.3 39.2 39 38.9 38.8 38.6 38.5 38.4 38.2 38.1 37.9 37.8 37.6 37.4 37.3 37.1 37 36.8 36.6 36.4

541 533 525 517 509 501 493 485 477 469 461 453 445 437 429 421 413 405 397 389

. . . continued on next page

D-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

BBX Gain Set Point

Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)

dBm' Gainb

44 43.4 43.2 42.9 42.6 42.2

43 43.5 43.3 43 42.7 42.4 42.2 41.9 41.6 41.2

42 43.5 43.2 43 42.8 42.5 42.3 42 41.7 41.4 41.2 40.9 40.6 40.2

41 43.5 43.3 43.1 42.9 42.7 42.5 42.2 42 41.8 41.5 41.3 41 40.7 40.4 40.2 39.9 39.6 39.2

40 43.3 43.1 42.9 42.7 42.5 42.3 42.1 41.9 41.7 41.5 41.2 41 40.8 40.5 40.3 40 39.7 39.4 39.2 38.9 38.6 38.2

39 42.3 42.1 41.9 41.7 41.5 41.3 41.1 40.9 40.7 40.5 40.2 40 39.8 39.5 39.3 39 38.7 38.4 38.2 37.9 37.6 37.2

38 41.3 41.1 40.9 40.7 40.5 40.3 40.1 39.9 39.7 39.5 39.2 39 38.8 38.5 38.3 38 37.7 37.4 37.2 36.9 36.6 36.2

37 40.3 40.1 39.9 39.7 39.5 39.3 39.1 38.9 38.7 38.5 38.2 38 37.8 37.5 37.3 37 36.7 36.4 36.2 35.9 35.6 35.2

36 39.3 39.1 38.9 38.7 38.5 38.3 38.1 37.9 37.7 37.5 37.2 37 36.8 36.5 36.3 36 35.7 35.4 35.2 34.9 34.6 34.2

35 38.3 38.1 37.9 37.7 37.5 37.3 37.1 36.9 36.7 36.5 36.2 36 35.8 35.5 35.3 35 34.7 34.4 34.2 33.9 33.6 33.2

34 37.3 37.1 36.9 36.7 36.5 36.3 36.1 35.9 35.7 35.5 35.2 35 34.8 34.5 34.3 34 33.7 33.4 33.2 32.9 32.6 32.2

33 36.3 36.1 35.9 35.7 35.5 35.3 35.1 34.9 34.7 34.5 34.2 34 33.8 33.5 33.3 33 32.7 32.4 32.2 31.9 31.6 31.2

381 374 366 358 350 342 334 326 318 310 302 294 286 278 270 262 254 246 238 230 222 214

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

D-3

BBX Gain Set Point

Notes

68P09255A57-O

D-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

Appendix E

CDMA Operating Frequency

E

Programming

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

E-1

Channel Frequencies

68P09255A57-O

Channel Frequencies
Introduction
Programming of each of the BTS BBX synthesizers is performed by the BTS GLIs via the CHI bus. This programming data determines the transmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) for each BBX2.

1900 MHz PCS Channels

Figure E-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS 1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or non-wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per customer operating system). Figure E-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)
CHANNEL 25 1851.25 1931.25

425

925

1175

E-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

675

D B E F C

275

1863.75

1943.75

1871.25

1951.25

1883.75

1963.75

1896.25

1976.25

1908.75

1988.75

FW00463

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Channel Frequencies

Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies

Table E-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operating channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows: S TX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel# Example: Channel 262 TX = 1930 + 0.05*262 = 1943.10 MHz S RX = TX - 80 Example: Channel 262 RX = 1943.10 - 50 = 1863.10 MHz Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequency plan. Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band on both sides of the carrier. Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier and the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center). Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number Decimal Hex 25 0019 50 0032 75 004B 100 0064 125 007D 150 0096 175 00AF 200 00C8 225 00E1 250 00FA 275 0113 300 012C 325 0145 350 015E 375 0177 400 0190 425 01A9 450 01C2 475 01DB 500 01F4 525 020D 550 0226 575 023F 600 0258 625 0271 650 028A Transmit Frequency (MHz) Center Frequency 1931.25 1932.50 1933.75 1935.00 1936.25 1937.50 1938.75 1940.00 1941.25 1942.50 1943.75 1945.00 1946.25 1947.50 1948.75 1950.00 1951.25 1952.50 1953.75 1955.00 1956.25 1957.50 1958.75 1960.00 1961.25 1962.50 Receive Frequency (MHz) Center Frequency 1851.25 1852.50 1853.75 1855.00 1856.25 1857.50 1858.75 1860.00 1861.25 1862.50 1863.75 1865.00 1866.25 1867.50 1868.75 1870.00 1871.25 1872.50 1873.75 1875.00 1876.25 1877.50 1878.75 1880.00 1881.25 1882.50

. . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

E-3

Channel Frequencies
Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number Decimal Hex 675 02A3 700 02BC 725 02D5 750 02EE 775 0307 800 0320 825 0339 850 0352 875 036B 900 0384 925 039D 950 03B6 975 03CF 1000 03E8 1025 0401 1050 041A 1075 0433 1100 044C 1125 0465 1150 047E 1175 0497 Transmit Frequency (MHz) Center Frequency 1963.75 1965.00 1966.25 1967.50 1968.75 1970.00 1971.25 1972.50 1973.75 1975.00 1976.25 1977.50 1978.75 1980.00 1981.25 1982.50 1983.75 1985.00 1986.25 1987.50 1988.75

68P09255A57-O

Receive Frequency (MHz) Center Frequency 1883.75 1885.00 1886.25 1887.50 1888.75 1890.00 1891.25 1892.50 1893.75 1895.00 1896.25 1897.50 1898.75 1900.00 1901.25 1902.50 1903.75 1905.00 1906.25 1807.50 1908.75

800 MHz CDMA Channels

Figure E-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellular telephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or non-wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per customer operating system). Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation).
869.040 870.000 870.030 879.990 880.020 889.980 890.010 891.480 891.510 TX FREQ (MHz) 893.970 739 777 799 FW00402

824.040

825.000 825.030

834.990 835.020

844.980 845.010

846.480 846.510

RX FREQ (MHz)

991

311

333 334

356

644

666 667

689

694

1013

1023 1

CHANNEL

OVERALL NON-WIRELINE (A) BANDS

CDMA NON-WIRELINE (A) BAND

OVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS

CDMA WIRELINE (B) BAND

716 717

E-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

848.970

68P09255A57-O

Channel Frequencies

Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies

Table E-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operating channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows: S Channels 1-777 TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel# Example: Channel 262 TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHz S Channels 1013-1023 TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# - 1023) Example: Channel 1015 TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 - 1023) = 869.76 MHz S RX = TX - 45 MHz Example: Channel 262 RX = 877.86 -45 = 832.86 MHz Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel Channel Number Decimal Hex 1 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 0001 0019 0032 004B 0064 007D 0096 00AF 00C8 00E1 00FA 0113 012C 0145 015E 0177 0190 01A9 01C2 01DB 01F4 020D 0226 Transmit Frequency (MHz) Center Frequency 870.0300 870.7500 871.5000 872.2500 873.0000 873.7500 874.5000 875.2500 876.0000 876.7500 877.5000 878.2500 879.0000 879.7500 880.5000 881.2500 882.0000 882.7500 883.5000 884.2500 885.0000 885.7500 886.5000 Receive Frequency (MHz) Center Frequency 825.0300 825.7500 826.5000 827.2500 828.0000 828.7500 829.5000 830.2500 831.0000 831.7500 832.5000 833.2500 834.0000 834.7500 835.5000 836.2500 837.0000 837.7500 838.5000 839.2500 840.0000 840.7500 841.5000 . . . continued on next page
E-5

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Channel Frequencies
Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel Channel Number Decimal Hex 575 600 625 650 675 700 725 750 775 023F 0258 0271 028A 02A3 02BC 02D5 02EE 0307 Transmit Frequency (MHz) Center Frequency 887.2500 888.0000 888.7500 889.5000 890.2500 891.0000 891.7500 892.5000 893.2500

68P09255A57-O

Receive Frequency (MHz) Center Frequency 842.2500 843.0000 843.7500 844.5000 845.2500 846.0000 846.7500 847.5000 848.2500

NOTE
Channel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used. 1013 03F5 869.7000 1023 03FF 870.0000 824.7000 825.0000

E-6

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

Appendix F

Test Preparation

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

F-1

Test Equipment Preparation

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Preparation

Purpose
This appendix provides information on pre-testing set-up for the following test equipment items (not required for the Cybertest test set):

S S S S S S S S S S S

Agilent E4406A transmitter test set Agilent E4432B signal generator Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer Advantest R3562 signal generator Agilent 8935 analyzer (formerly HP 8935) HP 8921 with PCS interface analyzer Advantest R3465 analyzer Motorola CyberTest HP 437 power meter Gigatronics 8541C power meter GPIB adapter

Pre-testing set-up information covered includes verification and setting GPIB addresses, inter-unit cabling, connectivity testing, pre-test control settings, and equipment calibration for items which are not calibrated with the Calibrate Test Equipment function of the LMF. The following procedures cover verification and changing GPIB addresses for the various items of CDMA test equipment supported by the LMF.

F-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses

Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses

Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-1 and follow the procedure in Table F-1 to verify and, if necessary, change the Agilent E4406A GPIB address. Figure F-1: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address
Active Function Area Softkey Label Display Area System Key

Bk Sp Key

Enter Key

Softkey Buttons

Data Entry Keypad

ti-CDMA-WP-00085-v01-ildoc-ftw

Table F-1: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address Step 1 2 Action In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key. - The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change. Press the Config I/O softkey button to the right of the instrument screen. - The softkey labels will change. - The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label. If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it: Press the GPIB Address softkey button. In the on-screen Active Function Area, GPIB Address will be displayed followed by the current GPIB address. On front panel Data Entry keypad, enter the communications system analyzer GPIB address of 18. - The GPIB Address label will change to Enter. - Characters typed with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the Active Function Area.

3 3a 3b

NOTE
To correct an entry, press Bk Sp key to delete one character at a time. 3c Press the Enter softkey button or the keypad Enter key to set the new GPIB address. - The Config I/O softkey labels will reappear. - The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

F-3

Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses

68P09255A57-O

Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address

Refer to Figure F-2 and follow the procedure in Table F-2 to verify and, if necessary, change the Agilent E4432B GPIB address. Figure F-2: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address
Active Entry Area Softkey Label Display Area

Utility Key

Softkey Buttons

Numeric Keypad

Backspace Key
ti-CDMA-WP-00086-v01-ildoc-ftw

Table F-2: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address Step Action In the MENUS section of the instrument front panel, press the Utility key. - The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change. Press the GPIB/RS232 softkey button to the right of the instrument screen. - The softkey labels will change. - The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label. If the current GPIB address is not set to 1, perform the following to change it: Press the GPIB Address softkey button. - The GPIB Address label and current GPIB address will change to boldface. - In the on-screen Active Entry Area, Address: will be displayed followed by the current GPIB address. On the front panel Numeric keypad, enter the signal generator GPIB address of 1. - The GPIB Address label will change to Enter. - Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the Active Entry display.

1 2

3 3a

3b

NOTE
To correct an entry, press the backspace key at the lower right of the keypad to delete one character at a time. 3c Press the Enter softkey button to set the new GPIB address. - The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label.

F-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses

Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address

Refer to Figure F-3 and perform the procedure in Table F-3 to verify and, if necessary, change the Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer GPIB address. Figure F-3: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address
Softkey Lable Display Area Softkey Buttons

on

REMOTE LED LCL Key

CONFIG Key

Keypad

BS Key

ENTR Key
ti-CDMA-WP-00083-v01-ildoc-ftw

Table F-3: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address Step 1 2 Action If the REMOTE LED is lighted, press the LCL key. - The LED turns off. Press the CONFIG key. - CONFIG softkey labels will appear in the softkey label display area of the instrument display. - The current GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label. If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it: Press the GPIB Address softkey. - GPIB Address entry window opens in instrument display showing current GPIB address. Enter 18 on the keypad in the ENTRY section of the instrument front panel. - Characters typed on the keypad will replace the address displayed in the GPIB Address entry window.

3 3a

3b

NOTE
To correct an entry, press the BS (backspace) key to delete one character at a time. 3c Press the ENTR key to the lower right of the keypad to enter the address. - The GPIB Address entry window closes. - The new address is diplayed in the bottom portion of the GPIB Address softkey label.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

F-5

Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses

68P09255A57-O

Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address

Set the GP-IB ADDRESS switch on the rear of the Advantest R3562 signal generator to address 1 as shown in Figure F-4. Figure F-4: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting

GPIB Address set to 1

GP-IP ADDRESS
5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 0

ti-CDMA-WP-00084-v01-ildoc-ftw

F-6

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses

Agilent 8935 Series E6380 (formerly HP 8935) Test Set GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-5 and follow the procedure in Table F-4 to verify and, if necessary, change the Agilent 8935 GPIB address. Figure F-5: HP8935 Test Set

Preset

Local

Inst Config

Shift NOTE

Cursor Control
FW00885

This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and ready for testing.

Table F-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB Address Step Action

* IMPORTANT
The HP I/O configuration MUST be set to Talk & Listen, or NO device on the GPIB bus will be accessible. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional information as required.) 1 To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8935 (see Figure F-5). The current HP-IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.

NOTE
HP-IB is the same as GPIB. 2 If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it: - Press Shift and Inst Config. - Turn Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to the HP-IB Adrs field. - Press Cursor Control knob to select the field. - Turn Cursor Control knob as required to change the address to 18. - Press Cursor Control knob to set the address.

S Press Preset to return to normal operation.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

F-7

Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses

68P09255A57-O

Hewlett Packard HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address

Refer to Figure F-6 and follow the procedure in Table F-5 to verify and, if necessary, change the HP 8921A HP 83236A GPIB addresses. Figure F-6: HP8921A and HP83236A/B

Local Preset

F
NOTE

Shift

Cursor Control

This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and ready for testing.

Table F-5: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB Addresses Step 1 Action To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8921A (see Figure F-6). The current HP-IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.

NOTE
HP-IB is the same as GPIB. 2 If the current HP-IB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it: - Turn Cursor Control knob to move cursor to More and press the knob to select the field. - Turn Cursor Control knob to move cursor to I/O Config and press the knob to select the field. - Turn Cursor Control knob to move cursor to Adrs and press the knob to select the field. - Turn Cursor Control knob to change HP-IB address to 18 and press the knob to set the address. - Press Shift and Preset to return to normal operation. To set the HP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19, set the dip switches as follows: - A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP-IB/Ser = 1
1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x
Jan 2003

F-8

68P09255A57-O

Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses

Advantest R3465 Communications Test Set GPIB Address

Refer to Figure F-7 and follow the procedure in Table F-6 to verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address for the Advantest R3465. Figure F-7: R3465 Communications Test Set
GPIB and others

REF UNLOCK

EVEN SEC/SYNC IN

CDMA TIME BASE IN

POWER

BNC T

OFF

ON

Vernier Knob

LCL

Shift

Preset

REF FW00337

NOTE

This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and ready for testing.

Table F-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address Step 1 Action To verify that the GPIB address is set correctly, perform the following procedure: - Press SHIFT then PRESET (see Figure F-7). - Press LCL. - Press the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address. If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it: - Turn the vernier knob as required to select 18. - Press the vernier knob to set the address. To return to normal operation, press Shift and Preset.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

F-9

Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses

68P09255A57-O

Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address

Follow the steps in Table F-7 to verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address on the Motorola CyberTest. Changing the GPIB address requires the following items:

S S S S
NOTE

Motorola CyberTest communications analyzer Computer running Windows 3.1/Windows 95 Motorola CyberTAME software program TAME Parallel printer port cable (shipped with CyberTest) This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and ready for testing.

Table F-7: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address Step 1 2 3 Action On the LMF desktop, locate the CyberTAME icon. Double click on the icon to run the CyberTAME application. In the CyberTAME window taskbar, under Special, select IEEE.488.2. CyberTAME software will query the CyberTest Analyzer for its current GPIB address. It then will open the IEEE 488.2 dialog box. If the current GPIB address is not 18, perform the following procedure to change it: - Use the up or down increment arrows, or double-click in the field and type the number. - Click on the OK button. The new address will be written to the CyberTest via the parallel port and saved.

NOTE
Verify that the address has been set by repeating steps 2 and 3. The new address should now appear in the IEEE 488.2 dialog box Address field.

F-10

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses

HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address

Refer to Figure F-8 and follow the steps in Table F-8 to verify and, if necessary, change the HP 437 GPIB address. Figure F-8: HP437 Power Meter

SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON ACCESSES FUNCTION AND DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE THE BUTTONS

PRESET

ENTER

REF FW00308

NOTE

This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and ready for testing.

Table F-8: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address Step 1 2 Press Shift and PRESET (see Figure F-8). Use the y arrow key to navigate to HP-IB ADRS and press ENTER. The HP-IB address is displayed. Action

NOTE
HP-IB is the same as GPIB. 3 If the current GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it: - Use the y b arrow keys to change the HP-IB ADRS to 13. - Press ENTER to set the address. Press Shift and ENTER to return to a standard configuration.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

F-11

Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses

68P09255A57-O

Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address

Refer to Figure F-9 and follow the steps in Table F-9 to verify and, if necessary, change the Gigatronics 8541C power meter GPIB address. Figure F-9: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail

MENU

ENTER

ARROW KEYS

REF FW00564

NOTE

This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and ready for testing.

Table F-9: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address Step Action

! CAUTION F
1 2 3 4 Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter. Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration. Press MENU (see Figure F-9). Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU and press ENTER. Use the b arrow key to select GPIB and press ENTER. The current Mode and GPIB Address are displayed. If the Mode is not set to 8541C, perform the following to change it: Use the a ' arrow keys as required to select MODE. Use the by arrow keys as required to set MODE to 8541C. If the GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it: Use the ' arrow key to select ADDRESS. Use the by arrow keys as required to set the GPIB address to 13. Press ENTER to return to normal operation.

F-12

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses

RS232 GPIB Interface Box

Be sure that the RS-232 GPIB interface adapter DIP switches are set as shown in Figure F-10. Figure F-10: RS232 GPIB Interface Box

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS S MODE DATA FORMAT BAUD RATE

ON

GPIB ADRS

G MODE

RS232-GPIB Interface Box

ti-CDMA-WP-00082-v01-ildoc-ftw

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

F-13

Test Equipment Setup

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Setup

Purpose
This appendix provides information on setting up the HP8921 with PCS interface, the HP8935 and the Advantest R3465. The Cybertest test set doesnt require any setup.

HP8921A Test Equipment Connections

Table F-10 depicts the rear panels of the HP 8921A test equipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipment is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE-488/GPIB bus. The LMF expects each piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer to Table F-13). If there is a communications problem between the LMF and any piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresses have been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected to the test equipment. Figure F-11 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHz Rubidium reference. Table F-10: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium From Test Set: 8921A CW RF OUT 114.3 MHZ IF OUT IQ RF IN DET OUT CONTROL I/O 10 MHZ OUT HPIB INTERFACE To Interface: 83203B CDMA CW RF IN 114.3 MHZ IF IN IQ RF OUT AUX DSP IN CONTROL I/O SYNTH REF IN 10 MHZ OUT HPIB INTERFACE REF IN 83236A PCS Connector Type SMC-female - SMC-female SMC-female - SMC-female SMC-female - SMC-female SMC-female - SMC-female 45-pin custom BUS BNC-male - BNC-male HPIB cable BNC-male - BNC-male

F-14

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Setup

Figure F-11: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium

HP83203B CDMA CELLULAR ADAPTER TO POWER METER GPIB CONNECTOR

TO GPIB INTERFACE BOX

REF IN

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

HP-IB FW00368

HP8921A CELL SITE TEST SET

HP83236A PCS INTERFACE

F
REAR PANEL COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET

F-15

Test Equipment Setup

68P09255A57-O

Figure F-12 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHz Rubidium reference. Table F-11: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium From Test Set: 8921A CW RF OUT 114.3 MHZ IF OUT IQ RF IN DET OUT CONTROL I/O 10 MHZ OUT HPIB INTERFACE 10 MHZ INPUT To Interface: 83203B CDMA CW RF IN 114.3 MHZ IF IN IQ RF OUT AUX DSP IN CONTROL I/O REF IN HPIB INTERFACE 10 MHZ OUT 83236A PCS Connector Type SMC-female - SMC-female SMC-female - SMC-female SMC-female - SMC-female SMC-female - SMC-female 45-pin custom BUS BNC-male - BNC-male HPIB cable BNC-male - BNC-male

F-16

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Setup

Figure F-12: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium
10 MHZ WITH RUBIDIUM STANDARD

HP83203B CDMA CELLULAR ADAPTER TO POWER METER GPIB CONNECTOR

TO GPIB INTERFACE BOX

REF IN

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

HP-IB FW00369

HP8921A CELL SITE TEST SET

HP83236A PCS INTERFACE

REAR PANEL COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET

F-17

Test Equipment Setup

68P09255A57-O

HP8921A System Connectivity Test

Follow the steps in Table F-12 to verify that the connections between the PCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct and cables are intact. The software also performs basic functionality checks of each instrument.
NOTE

Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially system controllers, from the system before running the connectivity software. Table F-12: System Connectivity

Step

Action

* IMPORTANT
- Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot. Press the [PRESET] pushbutton. Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the Tests Main Menu screen. Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. In the Choices selection box, select Card. Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. In the Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN. Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. The software will prompt you through the connectivity setup. Do the following when the test is complete,

F
8 9

S position cursor on STOP TEST and select it S OR press the [K5] pushbutton.
To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton. Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.

Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address

Follow the steps in Table F-13 to set the HP8921A GPIB address. Table F-13: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address Step 1 2 Verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly. Action If you have not already done so, turn the HP8921A power on.

S HP8921A HP-IB Adrs = 18, accessed by pushing LOCAL and selecting More and I/O Configure
on the HP8921A/600. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional info as required).

S HP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19. Set dip switches as follows:
- A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP-IB/Ser = 1

F-18

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Setup

Pretest Setup for HP8921A

Before the HP8921A CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing it must be set up correctly for automatic testing. Table F-14: Pretest Setup for HP8921A Step 1 2 3 4 Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in. Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob. Position the cursor at IO CONFIG (under To Screen and More) and select it. Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn. Action

Pretest Setup for HP8935

Before the HP8935 CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing it must be set up correctly for automatic testing. Table F-15: Pretest Setup for HP8935 Step 1 2 3 4 5 Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in. Press the Shift button and then press the I/O Config button. Press the Push to Select knob. Position the cursor at IO CONFIG and select it. Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn. Action

Advantest R3465 Connection

The following diagram depicts the rear panels of the Advantest test equipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipment is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE-488/GPIB bus. The LMF expects each piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer to Table F-16). If there is a communications problem between the LMF and any piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresses have been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected to the test equipment. Figure F-13 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHz Rubidium reference.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

F-19

Test Equipment Setup

Figure F-13: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Standard
SERIAL I/O CDMA CLOCK OUT

68P09255A57-O

R3561L REAR PANEL LOCAL IN SYN REF IN 10 MHZ OUT AC POWER

TO POWER METER GPIB CONNECTOR

PARALLEL

SERIAL I/O X Y Z R3465 REAR PANEL GATE IN EXT TRIGGER AC POWER

GPIB TO GPIB INTERFACE BOX 10 MHZ REF IF OUT 421 MHZ

FW00370

GPIB CONNECTOR

ADVANTEST R3465 REAR PANEL

TO T-CONNECTOR ON FRONT PANEL (EVEN/SEC/SYNC IN)

F-20

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Setup

Figure F-14 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHz Rubidium reference.

Figure F-14: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Standard
FROM 10 MHZ RUBIDIUM REFERENCE SERIAL I/O CDMA CLOCK OUT

R3561L REAR PANEL LOCAL IN SYN REF IN 10 MHZ OUT AC POWER

TO POWER METER GPIB CONNECTOR

PARALLEL

SERIAL I/O Y Z R3465/3463 REAR PANEL GATE IN EXT TRIGGER

GPIB TO GPIB INTERFACE BOX IF OUT 421 MHZ

AC POWER

10 MHZ REF

FW00371 GPIB CONNECTOR

ADVANTEST R3465 REAR PANEL

TO T-CONNECTOR ON FRONT PANEL (EVEN SEC/SYNC IN)

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

F-21

Test Equipment Setup

68P09255A57-O

R3465 GPIB Address & Clock setup

Follow the steps in Table F-16 to set the GPIB address and clock for the Advantest R3465 equipment. Table F-16: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup Step 1 Action Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required) Perform the following to set the standard parameters on the test set:

S Push the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display). S Push the LCL pushbutton (CW in Measurement just below the CRT display)
- Push the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address. - If required, change GPIB address to 18 (rotate the vernier knob to set, push the vernier knob to enter) 2 Verify the current Date and Time in upper/right of the CRT display (perform the following to set if required) Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)

S Push the Date/Time CRT menu key S If required, change to correct Date/Time (rotate the vernier knob to select and set, push the vernier
knob to enter)

S Push the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display).

Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465

Before the Advantest R3465 analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing it must be set up correctly for automatic testing. Table F-17: Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 Step 1 2 Press the RESET button. Action Press the SHIFT button so the LED next to it is illuminated.

F-22

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Setup

Agilent E4406A/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection

To provide proper operation during testing when both units are required, the 10 MHz reference signal from the E4406A transmitter test set must be provided to the E4432B signal generator. Connect a BNC (M)-BNC (M) cable from the E4406A 10 MHz OUT (SWITCHED) connector to the E4432B 10MHz IN connector as shown in Figure F-15. Figure F-15: Agilent 10 MHz Reference Connections

E4432B 10 MHz IN TO GPIB BOX E4406A 10 MHz OUT (SWITCHED)

ti-CDMA-WP-00182-v01-ildoc-ftw

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

F-23

Test Equipment Setup

68P09255A57-O

Calibrating Test Cable Setup using HP PCS Interface (HP83236)

Table F-18 covers the procedure to calibrate the test equipment using the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with the HP83236 PCS Interface.
NOTE Table:note. Note 10pt Helvetica

This calibration method must be executed with great care. Some losses are measured close to the minimum limit of the power meter sensor (-30 dBm). Prerequisites Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

S Test equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable

calibration. S Test equipment has been selected and calibrated. Table F-18: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) Step Action

NOTE
Verify that GPIB controller is turned off. 1 2 3 4 5 Insert HP83236 Manual Control System card into memory card slot. Press the Preset pushbutton. Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen. Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, select CARD. Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, select MANUAL. Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES. If using HP 83236A: Set channel number=<chan#>: - Position cursor at Channel Number and select it. - Enter the chan# using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank. - When the screen reappears, the chan# will be displayed on the channel number line. If using HP 83236B: Set channel frequency: - Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter. - Select User Defined Frequency. - Go Back to Previous Menu. - Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency and enter actual RX frequency. - Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency and enter actual TX frequency.

F
6 7

Set RF Generator level: - Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it. - Enter -10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank. - When the screen reappears, the value -10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line. Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm: - Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it - Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it. - Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter]. . . . continued on next page

F-24

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Setup

Table F-18: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)

Step 10 11 Select Back to Previous Menu.

Action Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level: Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level: - Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it. - Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level. - Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level (1850 - 1910 MHz). - Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it. Click on Pause for Manual Measurement. Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface. On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN. Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value. Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm 0.2 dB.

12 13 14 15 16

NOTE
The Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitude by adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm. 17 Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.

* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter sensors lower limit is -30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses 30 dB should be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting the power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately. 18 Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting each component, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor. Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.

S Example:

(A) Test Cable(s) = (B) 20 dB Attenuator = (B) Directional Coupler =

-1.4 dB -20.1 dB -29.8 dB

19

After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses: S Example: Total test setup loss = -1.4 -29.8 -20.1 = -51.3 dB. This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests. Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen. Select Continue (K2). Select RF Generator Level and set to -119 dBm. Click on Pause for Manual Measurement. . . . continued on next page

20 21 22 23

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

F-25

Test Equipment Setup

Table F-18: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) Step 24 Action

68P09255A57-O

Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fields not indicated remain at default):

S Verify the GPIB (HP-IB) address:

under To Screen, select More select IO CONFIG Set HP-IB Adrs to 18 set Mode to Talk&Lstn

S Verify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)

- Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches to the CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen. - Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq 25 Refer toChapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF.

F-26

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Setup

Figure F-16: Cable CalibrationUsing HP8921 with PCS Interface

MEMORY CARD SLOT

POWER SENSOR

(A)

(A) (B)

POWER SENSOR

(B)

20 dB / 20 WATT ATTENUATOR

F
POWER SENSOR

(C)

POWER SENSOR

(C)
150 W NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD 30 dB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER

FW00292

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

F-27

Test Equipment Setup

68P09255A57-O

Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465

NOTE

Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure. Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup and calibration must be performed at both the TX and RX frequencies.

Table F-19: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 Step Action

* IMPORTANT
- This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes. 1 2 3 4 5 Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel. Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key Select the Setup CRT menu key Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parameters

NOTE
Fields not listed remain at default Generator Mode: SIGNAL Link: FORWARD Level Unit: dBm CalCorrection: ON Level Offset: OFF 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Select the return CRT menu key Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF. Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle it OFF. Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area. Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys. Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT port on the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit. Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON. Record the power meter reading ________________________ . . . continued on next page

F-28

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Setup

Table F-19: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 Step 16 Action Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.

* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter sensors lower limit is -30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dB should be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re-zer o the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting the power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately. 17 Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect each component one-at-a-time between the RF OUT port and the power sensor (see Figure F-17, Setups A, B, and C). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each connection. Example: (A) 1st Test Cable = -0.5 dB (B) 2nd Test Cable = -1.4 dB (C) 20 dB Attenuator = -20.1 dB (D) 30 dB Directional Coupler = -29.8 dB Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF. Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses: Example: Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dB This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests. Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency. Refer to Chapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF.

18 19

20 21 22 23

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

F-29

Test Equipment Setup

Figure F-17: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465
RF OUT

68P09255A57-O

POWER SENSOR

(A) & (B)

POWER SENSOR

(C)

20 DB / 2 WATT ATTENUATOR

POWER SENSOR

(C)

POWER SENSOR

(D)
100 W NON-RADIA TING RF LOAD 30 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER

FW00320

F-30

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Test Equipment Setup

Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter

Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made using a bolometer-type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor. Follow the steps outlined in Table F-20 to enter information unique to the power sensor before calibrating the test setup. Refer to Figure F-18 as required.
NOTE Table:note. Note 10pt Helvetica

This procedure must be done in conjunction with the automated calibration to enter power sensor specific calibration values.

Figure F-18: Power Meter Detail

SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON ACCESSES FUNCTION AND DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE THE BUTTONS

CONNECT POWER SENSOR TO POWER REFERENCE WHEN CALIBRATING UNIT. POWER REFERENCE IS ENABLED USING THE SHIFT ' KEYS

CONNECT POWER SENSOR WITH POWER METER TURNED OFF

FW00308

F
Table F-20: Power Meter Calibration Procedure Step Action

! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with ac power applied to the meter. Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or mis-calibration. 1 2 - Make sure the power meter AC LINE pushbutton is OFF. - Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input. Set the AC LINE pushbutton to ON.

NOTE
The calibration should be performed only after the power meter and sensor have been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes. 3 Perform the following to set or verify the GPIB address: - To enter the SPECIAL data entry function, press [SHIFT] then [PRESET] . - Use the [y] or [b] button to select HP-IB ADRS; then press [ENTER]. - Use the [y] or [b] button to select HP-IB ADRS 13; then press [ENTER]. - To EXIT the SPECIAL data entry function press [SHIFT] then [ENTER]. . . . continued on next page
1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x
F-31

Jan 2003

Test Equipment Setup

Table F-20: Power Meter Calibration Procedure Step 4 Action

68P09255A57-O

Perform the following to set or verify the correct power sensor model: - Press [SHIFT] then [a] to select SENSOR. - Identify the power sensor model number from the sensor label. Use the [y] or [b] button to select the appropriate model; then press [ENTER].

NOTE
Be sure the PWR REF (power reference) output is OFF (observe that the triangular indicator is NOT displayed as shown in Step 7). If on, press [SHIFT] then ['] to turn it off. 5 6 7 Press [ZERO] . Display will show Zeroing ******. Wait for process to complete. Connect the power sensor to the POWER REF output. To turn on the PWR REF, perform the following: - Press [SHIFT] then [']. - Verify that the triangular indicator (below) appears in the display above PWR REF.

Perform the following to set the REF CF %: - Press ([SHIFT] then [ZERO] ) for CAL. - Enter the sensors REF CF % from the sensors decal using the arrow keys and press [ENTER]. (The power meter will display CAL ***** for a few seconds.)

NOTE
If the REF CAL FACTOR (REF CF) is not shown on the power sensor, assume it to be 100%. 9 Perform the following to set the CAL FAC %: - Press [SHIFT] then [FREQ] for CAL FAC. - On the sensors decal, locate an approximate calibration percentage factor (CF%) at 2 GHz. Enter the sensors calibration % (CF%) using the arrow keys and press [ENTER]. When complete, the power meter will typically display 0.05 dBm. (Any reading between 0.00 and 0.10 is normal.) To turn off the PWR REF, perform the following: - Press [SHIFT] then [']. - Disconnect the power sensor from the POWER REF output.

10

F-32

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter

Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter

Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made using a bolometer-type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor. Follow the steps in Table F-21 to enter information unique to the power sensor. Table F-21: Calibrate Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Step Action

! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter. Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.

NOTE
Allow the power meter and sensor to warm up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes before performing the calibration procedure. 1

S Make sure the power meter POWER pushbutton is OFF. S Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input. S Set the POWER pushbutton to ON.
Verify the Power GPIB mode and address:

S S S S S
3

Press MENU. Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU, and press ENTER. Use the b arrow key to select GPIB, and press ENTER. Use the by arrow keys to set MODE to 8541C. Press ' and use the by arrow keys as required to set ADDRESS to 13. Press ENTER.

S Connect the power sensor to the CALIBRATOR output connector. S Press ZERO. S Wait for the process to complete. Sensor factory calibration data is read to power meter during this
process.

S Disconnect the power sensor from the CALIBRATOR output.

Figure F-19: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail

CONNECT POWER SENSOR TO CALIBRATOR POWER REFERENCE WHEN CALIBRATING/ZEROING UNIT

CONNECT POWER SENSOR WITH POWER METER TURNED OFF

AC POWER

GPIB CONNECTION

FRONT View

REAR View
FW00564

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

F-33

Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter

Notes

68P09255A57-O

F-34

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

Appendix G

Downloading ROM

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

G-1

Downloading ROM Code

68P09255A57-O

Downloading ROM Code

Exception Procedure - Downloading ROM Code
This procedure is not part of a normal optimization. Perform this procedure only on an exception basis when no alternative exists to load a BTS device with the correct version of ROM code.
NOTE

One GLI must be INS_ACT (bright green) before ROM code can be downloaded to non-GLI devices. The correct ROM and RAM codes for the software release used on the BSS must be loaded into BTS devices. To identify the correct device ROM and RAM code loads for the software release being used on the BSS, refer to the Version Matrix section of the SCt CDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tape or CD-ROM containing the BSS software). All devices in a BTS must be loaded with the ROM and RAM code specified for the software release used on the BSS before any optimization or ATP procedures can be performed. If a replacement device is loaded with ROM code which is not compatible with the BSS software release being used, the device ROM code can be changed using the LMF before performing the BTS optimization and ATPs. A device loaded with later release ROM code can not be converted back to a previous release ROM code in the field without Motorola assistance If it is necessary to download ROM code to a device from the LMF, the procedure in Table G-1 includes steps for both ROM and RAM code download using LMF.

CAUTION

Prerequisites
Prior to performing this procedure, ensure the correct ROM and RAM code files exist in the LMF computers applicable lmf home directory code folder for each of the devices to be loaded.
CAUTION

The Release level of the ROM code to be downloaded must be the one specified for the software release installed in the BSS. The release level of the ROM code resident in the other devices in the BTS must also be correct for the BSS software release being used. ROM code must not be downloaded to a frame loaded with code for a BSS software release with which it is not compatible. This procedure should only be used to upgrade replacement devices for a BTS. It should NOT be used to upgrade all devices in a BTS. If a BTS is to be upgraded from R15.x to R16.0, the upgrade should be done by the OMC-R using the DownLoad Manager.

G-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Downloading ROM Code

Table G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices

Step 1 Click on the device to be loaded.

Action

NOTE
More than one device of the same type can be selected for download by either clicking on each one to be downloaded or from the BTS menu bar Select pull-down menu, select the device item that applies. Where: device = the type of device to be loaded (BBX, CSM, MCC) 2 3 From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menu, select Status. - A status report window will appear. Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.

NOTE
HW Bin Type is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This code is used as the last four digits in the filename of a devices binary ROM code file. Using this part of the filename, the ROM code file can be matched to the device in which it is to be loaded. 4 5 6 Click OK to close the status window. Click on the device to be loaded.

* IMPORTANT
The LMF will not automatically select ROM code files for download. ROM code files must be selected manually. From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menus, select Download > Code Manual. - A file selection window will appear.

7 8

Double-click on the version folder with the desired version number for the ROM code file (for example 2.16.0.x). Double-click the Code folder. - A list of ROM and RAM code files will be displayed.

! CAUTION
A ROM code file with the correct HW Bin Type must be chosen. Using a file with the wrong HW Bin Type can result in unpredictable operation and damage to the device. 9 Click on the ROM code file with the filename which matches the device type and HW Bin Type number noted in step 3 (for example, file bbx_rom.bin.0604 is the ROM code file for a BBX with a HW Bin Type of 0604). - The file should be highlighted. Click on the Load button. - A status report window is displayed showing the result of the download.

10

NOTE
If the ROM load failed for some devices, load them individually by clicking on one device, perform steps 6 through 10 for it, and repeat the process for each remaining device. 11 12 13 Click OK to close the status window. From the LMF window menu bar Tools pull-down menus, select Update NextLoad > CDMA. In the left-hand pane of the window which opens, click on the BTS number for the frame being loaded (for example, BTS-14 ). . . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

G-3

Downloading ROM Code

Table G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices Step 14 Action

68P09255A57-O

On the list of versions displayed in the right-hand pane, click the button next to the version number of the folder that was used for the ROM code download (for example, 2.16.0.x) and click Save. - A pop-up message will appear showing the CDF has been updated. Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop-up message. Click on the device that was loaded with ROM code.

15 16

NOTE
RAM code is automatically selected for download. 17 From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menus, select Download > Code/Data to download RAM code and dds file data. - A status report is displayed showing the result of the download. Click OK to close the status window. Observe the downloaded non-GLI device to ensure it is OOS_RAM (yellow). Click on the device which was loaded with code. From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menu, select Status. Verify that the correct ROM and RAM version numbers are displayed in the status report window. Click OK to close the status window.

18 19 20 21 22

G-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

Appendix H

Cable Interconnection

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

H-1

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling
SC 4812ET Intra-Cabinet Cabling
This appendix provides the identification and location of the cables connecting the components which make up the SC 4812ET RF cabinet. The number of cables and components incorporated in the RF cabinet will vary depending on the the manner in which the cabinet is equipped. For example, a 3 sector, 2 carrier system will require less components and less cables than a 6 sector 2 carrier system. Refer to Table H-1 and Figure H-1 through Figure H-19 for the cable you wish to research.
NOTE

In some cases cables with the same number are used to connect two different signalling paths. These cables are designated A & B and the point they connect to and from is also designated A & B. Ensure the correct cable (A or B) is connected to the correct designation (A or B) connector or plug.

Table H-1: SC4812ET RF CABINET INTER-CONNECT CABLES DRDC, Combiner, Trunking Backplane Cables CABLE # 3064795A05 3064735A10 3064735A07 3064735A11 3064735A12 3064795A07 3086435H01 3086435H02 3086435H03 3086168H01 TX CIO TX Trunking BP TX Combiner TX Combiner TX Combiner TX CIO TX Combiner QDS TX Combiner QDS TX Combiner QDS Power LPA PDA FROM Power CCCP/PDA LAN I/O A in FROM LAN I/O B in GPS Surge Arrestor LAN I/O B in Figure H-5 C-CCP Cables NOTE See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP Cables (cont) CABLE # 3064899A04 3086033H03 3064899A04 NOTEs See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 TO C-CCP LAN I/O B In C-CCPBackplane C-CCP LAN I/O B In . . . continued on next page
Jan 2003

FROM

NOTE Figure H-6 Figure H-5 See Figure H-1, Figure H-11, Figure H-12, Figure H-13, and Figure H-14 (See Above) (See Above) Figure H-11 Trunking BP

TO Combiner Connector Pnl DRDC DRDC DRDC Trunking BP PkZ Adptr PkZ Adptr PkZ Adptr Trunk BP TO C-CCP Backplane C-CCP LAN I/O A In

CABLE # 3064809A01 3064899A04

H-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling
Table H-1: SC4812ET RF CABINET INTER-CONNECT CABLES

3064899A03 3064899A03 3064899A07 3086000H02 3086001H02 3086001H02 3086086H02 3086366H02 4886044H01 CABLE # 3086601H01 3086601H02 3086001H02

C-CCP LAN I/O A Out C-CCP LAN I/O B Out Sync CSM Site I/O C-CCP A SPAN I/O BlkHd B SPAN I/O BlkHd Alarm C-CCP HSO/LFR LBD FROM SPAN I/O Pblock SPAN CSU SPAN CSU

See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 See Figure H-1 See Figure H-9 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 Span I/O Board Cables NOTE See Figure H-1 & Figure H-10 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-10 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-10 RFDS Cables

LAN I/O A Out LAN I/O B Out I/O

J2 on ETIB
C-CCP/A SPAN I/O C-CCP/B SPAN I/O J1 on ETIB C-CCP HSO/LFR C-CCP Backplane TO CSU A & B SPAN I/O BRD A & B SPAN Connector on C-CCP Backplane TO DRDC DRDC DRDC DRDC TO C-CCP Bkpln RFDS ETIB (15 position) ETIB, OPT, HX, EBA HX/LPA

CABLE # 3064238A17 3064238A18 3064238A19 3064238A20 CABLE # 3064794A03 3064794A05 3086433H04 3086169H01 3086500H01 3086505H01 3086566H01 3086569H01 3086655H02 LPAC ETIB RGPS I/O

FROM RFDS/ASU-1 RFDS/ASU-2 RFDS/ASU-1 RFDS/ASU-2 FROM

NOTE Figure H-16 & Figure H-17 Figure H-16 & Figure H-17 Figure H-16 & Figure H-17 Figure H-16 & Figure H-17 ETIB/LPAC Cables NOTE See Figure H-8 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 See Figure H-1 & Figure H-8 See Figure H-5 & Figure H-19 See Figure H-8, Figure H-5 & Figure H-19

Power, Heat Exchanger, PDA Alm/Ctrl ETIB LPAC Door Intrusion Alarm LPAC

DC Cable (DC Power Dist) See Figure H-1 & Figure H-19

EBA Blower Assembly

1 Cable to each LPA Bk Pln Door Switch ETIB

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

H-3

Intra-Cabinet Cabling
Figure H-1: 4812ET RF Cabinet Internal FRU Locations
(See Figure H-8, Figure H-9), and Figure H-10)

68P09255A57-O

EBA RFDS ETIB LPAC SPAN I/O

C-CCP Shelf (See Figure H-2 and Figure H-5) (See Figure H-11, Figure H-12, Figure H-13, and Figure H-14) OPTIONAL AREA (See Figure H-10) Modem Punch Block (back)
LAN
OUT IN

Combiner Cage DRDC LPAs

CSU

DC Power Dist.

A B
19 MHz 2 Sec

DRDC

LAN I/O Span I/O to C-CCP SYS Sync Alarm to ETIB To Span I/O (See Figure H-11) LPA Trunking Backplane (See Figure H-5 (See Figure H-4, and Figure H-10) Figure H-5, Figure H-6 and Figure H-8)
FW00698

H-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

C-CCP Cables and Cable Connectors

The C-CCP Shelf assembly consists of the C-CCP Shelf and the attached backplane with cables and connectors (see Figure H-2 and Figure H-3). The C-CCP shelf contains all of the CDMA unique functions within the SC 4812ET RF frame. The C-CCP shelf contains the following components:

S S S S S S S S S S S S S

Broadband Transceiver (BBX) cards Multi-Channel CDMA (MCC) cards Combiner Input/Output (CIO) card Power Supply cards Group Line Interface (GLI) cards Alarm Monitor Reporting (AMR) cards Clock Synchronization Modules (CSM) High Stability Oscillator/Low frequency Receiver (HSO/LFR) Multicoupler Preselector Cards (MPC) CDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) card Integrated Frame Modem (IFM) card Switch card C-CCP Fan Modules

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

H-5

Intra-Cabinet Cabling
Figure H-2: C-CCP Shelf Cable Numbers and Connectors
(To J1 connector on the ETIB) Cable # 3086086H02 (To SPAN A I/O connector on the Bulkhead) Cable # 3086001H02 (To J2 connector on the ETIB) Cable # 3086000H02 (To SPAN B I/O connector on the Bulkhead) Cable # 3086001H02

68P09255A57-O

ALARMS

SPAN A

SITE I/O

SPAN B

HSO/LFR
19 mm Filter Panel

Cable # 3086366H02

MPC/EMPC-1

MCC24-1

MCC24-2

MCC24-3

MCC24-4

MCC24-5

MCC24-6

BBX2-13

BBX2-1

BBX2-2

BBX2-3

BBX2-4

BBX2-5

BBX2-6

AMR-1

GLI3-1

LAN I/O A Cable # 3064899A04 LAN I/O B Cable # 3064899A04

PS-1

PS-2

PS-3

To LAN I/O connectors on the Bulkhead

CIO CCD-1 CCD-2 MPC/EMPC-2 Switch Card MCC24-10 MCC24-1 1 MCC24-12 HSO/LFR MCC24-7 MCC24-8 MCC24-9 BBX2-10 BBX2-1 1 BBX2-12 FILLER BBX2-7 BBX2-8 BBX2-9 CSM-1 CSM-2 AMR-2 GLI3-2

LPAC

C-CCP Shelf

FW00699

Cable # 3064794A03 (To the C-CCP connector on the LPAC Module)

H-6

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

Figure H-3: C-CCP Backplane

(To J1 connector on the ETIB) Cable # 3086086H02 SYSTEM LED Cable # 4886044H01 (To SPAN A I/O connector on the Bulkhead) Cable # 3086001H02 (To J2 connector on the ETIB) Cable # 3086000H02 (To SPAN B I/O connector on the Bulkhead) Cable # 3086001H02

HSO/LFR LAN IN A LAN IN B CCCP Power 3064809A01

Cable # 3086366H02 Cable # 3064899A04 Cable # 3064899A04 To LAN I/O connectors on the Bulkhead

LPAC

GPS Cable # 3086033H03

Cable # 3064794A03 (To the C-CCP connector on the LPAC Module) Cable # LAN OUT A 3064899A03 LAN OUT B Cable # 3064899A03

FW00700

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

H-7

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

68P09255A57-O

RF Cabinet LPA Cables

There can be a maximum of 16 LPAs in an RF cabinet. The connections shown are for one LPA backplane which controls four LPAs. The remaining LPAs are connected in the same manner. Refer to Figure H-4, through Figure H-8 for the cables connected to the LPAs in the 4812ET RF cabinet. Figure H-4: LPAs for the SC 4812ET

ETIB RFDS

EBA

5 RU RACK SPACE

SC 4812ET BTS RF Cabinet

Note: LPA Component door not shown for clarity

Unpopulated LPA Shelf Cover

External Blower Assembly (EBA)

LPA Module (4-Each Cage)

FW00173

H-8

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

Figure H-5: BTS Combiner to LPA Backplane Cables

EBA RFDS

LPA Backplane
LPA-1

ETIB

5 RU RACK SPACE

TX OUT1

Cable 3064735A10 (3 each)

TX IN 1 TX OUT2

LPA-2

TX IN2

TX IN 3 LPA-3 TX OUT3

SC 4812ET BTS RF Cabinet

LPA-4

4B

4A

1B

1A

S1 S3 S1

C1
S2

C2
S2

LPA-1

5B

5A

2B

2A

S3 S1 S3

C3
S2
LPA-2

6B

6A

3B

3A
S1 S3

C4

H
S2
LPA-3

FROM APPROPRIATE LPA LPA 1, LPA 2, LPA 3, LPA 4

LPA-4

BACK

FW00708-REF

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

H-9

Intra-Cabinet Cabling
Figure H-6: Combiner to LPA Backplane/LPA Backplane To CIO Board Cables

68P09255A57-O

EBA RFDS

LPA Backplane 1
LPA-1

ETIB

5 RU RACK SPACE

TX OUT1 TX IN 1 TX OUT2 TX IN2

LPA-2

Cable 3064735A10 (3 each)

RED ORANGE YELLOW

TX IN 3 LPA-3 TX OUT3

SC 4812ET BTS RF Cabinet

LPA-4

4B

4A

1B

1A

S1 S3 S1

C1
S2

TO J15 on CIO Board (See Figure H-7) Cable 3064795A05

C2
S2

LPA-1

5B

5A

2B

2A

S3 S1 S3

C3
S2

TX OUT1 TX IN 1 TX OUT2 LPA-2

GREEN VIOLET BLUE

6B

6A

3B

3A
S1

C4
S2

TX IN2

S3

TX IN 3 LPA-3 TX OUT3

LPA-4

FW00711

LPA Backplane 2

H-10

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

Figure H-7: Components Located on CIO Card

SC 4812ET RF Cabinet
ETIB RFDS EBA

5 RU RACK SPACE

RX EXP A RX EXP B TX BTS 1-6 TX BTS 7-12 M/F 1-6

J12

J13

J15

J14

FW00237

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

H-11

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

68P09255A57-O

LPAC Cabling
The LPAC module provides the communication interface from the ETIB and C-CCP to the LPA through the trunking backplane. The LPAC interface board is contained in a protective housing which is mounted on the RF cabinet frame behind the ETIB module. See Figure H-3, Figure H-8 and Figure H-9 for connecting cables and connector locations. The LPAC is located internally to the frame as shown in Figure H-1. Figure H-8: LPAC Interface Board Connectors and Attaching Cable Numbers
LPAC INTERFACE BOARD FRONT
LPA-1

ALARM RIBBON CABLE TO ETIB 3086655H02 RIBBON CABLE TO C-CCP BACKPLANE 3064794A03

TX OUT1 LPA-2 TX IN 1 TX OUT2 TX IN 3 TX IN2

LPA 1A, 1B 1C, 1D RIBBON CABLE 3086566H01 LPA 2A, 2B 2C, 2D RIBBON CABLE 3086566H01

LPA-3 TX OUT3

LPA-4

LPA 3A, 3B 3C, 3D RIBBON CABLE 3086566H01 LPA 4A, 4B 4C, 4D RIBBON CABLE 3086566H01

LPA BACKPLANE 1, 2, 3, & 4

FW00702

H
NOTE: The LPAC is Located Behind the ETIB Module

Cable # 3086566H01 (4 Connections each Side)

H-12

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

ETIB Cables and Cable Connectors

The ETIB module (see Figure H-9) provides the interface for the LPAs through the LPAC, punchblock, heat exchanger and alarms to the C-CCP backplane. The ETIB interface board is contained in a protective housing which is mounted on the RF cabinet frame. The ETIB is located internally to the frame as shown in Figure H-1. Figure H-9: ETIB I/O Connectors and Attaching Cable Numbers
Cable # 3064794A05 (See Figure H-16)

Cable # 3086168H01

J6 DC POWER P7 RFDS

Cable # 3086655H02 (See Figure H-8)

P2 LPAC P9 ALARMS IN (From Bulkhead ) Cable # 3064534A08 (See Figure H-1) (Reserved) J1 To ALARMS OUT (C-CCP Backplane) Cable # 3086086H02 See Figure 2-6 and Figure H-3 Cable # 3086000H02 See Figure 2-6 and Figure H-3

SITE I/O (C-CCP Backplane) P8 OPTIONS RECEPTACLE DOOR INTRUSION ALARM Cable # 3086569h01 Cable # 3086500h01 HEAT EXCH J3 RGD/RGPS J2 J5

LFR/HSO J4

Cable # 3086433H04 (See Figure H-1)

Cable # 3086366H02 See Figure 2-6 and Figure H-3

FW00701

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

H-13

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

68P09255A57-O

SPAN I/O Cable Connection Diagram

The SPAN I/O card provides the frame interface and secondary surge protection for the T1 lines. There are two span cards in an RF cabinet. SPAN I/O A supports spans A, C, and E. SPAN I/O B supports span B, D, and F. See Figure H-10 for SPAN cables and cable connections. The SPAN I/O is located internally to the frame as shown in Figure H-1.

H-14

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

Figure H-10: SPAN I/O Cables and Connectors

20 Pair RGD Punchblock Board (RGPS) 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B RF Expansion Ports 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 50 Pair Punch Block (Alarms/ Spans) RGD/RGPS
Microwave RF GPS

SPAN I/O (A & B) Interface Module (Located Behind the LPAC Module, See Figure H-1)

Power Input +27V

LAN
IN OUT

A B
Remote ASU

4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B Antennas
GND Lugs Spans Modem Alams 2 Sec

19 MHz

Power Input 27V Ret

1 2

4812ET Rear Connector Panel SPAN I/O WIRING DIAGRAM

SPAN I/O A SPAN I/O B

C-CCP Backplane
3086001H02 Bulkhead SPAN I/O A Bulkhead SPAN I/O Connector 3086601H01

CSU

3086601H02

SPAN I/O B 3086001H02

To/From Network

To/From GLI

To/From Network

To/From GLI

DTE

DATA PORT

DCE

DATA PORT

SLOT 2 T1 DDS T1 TERMINAL T1 DDS

SLOT 1 T1 TERMINAL

NETWORK CONTROL PORT

NETWORK GROUP ADDRESS SHELF ADDRESS

CSU Back View

FW00703

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

H-15

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

68P09255A57-O

DRDC/TRDC Cables and Cable Connections

The DRDC is a Duplexer, RX Filter, and Directional Coupler which provides the RF interface at the rear of the cabinet. The connections are the antenna connection (outside rear), transmit into the DRDC TX filter. Receive out of DRDC (RX filter), and Directional coupler. The TRDC is a TX filter/RX filter/Directional Coupler that is the same as the DRDC except the TRDC has two antenna outputs (TX only and RX only) The TRDC is not available in the 1.9 GHz band. See Figure H-11, Figure H-12, Figure H-13, and Figure H-14 for the cable diagram that fits the configuration of your BTS site.

H-16

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

Figure H-11: 3 Sector, 2 Carrier BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection

Dual Bandpass Filters 3 Sector, 2 Carrier Maximum 1B 1A

2B Add the following cables for 2nd Carrier 1-1B 3064735A11 3 SEC 2-2B 3064735A07 3 SEC 3-3B 3064735A07 3 SEC 3B

2A 1-1A 3064735A11 3 SEC 2-2A 3064735A07 3 SEC 3-3A 3064735A07 3 SEC

3A

COMBINER CAGE

3B

2B

1B

3A

2A

1A

H
FW00704

DRDCs

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

H-17

Intra-Cabinet Cabling
Figure H-12: BTS 2 to 1, 3 or 6 Sector Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection
2 to 1 Combiners 2 Carrier - 6 Sector 4 1

68P09255A57-O

4-4A 3064735A12 6 SEC 5-5A 3064735A11 6 SEC 6-6A 3064735A07 6 SEC * FOR 3 SECTOR-4 CARRIER Connect Combiner 4 to 1B Combiner 5 to 2B Combiner 6 to 3B

1-1A 3064735A11 3/6 SEC 2-2A 3064735A07 3/6 SEC 3-3A 3064735A07 3/6 SEC

COMBINER CAGE

3B

2B

1B

3A

2A

1A

6B

5B

4B

6A

5A

4A

H
DRDCs

FW00705

H-18

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

Figure H-13: BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection

4 to 1 Combiners 3 Sector 1A

2A

1-1A 3064735A11 3 SEC 2-2A 3064735A07 3 SEC 3-3A 3064735A07 3 SEC

3A

COMBINER CAGE

3B

2B

1B

3A

2A

1A

6B

5B

4B

6A

5A

4A

FW00706

DRDCs

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

H-19

Intra-Cabinet Cabling
Figure H-14: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection
Dual Bandpass Filter 6 Sector - 1 or 2 Carrier 4B 4A 1B 1A

68P09255A57-O

1-1B 3064735A11 6 Sec 2-2B 3064735A07 6 Sec 3-3B 3064735A07 6 Sec

5B

5A

2B

2A

1-1A 3064735A11 6 Sec 2-2A 3064735A07 6 Sec 3-3A 3064735A07 6 Sec

6B 4-4B 3064735A12 6 Sec 5-5B 3064735A11 6 Sec 6-6B 3064735A07 6 Sec COMBINER CAGE

6A

3B

3A 4-4A 3064735A12 6 Sec 5-5A 3064735A11 6 Sec 6-6A 3064735A07 6 Sec

3B

2B

1B

3A

2A

1A

6B

5B

4B

6A

5A

4A

H
DRDCs

FW00707

H-20

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

MPC Functional Description

The MPC card provides (see Figure H-15) low-noise amplification for all RX path signals. The low noise, high gain design improves frame RX sensitivity and overcomes the splitting loss in the receive path. DC voltages are monitored on the RF devices and regulators and are used to generate hard and soft alarms. The MPC is not redundant at the card-level, but includes dual-path amplifiers which provide soft-fail redundancy for all sectors.

MPC to DRDC Cabling

The cables connecting the MPC cards to the DRDCs for a three sector RF cabinet are shown in Figure H-15. A six sector RF cabinet would have six more DRDCs and they would be connected to the front of the MPC cards.

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

H-21

Intra-Cabinet Cabling
Figure H-15: DRDC To C-CCP Cage MPC Boards Cable Connections

68P09255A57-O

MPC BOARDS

SC 4812ET RF Cabinet
ETIB RFDS EBA

5 RU RACK SPACE

CABLES CONNECT 1A, 2A, 3A TO TOP MPC BOARD # 3086659H01 CABLES CONNECT 1B, 2B, 3B TO BOTTOM MPC BOARD # 3086659H01

1A - 3A: CABLE # 3086659H01 1B - 3B: CABLE # 3086659H01

3B

2B

1B

3A

2A

1A

* Use Cable 3086659H02 For Sectors 4 - 6

DRDC CAGE

FW00710

H-22

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

RFDS Cabling Details

Figure H-16 shows the components of the RFDS. Table H-2 depicts the cabling for a 3-Sector Duplexed configuration and Table H-3 depicts the cabling for a 6-Sector Duplexed configuration. Figure H-17 shows the connection of the RFDS to the BTS combiners. Figure H-16: RFDS Component Identification
HANDLE FWTIC ASU2 ASU1 SUBSCRIBER UNIT ASSEMBLY MCX CABLE DETAIL (See Figure H-17)
MCX CONNECTOR TO ASU

AMR BUS/POWER Cable # 3064794A05 CONNECTOR (LR485) (See Figure H-9)

P3

FWD/BTS PORTS 1 THROUGH 6 (See Figure H-17)

SMA CONNECTORS TO DRDC BTS OR ANT PORTS

CONNECTS to P2 AND P3 OF ASU1 AND ASU2

FW00217-REF

Table H-2: SC 4812ET Series 3-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table DRDC Label 1A BTS 1B BTS 2A BTS 2B BTS 3A BTS 3B BTS 1A ANT 1B ANT 2A ANT 2B ANT 3A ANT 3B ANT
Jan 2003

Directional Coupler Port ASU 1 - FWD (six pack MCX) Sector 1 Main BTS Sector 1 Diversity BTS Sector 2 Main BTS Sector 2 Diversity BTS Sector 3 Main BTS Sector 3 Diversity BTS ASU 1 - REF (six pack MCX) Sector 1 Main ANT Sector 1 Diversity ANT Sector 2 Main ANT Sector 2 Diversity ANT Sector 3 Main ANT Sector 3 Diversity ANT

Cobra RFDS Port ASU1-FWD ASU1-FWD ASU1-FWD ASU1-FWD ASU1-FWD ASU1-FWD ASU1-REF ASU1-REF ASU1-REF ASU1-REF ASU1-REF ASU1-REF BTS-1 BTS-2 BTS-3 BTS-4 BTS-5 BTS-6 ANT-1 ANT-2 ANT-3 ANT-4 ANT-5 ANT-6
H-23

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

KNURLED LOCK SCREWS

P2 REFL/ANT PORTS 1 THROUGH 6 (See Figure H-17)

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

68P09255A57-O

Table H-3: SC 4812ET Series 6-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table DRDC Label 1A BTS 1B BTS 2A BTS 2B BTS 3A BTS 3B BTS 4A BTS 4B BTS 5A BTS 5B BTS 6A BTS 6B BTS 1A ANT 1B ANT 2A ANT 2B ANT 3A ANT 3B ANT 4A ANT 4B ANT 5A ANT 5B ANT 6A ANT 6B ANT Directional Coupler Port ASU 1 - FWD (six pack MCX) Sector 1 Main BTS Sector 1 Diversity BTS Sector 2 Main BTS Sector 2 Diversity BTS Sector 3 Main BTS Sector 3 Diversity BTS ASU 2 - FWD (six pack MCX) Sector 4 Main BTS Sector 4 Diversity BTS Sector 5 Main BTS Sector 5 Diversity BTS Sector 6 Main BTS Sector 6 Diversity BTS ASU 1 - REF (six pack MCX) Sector 1 Main ANT Sector 1 Diversity ANT Sector 2 Main ANT Sector 2 Diversity ANT Sector 3 Main ANT Sector 3 Diversity ANT ASU 2 - REF (six pack MCX) Sector 4 Main ANT Sector 4 Diversity ANT Sector 5 Main ANT Sector 5 Diversity ANT Sector 6 Main ANT Sector 6 Diversity ANT ASU2-REF ANT-1 ASU2-REF ANT-2 ASU2-REF ANT-3 ASU2-REF ANT-4 ASU2-REF ANT-5 ASU2-REF ANT-6 ASU1-REF ANT-1 ASU1-REF ANT-2 ASU1-REF ANT-3 ASU1-REF ANT-4 ASU1-REF ANT-5 ASU1-REF ANT-6 ASU2-FWD BTS-1 ASU2-FWD BTS-2 ASU2-FWD BTS-3 ASU2-FWD BTS-4 ASU2-FWD BTS-5 ASU2-FWD BTS-6 ASU1-FWD BTS-1 ASU1-FWD BTS-2 ASU1-FWD BTS-3 ASU1-FWD BTS-4 ASU1-FWD BTS-5 ASU1-FWD BTS-6 Cobra RFDS Port

H-24

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

Figure H-17: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC RFDS Cable Connection

BTS COUPLED TO RFDS ASU 1 (See Figure H-16)

ANT COUPLED TO RFDS ASU 1 (See Figure H-16)

3B

2B

1B

3A

2A

1A

TO RFDS ASU1 & ASU2

BTS COUPLED TO RFDS ASU 2 (See Figure H-16)

6B

5B

4B

6A

5A

4A DRDC CAGE

FW00709

ANT COUPLED TO RFDS ASU 2 (See Figure H-16)

50 Pair Punchblock
The 50 pair punchblock is the main interface point for RGPS, span lines, customer I/O, Power Cabinet alarm lines, and the modem. The punchblock provides primary protection for all lines. Refer to Figure H-18 and Table H-4 for punchblock pin-out.
CAUTION

SC4812ET Span Line Labeling for Span B and Span C is swapped - On the SC4812ETs, the span cabel internal to the base station that connects the 50 pin header on the I/O plate to the CSU has Span B and Span C (RJ-45) connectors mis-labeled. - CFE will punch down the span on the 50 pair bunchblock as per Motorola documentation and punchdown chart. When conecting the span input to the CSU re-label Span B cable toSpan C cable to Span B. Connect to CSU as per documentation - Note: The labeling issue on the cable from the I/O plate to the CSU Part Number 3086601H01 Rev C shall be corrected on revision D to address this issue. The cut over date to Rev. D will be approximately January 30, 2001.
H-25

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Intra-Cabinet Cabling
CAUTION

68P09255A57-O

A wiring discrepancy exists between the manuals and the frame for remote GPS. - The TX and RX are reversed in the ETIB, leading to inoperability of the RGPS. The RGPS will not work in either a single standalone or multiple frame configuration. - Swap the White and White/Bk wires to punch pins 44T and 44R. The Green and Green/Bk go to 45T and 45R. This will correct non-expansion configurations. - Single frame and expansion BTSs without RGPS can use this workaround as a permanent solution. - For expansion with RGPS required a new cable (P/N 3086433H10 ) will correct the problem.

H-26

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

Figure H-18: 50 Pair Punchblock

STRAIN RELIEVE INCOMING CABLE TO BRACKET WITH TIE WRAPS

TO MODEM CONNECTOR TO ALARMS CONNECTOR

TO SPAN CONNECTOR

RF Cabinet I/O Area

TO RGD/RGPS CONNECTOR

TOP VIEW OF PUNCH BLOCK

2R 2T LEGEND 1T = PAIR 1 - TIP 1R = PAIR 1 -RING 1T 1R

SeeTable H-4 for Pin-Out.

1 2 49T 49R 50T 50R
FW00162-REF

1T 1R 2T 2R

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

H-27

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

68P09255A57-O

Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information

Table H-4 lists the complete pin/signal identification for the 50-pin punch block. Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock Punchblock Cable Connector Signal Name Function
Power Cab Control - NC Power Cab Control - NO Power Cab Control-Com

Punch Pin

Ext. Cable Wire Color Blue Blk/Blue Yellow N/C Blk/Yellow Green Blk/Grn White Blk/White Red Blk/Red Brown Blk/Brn

1T 1R 2T 2R 3T 3R 4T 4R 5T 5R 6T 6R 7T 7R 8T 8R 9T 9R 10T 10R 11T 11R 12T 12R 13T 13R

Reserved
Rectifier Fail AC Fail

Power Cabinet

Power Cab Exchanger Fail Power Cab Door Alarm Power Cab Major Alarm Battery Over Temp Power Cab Minor Alarm Reticifier Over Temp

ALARM HSO/LFR Extension

Power Cab Alarm Rtn

LFR_HSO_GND EXT_1PPS_POS EXT_1PPS_NEG CAL_+ LFR Antenna CAB_LORAN_+ LORAN_Pilot Beacon Alarm - Minor Pilot Beacon Alarm - Rtn Pilot Beacon Alarm - Major Pilot Beacon Control-NO Pilot Beacon Control - COM Pilot Beacon Control - NC

Pilot Beacon

. . . continued on next page

H-28

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling
Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock

Punchblock Cable Connector

Signal Name Function Customer Outputs 1 - NO Customer Outputs 1 - COM Customer Outputs 1 - NO Customer Outputs 1 - COM
Customer Outputs 1 - NC

Punch Pin

Ext. Cable Wire Color

14T 14R 14T 14R 15T 15R 16T 16R 17T 17R 18T 18R 19T 19R 20T 20R 21T 21R 22T 22R 23T 23R 24T 24R 25T 25R 26T 26R 27T 27R 28T 28R 29T 29R . . . continued on next page

Customer Outputs 2 - NO ALARM Customer Outputs Customer Outputs 2 - COM Customer Outputs 2 - NC Customer Outputs 3 - NO Customer Outputs 3 - COM Customer Outputs 3 - NC Customer Outputs 4 - NO Customer Outputs 4-COM Customer Outputs 4 - NC Customer Inputs 1 Cust_Rtn_A_1 Customer Inputs 2 Cust_Rtn_A_2 Customer Inputs 3 Cust_Rtn_A_3 Customer Inputs 4 Cust_Rtn_A_4 Customer Inputs 5 ALARM Customer Inputs Cust_Rtn_A_5 Customer Inputs 6 Cust_Rtn_A_6 Customer Inputs 7 Cust_Rtn_A_7 Customer Inputs 8 Cust_Rtn_A_8 Customer Inputs 9 Cust_Rtn_A_9 Customer Inputs 10 Cust_Rtn_A_10

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

H-29

Intra-Cabinet Cabling
Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock Punchblock Cable Connector Signal Name Function RCV_TIP_A Span 1 RCV_RING_A XMIT_TIP_A XMIT_RING_A RCV_TIP_B Span 2 RCV_RING_B XMIT_TIP_B XMIT_RING_B RCV_TIP_C (Note) Span 3 RCV_RING_C (Note) XMIT_TIP_C (Note) XMIT_RING_C(Note) SPAN I/O Span 4 RCV_TIP_D (Note) RCV_RING_D (Note) XMIT_TIP_D (Note) XMIT_RING_D(Note) RCV_TIP_E (Note) Span 5 RCV_RING_E (Note) XMIT_TIP_E (Note) XMIT_RING_E(Note) RCV_TIP_F (Note) Span 6 RCV_RING_F (Note) XMIT_TIP_F (Note) XMIT_RING_F(Note) 30T 30R 31T 31R 32T 32R 33T 33R 34T 34R 35T 35R 36T 36R 37T 37R 38T 38R 39T 39R 40T 40R 41T 41R Punch Pin

68P09255A57-O

Ext. Cable Wire Color

NOTE
Span 3 through 6 are spares for expansion purposes . . . continued on next page

H-30

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Intra-Cabinet Cabling
Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock

Punchblock Cable Connector

Signal Name Function GPS_Power_A For frame without RGD ith t Expansion Punchblock Single Frame g BTS;RGPS Head BTS RGPS H d Connection OR Multiple Frame BTS; RGD Connection at C i RGPS Secondary Frame GPS_Power_A_Return GPS_Power_B GPS_Power_B_Return GPS_TXD+ GPS_TXDGPS_RXD+ GPS_RXDSignal Ground (TDR+) Signal Ground (TDR-) GPS_1PPS+ GPS_1PPSGPS_Power_A GPS_Power_A_Return GPS_Power_B For frame with RGD Expansion Punchblock OR Multiple Frame M li l F BTS; RGPS Head Connection at RGPS Primary Frame GPS_Power_B_Return GPS_TXD+ GPS_TXDGPS_RXD+ GPS_RXDSignal Ground (TDR+) Master Frame (TDR-) GPS_1PPS+ GPS_1PPSReserved

Punch Pin

Ext. Cable Wire Color Yellow Yellow/Black Blue Blue/Black White White/Black Green Green/Black Red Red/Black Brown Brown/Black Yellow Yellow/Black Blue Blue/Black White White/Black Green Green/Black Red Red/Black Brown Brown/Black

42T 42R 43T 43R 44T 44R 45T 45R 46T 46R 47T 47R 42T 42R 43T 43R 44T 44R 45T 45R 46T 46R 47T 47R 48T 48R 49T 49R 50T 50R

RGD/RGPS

RGD/RGPS

MODEM RGD/RGPS None ALARM

Reserved Chassis Ground No Connection Reserved Reserved

H
N/A None None None

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

H-31

Intra-Cabinet Cabling

68P09255A57-O

RF Cabinet Parts Locator

Figure H-19 illustrates the location of door switch interlocks, DC Power distribution and the EBA blower assembly. Figure H-19: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet Parts Locator

1 2

INDEX: 1. Door Switch 2. Door Switch (Main) 3. DC Power Distribution 4. EBA Blower Assembly

FW00440-REF

H-32

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

Appendix I

Power Calibration

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

I-1

Calibrating Output Power

68P09255A57-O

Calibrating Output Power

Power Calibration
This procedure is a guide to expanding your system with multiple carriers while the system remains in service. This procedure also allows you to perform on site maintenance (replace defective boards and recalibrate) while the remainder of the site stays in service. Motorola recommends that you perform this procedure during a maintenance window. This procedure cannot be performed on BTSs with 4-to-1 combiners. The procedure can only be performed on one side of the BTS at one time. That is, LPAs 1, 2 ,3, 7, 8, 9 (feed antennas 1, 2, 3) can be calibrated while LPAs 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12 (feed antennas 4, 5, 6) remain in service and vice versa.

Equipment Warm up
NOTE

Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent test equipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes. If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter) has been replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so could introduce measurement errors, causing incorrect measurements and degradation to system performance.

CAUTION

Power Delta Calibration Introduction

The In-service calibration procedure has several differences from a normal calibration procedure. One of these is the use of a spectrum analyzer instead of a power meter to measure power. Power meters are broadband measurement devices and cannot be used to measure power during In-service Calibration since other carriers are operating. A spectrum analyzer can be used because it measures power at a given frequency. However, measuring power using a spectrum analyzer is less accurate than using a power meter. Therefore, you must compensate for the difference (delta) between the power meter and the spectrum analyzer.

I-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Calibrating Output Power

HP8921A Power Delta Calibration

Use the HP8921A Spectrum Analyzer to measure power during In-Service Calibration for 800 MHz systems. After the offset value has been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value. Follow the procedure in Table I-1 to perform the HP8921A Power Delta Calibration procedure.
NOTE

This procedure requires two HP8921A test sets.

Table I-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure Step Action

* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes. 1 2 Connect a short RF cable between the HP8921A Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see Figure I-1). Set the HP8921A signal source as follows: - Measure mode to CDMA Generator - Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency - CW RF Path to IQ - Output Port to Dupl - Data Source to Random - Amplitude to 0 dBm Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter. Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________. Turn off the source HP8921A signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.

3 4 5

NOTE
Leave the settings on the source HP8921A for convenience in the following steps. 6 7 8 Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8921A Duplex Out port and the measuring HP8921A RF-IN port (see Figure I-2). Ensure that the source HP8921A settings are the same as in Step 2. Set the measuring HP8921A as follows: - Measure mode to CDMA Anl - Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency - Input Attenuation to 0 dB - Input port to RF-IN - Gain to Auto - Analyzer Direction to Fwd Turn on the source HP8921A signal output. Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8921A as result B ________________________. Turn off the source HP8921A signal output and disconnect the equipment. . . . continued on next page
Jan 2003

9 10 11

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

I-3

Calibrating Output Power

Table I-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure Step 12 Action

68P09255A57-O

Compute the delta between HP437B and HP8921A using the following formula: Delta = A - B Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.

NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration.

Figure I-1: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP437B

HP 8921A

HP437B

SENSOR

Power Sensor Short RF Cable

DUPLEX OUT

FW00801

Figure I-2: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP8921A

Measurement HP8921A

Source HP8921A

RF IN/OUT

DUPLEX OUT

Short RF Cable

FW00802

Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration

Follow the procedure in Table I-2 to perform the Advantest 3465 Power Delta Calibration procedure.
I-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Calibrating Output Power

Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step

Action

* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes. On the Advantest R3465: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the CRT display. Press the ADVANCE key in the Measurement area of the control panel. Press the CDMA Sig CRT menu key. Press the FREQ key in the Entry area of the control panel. Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys. Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel. Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the keypad entry keys. Verify the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Mod key to toggle it OFF. Verify the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Output key to toggle it OFF. Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.

On the HP 437 Power Meter:

* IMPORTANT
For best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the power sensor, refer to Figure I-3. Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to ON. Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________. Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to OFF. Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the Spectrum Analyzer INPUT Port, refer to Figure I-4. Press the Output CRT menu key to change the Output to ON. Press the CW key in the Measurement area of the control panel. Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel. Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the keypad entry keys. Press the dB/div CRT menu key. Press the 10 dB/div CRT menu key. Press the FREQ key in Entry area of the control panel. Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys. Press the more 1/2 CRT menu key. . . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

I-5

Calibrating Output Power

Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure Step 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Action Press the Preselector CRT menu key to highlight 3.0G. Press the FORMAT key in the Display Control area of the control panel. Press the TRACE CRT menu key. Press the AVG A CRT menu key. Set AVG to 20 using keypad entry keys. Press the return CRT menu key. Press the SPAN key in the Entry area of the control panel. Press the Zero Span CRT menu key. Press the BW key in the Entry area of the control panel.

68P09255A57-O

Press the RBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL. using keypad entry keys enter 30 kHz. Set RBW to 30 kHz using keypad entry keys. Press the VBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL. Set VBW to 1 MHz using keypad entry keys. Press the Marker ON key in the Display Control area of the control panel. Record the Marker Level reading as result B ________________________. Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus the Advantest measurement. Delta = A - B Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.

NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration.

Figure I-3: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to HP437B

Advantest R3561L
RF OUT

Power Sensor Short RF Cable

HP437B

SENSOR

I
FW00803

I-6

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Calibrating Output Power

Figure I-4: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to R3465

RF OUT

R3561L Short RF Cable R3465

INPUT

FW00804

HP8935 Power Delta Calibration

Follow the procedure in Table I-3 to perform the HP8935 Power Delta Calibration procedure. Table I-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure Step Action

* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes. 1 2 Connect a short RF cable between the HP8935 Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see Figure I-5). Set the HP8935 signal source as follows: - Measure mode to CDMA Gen - Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency - CW RF Path to IQ - Output Port to Dupl - Data Source to Random - Amplitude to 0 dBm Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter. Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________. Turn off the source HP8935 signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.

3 4 5

NOTE
Leave the settings on the source HP8935 for convenience in the following steps. 6 7 8 Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8935 Duplex Out port and the RF-IN/OUT port (see Figure I-6). Ensure that the source HP8935 settings are the same as in Step 2. Set the measuring HP8935 as follows: - Measure mode to CDMA Anl - Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency - Input Attenuation to 0 dB - Input port to RF-IN - Gain to Auto - Anl Dir to Fwd . . . continued on next page
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

I-7

Calibrating Output Power

Table I-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure Step 9 10 11 12 13 Turn on the source HP8935 signal output. Set the Chn Pwr Cal to Calibrate and select to calibrate. Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8935 as result B ________________________. Turn off the source HP8935 signal output and disconnect the equipment. Action

68P09255A57-O

Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus the Advantest measurement. Delta = A - B Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.

NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration.

Figure I-5: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP437B

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935 HP437B

DUPLEX OUT

Figure I-6: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP8935

I
DUPLEX OUT

I-8

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Power Sensor Short RF Cable Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935
RF IN/OUT

SENSOR

FW00805

Short RF Cable

FW00806

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Calibrating Output Power

Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration

The Agilent E4406A transmitter tester and E4432B signal generator test equipment combination can be used for CDMA 2000 as well as IS-95A/B operation modes. The power delta calibration is performed on the E4406A, but the E4432B is required to generate the reference signal used to calculate the power delta offset. After the offset value has been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value in the LMF. Follow the procedure in Table I-4 to perform the Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration procedure. Table I-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure Step Action

* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the Test Set Calibration section of the Optimization/Calibration chapter in the SC 4812ET Optimization/ATP manual. 1 Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.

* IMPORTANT
For best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. 2 3 Connect a short RF cable from the E4432B RF OUTPUT connector the HP437 power meter power sensor (see Figure I-7). Set the E4432B signal generator as follows: - Press Preset to exit any modes for which the signal generator is configured. - Press Frequency and enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated on the numeric keypad. - Using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select the frequency range to be measured; for example MHz. - Press Amplitude and, using the numeric keypad, set signal amplitude to 0 (zero). - Using the soft keys, set the measurement type to dBm. On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON. - Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes. Measure and record the value reading on the HP437 power meter as result A____________________. On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF. - Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes. Disconnect the short RF cable from the HP437 power meter power sensor, and connect it to the RF INPUT connector on the E4406A transmitter tester (see Figure I-8). . . . continued on next page

4 5 6 7

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

I-9

Calibrating Output Power

Table I-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure Step 8 Action

68P09255A57-O

* IMPORTANT
Do not change the frequency and amplitude settings on the E4432B when performing the following steps. Set the E4406A as follows: - Press Preset to exit any modes for which the transmitter tester is configured - Press MODE and, using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select cdmaOne - Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select spectrum - Press Frequency and, using the soft keys, select Center Frequency - Enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated using the numeric keypad - Using the soft keys, select the frequency range to be measured; for example, MHz - Press Input/Output and, using the soft keys, select Input Atten - Using the numeric keypad, set Input Atten to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB - Using the soft keys, select External Atten and then select Mobile - Using the numeric keypad, set Mobile to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB - Using the soft keys, select Base - Using the numeric keypad, set Base to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB - Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select Channel Power

9 10 11 12

On the E4432B signal generator, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON. - Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes. Read the measured Channel Power from the E4406A screen display and record it as result B____________________. On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF. - Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes. Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus the Agilent measurement. Delta = A - B Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.

NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration.

I-10

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Calibrating Output Power

Figure I-7: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to HP437

AGILENT E4432B AND E4406A HP437B

RF OUTPUT

SENSOR

Power Sensor Short RF Cable

FW00858

Figure I-8: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A

AGILENT E4432B AND E4406A

RF OUTPUT

Short RF Cable

RF INPUT

FW00859

In-Service Calibration
NOTE

This feature does NOT have fault tolerance at this time. The system has no safe-guards to stop you from doing something that will take the BTS out of service. If possible, perform this procedure during a maintenance window. Follow the procedures in this section precisely, otherwise the entire BTS will most likely go OUT OF SERVICE. At the CBSC, only perform operations on expansion hardware when it is in the OOS_MANUAL state. The operator must be trained in the LMF operation prior to performing this procedure.

Prerequisites S Expansion hardware has been added in the CBSC database, and the
CDF file has been generated.

S The expansion devices have been inserted into the C-CCP cage and
are in the OOS_MANUAL state at the CBSC.

S The site specific cdf (with the expansion hardware) and cal files have
been loaded onto the LMF.

S The LMF has the same code and dds files as the CBSC to download.
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

I-11

Calibrating Output Power

NOTE

68P09255A57-O

Do not download code or data to any cards other than those you are working on. Downloading code or data to other cards will take the site OUT OF SERVICE. The code file version numbers must match the version numbers on the other cards in the frame. If the numbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE. The BTS-#.cdf, CBSC-#.cdf, and CAL files for this BTS must have come from the CBSC.

S Test equipment has been configured per Figure I-9 or Figure I-10. S An RFDS (or at a minimum a directional coupler), whose loss is
already known, must be in line to perform the in-service calibration.

S Test equipment has been calibrated after 1 hour warm up. S A short RF cable and two BNC-N adapters are available to perform
Cable Calibration.

S The Power Delta Calibration has been performed (see Table I-1,
Table I-2, or Table I-3).

I-12

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Calibrating Output Power

Figure I-9: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS

TEST SETS
Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935
SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

Optimization/ATP SET UP
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED ANTENNA GROUP. 20 DB PAD (FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ) 10 DB PAD RX (FOR 800 MHZ) TEST CABLE DUPLEX OUT ANTENNA TX TEST CABLE RF IN/OUT

HP-IB TO GPIB BOX

COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET

EXT REF IN

EVEN SECOND/ SYNC IN

DUPLEX OUT

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

RF IN/OUT RX TEST CABLE LAN A

20 DB PAD (FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ) 10 DB PAD (FOR 800 MHZ) RFDS DUPLEXER DIRECTIONAL COUPLER FWD COUPLED PORT

IEEE 488 GPIB BUS

TX TEST CABLE

GPIB CABLE

RX ANTENNA PORT

TX ANTENNA PORT

BTS
FREQ MONITOR SYNC MONITOR CSM LAN B

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

S MODE DATA FORMAT BAUD RATE

ON

GPIB ADRS RS232-GPIB INTERFACE BOX

G MODE

RS232 NULL MODEM CABLE

10BASET/ 10BASE2 CONVERTER

CDMA LMF

UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

INTERNAL PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD REF FW00759

I-13

Calibrating Output Power

Figure I-10: IS-95 A/B/C Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS
TEST SETS
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
TO EXT TRIG ON REAR OF SPECTRUM ANALYZER NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED ANTENNA GROUP. RX TEST CABLE

68P09255A57-O

Optimization/ATP SET UP

RF OUT 50 OHMS

COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET SIGNAL GENERATOR EXT REF IN EVEN SECOND/ SYNC IN

INPUT 50 OHM BNC T

ANTENNA

TX TEST CABLE 20 DB PAD (FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ) 10 DB PAD (FOR 800 MHZ) RF INPUT 50 OHMS

EXT TRIG IN MOD TIME BASE IN (EXT REF IN) RF OUT 50 OHM

IEEE 488 GPIB BUS

RFDS DUPLEXER DIRECTIONAL COUPLER

FWD COUPLED PORT

NOTE:

FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

BNC T GPIB CABLE

SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM ANALYZER

RX CABLE

TX CABLE

Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)

RX ANTENNA PORT RF OUT 50 OHMS TX ANTENNA PORT

BTS
FREQ MONITOR RF INPUT 50 OHMS SYNC MONITOR CSM TO 10 MHZ IN (EXT REF IN) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER LAN B LAN A 10BASET/ 10BASE2 CONVERTER 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

S MODE DATA FORMAT BAUD RATE

ON

GPIB ADRS RS232-GPIB INTERFACE BOX

G MODE

TO TRIGGER IN ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER TO PATTERN TRIG IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR

RS232 NULL MODEM CABLE

BNC T SYNC MONITOR EVEN SEC TICK PULSE REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR 19.6608 MHZ CLOCK REFERENCE FROM CSM BOARD UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)

CDMA LMF

INTERNAL PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD REF. FW00759

I-14

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Calibrating Output Power

Follow the procedure in Table I-5 to perform the In-Service Calibration. Table I-5: In-Service Calibration

Step

Action

* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes. 1 Set up the LMF for In-Service Calibration: - Start the LMF by double-clicking the LMF icon on the Windows desktop. - Click Tools>Options from the menu bar at the login screen. - Check the applicable spectrum analyzer check box and the signal generator check box on the Test Equipment tab. Ensure that the GPIB address is 18 for the CDMA analyzer and 1 for the signal generator. - Uncheck any other other equipment that is selected. - Click the Apply button. - Select the BTS Options tab in the LMF Option window. - Check the In-Service Calibration check box. - Click the Apply button. - Click the Dismiss button to close the LMF Option window. Login to the target BTS: - Select the target BTS icon. - Click the Login button at the login screen. Measure the Cable Loss using the Cable Calibration function: - Click Util>Cable Calibration from the menu bar at the main window. - Set the desired channel(s) and select TX and RX CABLE CAL at the cable calibration pop up window. - Click the OK button to perform cable calibration. - Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the cable loss measurement.

NOTE
- The measured value is input automatically to the cable loss file. - To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss>TX or RX. 4 Add the spectrum analyzer power delta to the Cable Loss. - To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss>TX or RX. - Add the value computed in Table I-1, Table I-2, or Table I-3 to the TX Cable Loss.

NOTE
Be sure to include the sign of the value. The following examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings: - Example: 5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = 6.20 dBm - Example: 5.65 dBm + (-0.29 dBm) = 5.36 dBm - Example: -5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = -5.10 dBm - Example: -5.65 dBm + (-0.29 dBm) = -5.94 dBm . . . continued on next page

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

I-15

Calibrating Output Power

Table I-5: In-Service Calibration Step 5 Action

68P09255A57-O

Input the Coupler Loss for the TX and RX tests: - Click Util>Edit>Coupler Loss>TX or RX from the menu bar at the main window. - Input the appropriate coupler loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken at the time of BTS installation. - Click the Save button. - Click the Dismiss button to close the window. - To view the coupler loss file, click Util>Examine>Coupler Loss>TX or RX. Have the CBSC operator put the redundant BBX OOS_MANUAL.

! CAUTION
Be sure to download OOS devices only. Loading in-service devices takes them OUT OF SERVICE and can result in dropped calls. The code file version numbers must match the version numbers on the other cards in the frame. If the numbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.

NOTE
Be sure to include the redundant BBX in steps 9, 10, and 11. 7 Download code and data to the target devices: - Click Tools>Update NextLoad>CDMA to set the code version that will be downloaded. - Select the BTS(s) you need, check the appropriate code version in the pop up window, and click the Save button to close. - Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture. - Click Device>Download>Code/Data to start downloading code. - Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture. - Click Device>Download>Data to start downloading data. . . . continued on next page

I-16

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Calibrating Output Power

Table I-5: In-Service Calibration

Step

Action

! CAUTION
Perform the In-service Calibration procedure on OOS devices only. 8 Select the desired test: - Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture. - Click Tests>[desired test] from the menu bar at the main window. - Select the target carrier and confirm the channel number in the pop up window. - Leave the Verify BLO check box checked. - From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern. - Click the OK button to start calibration. - Follow the on-screen instructions, except, do not connect to the BTS antenna port, connect to the directional coupler (fwd) port associated with the on screen prompt antenna port.

NOTE S Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only. S Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This requires
an MCC to be selected.

S Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values for all
the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.

S Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the gain
for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file. 9 Save the result and download the BLO data to the target BBX(s): - Click the Save Result button on the result screen. The window closes automatically. Logout from the BTS and close the LMF session: - Click BTS>Logout to close the BTS connection. - Close the LMF window. Restore the new bts-*.cal file to the CBSC. Enable the target device(s) from the CBSC.

10

11 12

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

I-17

Calibrating Output Power

Notes

68P09255A57-O

I-18

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

Appendix J

Companion Frame Optimization

J
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

J-1

Optimizing the Companion Frame

68P09255A57-O

Optimizing the Companion Frame

Optimizing the TX section
The optimization/ATP procedure for the transmit side of the Companion Frame is identical to that of the SC4812ET BTS. Table J-1: Optimizing the TX section of the Companion Frame n Step 1 2 Action Please refer to the TX Optimization/ATP - Chapter 3 of this manual for step-by-step TX Optimization/ATP instructions for the standalone frame Run the TX tests.

Figure J-1: Cabling of SC 4812ET Companion BTS to SC 4812ET Companion BTS (3 Sector)
RX EXPANSION
RX Ant-1A TX1 C1 C3 C2 C4

RX1A

RX

Ant-2A

TX2

C1 C3

C2 C4

RX2A

RX

Ant-3A

TX3

C1 C3

C2 C4

RX3A

RX1A RX2A RX3A

MPC-A

1A 2A 3A

EMPC-B

1B 2B 3B

SC4812ET Companion (Starter)

SURGE ARRESTORS

J
J-2

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

C6 C8 C5 C7 RX TX1 RX1A C6 C8 C5 C7 RX TX2 RX2A C6 C8 C5 C7 RX TX3 RX3A 1A 2A 3A

Ant-1A

Ant-2A

Ant-3A

MPC-A

RX1A RX2A RX3A

EMPC-B

1B 2B 3B

SC4812ET Companion

FW00407

Jan 2003

68P09255A57-O

Optimizing the Companion Frame

Optimizing the RX section

RX (Main) Optimization/ATP
To test the RX Main antenna system follow the instructions in Table J-2 and refer to illustration Figure J-1(3-sector configuration). Table J-2: Optimizing the RX (Main) section of the Companion Frame n Step 1 2 3 Action Connect the RX test cables to the antenna ports 1A-3A (for 3-sector optimization) or antenna ports 1A-6A (for 6-sector optimization). Login the LMF and select MPC (see Figure J-2 for display screen and field location). Run the RX tests.

RX (Diversity) Optimization/ATP (Single Frame)

To test the RX Diversity antenna system follow the instructions in Table J-3. Table J-3: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Single Frame n Step 1 2 3 Action Connect the RX test cables to the expansion ports on the I/O plates labeled 1B-3B (for 3-sector optimization) or expansion ports 1B-6B (for 6-sector optimization). Login the LMF under EMPC (see Figure J-2 for display screen and field location). Run the RX tests.

RX (Diversity) Optimization/ATP (Two Frame)

To test the RX Diversity antenna configuration on a two frame Companion BTS system follow the instructions in Table J-4. Table J-4: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Two Frame Companion Site n Step 1 Action Connect RX expansion cables from the expansion ports on the other Companion frame labeled 1A-3A (for 3-sector optimization) or expansion ports 1A-6A (for 6-sector optimization) to the 1B-3B (for 3-sector optimization) or expansion ports 1B-6B (for 6-sector optimization) see Figure J-1 for an illustration of the configuration.

NOTE
Connect the cables from the 2nd frame A ports to the B ports of the 1st frame. 2 Login using the LMF select MPC (see Figure J-2 for field location on LMF display screen)

NOTE
- Although the test will be done to one frame, the RX cable will be connected to the other frames corresponding antenna ports. - The other frame has to be powered up and include all the RX Path Components.

J
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

J-3

Optimizing the Companion Frame

Figure J-2: WinLMF Display Screen

68P09255A57-O

J
J-4

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003

Index

Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Index-1

Index

68P09255A57-O

Numbers
10BaseT/10Base2 Converter, 1-8 2-way Splitter, 1-12 3-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table, H-23 4812ET RF Cabinet Internal FRU Locations, H-4 6-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table, H-24

ATP generate failure report, 4-13 generate report, 4-13 test matrix/detailed optimization, C-2 ATP - Reduced, 4-2 ATP Report, 4-13 ATP Test Procedure, 4-7

B
Basic Troubleshooting Overview, 6-2 Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries), 2-13 Bay Level offset calibration failure, 6-6 BBX, gain set point vs SIF output considerations, D-2 BBX2, 1-20 BBX2 Connector, 6-12 BBX2 LED Status Combinations, 6-23 Broad Band Receiver. See BBX BTS Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-38 LMF connection, 3-15, 3-22 system software download, 3-4 BTS Cabinet, 1-24 BTS login, GUI environment, 3-31 Create CAL File, 3-103

A
Acceptance Test Procedures ATP , 1-3 ACTIVE LED GLI2, 6-20 MCC, 6-23 Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address, F-5 Advantest R3465, 3-59 Advantest R3465 Communications Test Set GPIB Address, F-9 Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address, F-6 Agilent 8935 Series E6380 (formerly HP 8935) Test Set GPIB Address, F-7 Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address, F-3 Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address, F-4 Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information, 3-18 ALARM LED, GLI2, 6-20 Alarm Monitor window, 3-115 Alarm Reporting Display, 3-115 All Cal/Audit procedure, 3-95 All Cal/Audit Test, 3-101 All inclusive, TX ATP test outline - CCP shelf 1, primary, 4-13 All tests fail on a single antenna, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-17 AMR, 1-20 Applying AC Power, 2-7
Index-2

C
C-CCP Backplane, H-7 C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, Procedure, 6-12 C-CCP shelf, 1-20 cable calibration, automatic, test set-up, 3-64 Advantest R3267/R3562, 3-64 Advantest R3465, 3-63 Agilent 8935, 3-63 Agilent E4406A/E4432B, 3-64, 3-65, 3-74 CyberTest, 3-63 HP 8921A, 3-63 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB , F-15, F-17 Calibrate BLO, 3-88 Calibrate Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer, 3-83 Calibrating, Test Equipment, 3-81 Calibrating Cables, Overview, 3-82
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Index
Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels, 4-11 Code Domain Power/Noise, 4-10 Command Line Interface, 3-30 Communication test set, rear panel, F-15, F-17 Communications test set. See Test equipment Components Located on CIO Card, H-11 Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-58 Connector Functionality Backplane, Troubleshooting, 6-11 Troubleshooting, Backplane, 6-11 Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC, 5-3 Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF, 3-11 Copy Files from LMF to Diskette, 5-2 Copying CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC, 5-2 Copying CAL files to the CBSC, 5-3 CSM, 1-20 and LFR primary functions, 3-48 clock source, select, 3-45 LEDs, 3-48 CSM clock source, select, 3-45 CSM frequency verification, 3-50 CSM LED Status Combinations, 6-18 Customer I/O, 1-21 CyberTest, 3-59

Calibrating Test Cable Setup, PCS Interface HP83236B, F-24 Calibrating Test Cabling using Communications System Analyzer, 3-83 Calibration data file calibration, BLO, 3-89 In-Service, I-15 power meter, Gigatronics 8542B, F-33 Calibration Audit failure, 6-7 calibration data file, description of, BLO, 3-89 Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer, 6-3 Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-3 Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-4 Cannot ENABLE device, 6-5 Cannot Log into cell-site, 6-2 Cannot perform carrier measurement, 6-9 Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Power measurement, 6-8 Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offset measurement, 6-8 Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-8 CCD, 1-20 CCP, shelf 1 - all inclusive TX ATP test outline, primary, 4-13 CDF, 3-3 site equipage verification, 3-4 site type and equipage data information, 2-2 CDMA allocation diagram for the North American, cellular telephone frequency spectrum, E-4 optimization/ATP test matrix, C-2 cdpower test, 4-10 Cell Site equipage verification, 2-2 types configuration, 3-3 Cell Site Data File. See CDF Cell Site Field Engineer CFE, 1-3 Channel Service Unit, 3-16 CIO, 1-20 CIO Connectors, 6-12 CLI, 3-30 Clock Sync Module. See CSM
Jan 2003

D
DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame), 2-9 DC Power Problems, C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-15 DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations, 6-18 Detailed, optimization/ATP test matrix, C-2 Devices, download. See Download Digital Control Problems, 6-13 C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-13 Digital Multimeter, 1-10 Directional Coupler, 1-10 Download See also Devices BTS, 3-40 BTS system software, 3-4 Download BLO Procedure, 3-97 download ROM and RAM code. See ROM code
Index-3

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Index
Download/Enable MCCs, 3-47 Download/Enable MGLIs, 3-43 Duplexer/Directional Coupler DDC, 1-19, 1-20, 1-21, 1-26

68P09255A57-O

E
Enable CSMs & BDCs, 3-46 Equipment Overview, 1-16 Equipment warm-up, 3-62 Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-38 Transceiver, 1-8 transceiver, 1-8 ETIB I/O Connectors, H-13 Every test fails, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-16

GPIB Address Advantest R3267, F-5 Advantest R3465, F-9 Advantest R3562, F-6 Agilent (formerly HP) 8935, F-7 Agilent E4406A, F-3 Agilent E4432B, F-4 Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter, F-12 Hewlett Packard HP8921a & HP83236A/B, F-8 HP437 Power Meter, F-11 Motorola CyberTest, F-10 GPIB Cables, 1-10 GPIB Interface Box, RS232, F-13 GPS, receiver operation, test data sheets, A-7 GPS Initialization/Verification estimated position accuracy, 3-51 surveyed position accuracy, 3-51 GPS satellite system, 3-46 Graphical User Interface, 3-24 Group Line Interface. See GLI GUI, 3-24

F
fer test, 4-11 Files, calibration data file, BLO, 3-89 Folder Structure Overview, 3-7, 3-13 Foreword, xx FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-19 Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-11

H
Hardware Requirements, 1-7 Hewlett Packard HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address, F-8 High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, 1-12 High-impedance Conductive Wrist Strap, 1-11 HP 437B, 3-59 HP 83236A, F-18 HP 8921, 3-59 HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address, F-11 HP8921A, F-18 HSO, 1-20 HSO Initialization/Verification, 3-49

G
Gain set point, D-2 General Safety, xxii General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-6 Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address, F-12 Gigatronics 8542B power meter, illustration, F-12, F-33 Gigatronics Power Meter, 3-59 GLI. See Master (MGLI2) and Slave (SGLI2) Group Line Interface GLI Connector, 6-11 GLI Ethernet A and B Connections, 6-12 GLI2, 1-20 LED Status, 6-20 GPIB, F-14, F-18, F-19
Index-4

I
I and Q values, B-2 In-Service Calibration, I-15 Initial HP8921A setup, F-24 Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminary operations, 2-3 Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-5 Installation and Update Procedures, 3-10
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Index
Manual, layout, 1-2 MASTER LED, GLI2, 6-20 MCC LED Status Combinations, 6-23 MCC/CE, 4-10 MGLI2, board detail, MMI port connections, 5-5 MMI common connections, 3-37 MMI Connection, 3-36 MMI Connector CSM, 6-19 GLI2, 6-21 MMI Connectors, MCC, 6-23 MMI equipment setup, 3-37 Model SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit, 1-9 Module status indicators, 6-17 Motorola, SC9600 Base Transceiver Subsystem, 1-2 Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address, F-10 MPC, 1-20 Multi Channel Card. See MCC Multi-FER test Failure, 6-9

Intercabinet I/O, 1-22 Internal FRU, 1-25 IS-97 specification, B-2 ISB Inter Shelf Bus connectors, 6-11

L
LAN, BTS frame interconnect, illustration, 3-38 LAN Connectors, GLI2, 6-21 LED, CSM, 3-48 LED Status, GLI2, 6-20 LED Status Combinations for all Modules except GLI2 CSM BBX2 MCC24 MCC8E, 6-18 LFR, 1-20 receiver operation, test data sheets, A-8 LIF, Load Information File, 3-9 Line Build Out parameters configure, 5-5 verify, 5-4 LMF, F-14, F-19 BTS connection, 3-22 platform requirements, 1-7 to BTS connection, 3-15, 3-22 view CDF information, 3-4 LMF BTS displays, 3-24 LMF computer and software, 1-7 LMF Removal, 5-7 Load Center Wiring, 2-6 Load Information File, 3-9 Loading Code, 3-40 Local Area Network (LAN) Tester, 1-11 Local Maintenance Facility. See LMF Logging In to a BTS, 3-31 Logging Out, 3-34 LORAN-C Initialization/Verification, 3-56 LPA errors, 6-5 LPA Module LED, 6-24 LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations, 6-24 LPAC Interface Board, H-12

N
NECF, 3-3 New Installations, 1-5 New installations, 1-5 No AMR control, 6-13 No BBX2 control in the shelf, 6-14 No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-15 No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specific GLI2 BBX2 or Switch board, 6-15 No GLI2 Control through span line connection, 6-13 No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-13 No or missing MCC24 channel elements, 6-14 No or missing span line traffic, 6-14 North American, cellular telephone system frequency spectrum, CDMA allocation, E-4 Null modem cable detail, 1-8

O
Online Help, 3-37 Optimization, 1-3 Optimization Manual Scope and Layout, 1-2
Index-5

M
major components, 1-16
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Index
optimization/ATP, test set-up, 3-69 Advantest R3267/R3562 DRDCs, 3-72 TRDCs, 3-74 Advantest R3465, 3-69 Agilent 8935 DRDCs, 3-71 TRDCs, 3-73 Agilent E4406A/E4432B DRDCs, 3-71 TRDCs, 3-73 CyberTest, 3-69 HP 8921A, 800 MHz, 3-70 HP 8921A, 1.9 GHz, 3-70 Optional Test Equipment, 1-11 Optional test equipment, frequency counter, 1-11 Oscilloscope, 1-11 Preliminary operations cell Site types, 2-2 test data sheets, A-4

68P09255A57-O

Prepare to Leave the Site External test equipment removal, 5-2 LMF Removal, 5-7 Reestablish OMC-R control, 5-7 Verify T1/E1, 5-7 Prepare to leave the site re-connect BTS IFM connector, 5-7 re-connect BTS T1 spans, 5-7 Procedures to Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4 Pseudorandom Noise. See PN ptoff test, 4-9 Punch Block, 3-18 Pushbuttons and Connectors, GLI2, 6-21 PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs, MCC, 6-23 PWR/ALM LED BBX2, 6-23 CSM, 6-18 DC/DC Converter, 6-18 generic, 6-18 MCC, 6-23 MPC and EMPC Card, H-21

P
Periodic optimization, 1-5 Pilot Time Offset. See PN Ping, 3-38 PN offset programming information, B-2 offset usage, B-2 PN Offset, B-2 PN offset per sector, B-2 PN Offset Usage , B-2 Power Delta Calibration Advantest, I-5 HP8921A, I-3 HP8935, I-7 Power Input, 6-11 Power Meter illustration, F-11, F-31 Pre-calibration, F-31 Power meter calibration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-33 illustration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-12, F-33 Power Supply Module Interface, 6-11 Pre-calibration, Power Meter, F-31 Pre-power tests, test data sheets, A-5
Index-6

R
RAM code, described, 3-40 Re-connect BTS IFM connector, 5-7 Re-connect BTS T1 Spans, 5-7 Receive Distribution Card RXDC, 1-26 Reduced ATP, 4-2 Reduced ATP passes but forward link problem prevails, 6-7 Reestablish OMC-R control, 5-7 Related Publications, 1-13 Removing and Installing LPAs for the SC 4812ET, H-8 Required Documents, 1-13 Required documents, 1-25 Required Test Equipment, Ethernet LAN transceiver, 1-8 Required test equipment, communications system analyzer, 1-9 Required Test Equipment and Software, 1-6
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

68P09255A57-O

Index
Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-86 Setting Control Port, 3-16 Setting TX Coupler Loss Value, 3-87 SGLI2, board detail, MMI port connections, 5-5 SIF, output considerations vs BBX gain set point, D-2 Site, equipage verification, 3-4 Site checklist, verification data sheets, A-3 Site equipage, CDF/NECF, 3-3 Site expansion, 1-5 Span Framing Format configure, 5-5 verify, 5-4 SPAN I/O Functional Description, Introduction, H-14 Span Line (T1/E1) Verification Equipment, 1-11 Span Line connector , 6-11 Span Parameter Configuration set, procedure, 5-5 verification, procedure, 5-4 Span Problems no control link, Troubleshooting, 6-24 SPANS LED, GLI2, 6-20 Spectrum Analyzer, 1-11 Spectrum Analyzer , HP8594E, 3-59 STATUS LED, GLI2, 6-20 SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-19 System Connectivity Test, F-18

RESET Pushbutton, GLI2, 6-21 Resetting BTS modules, 5-2 Revision History, xxiv RF Adapters, 1-11 RF Attenuators, 1-10 RF Cabinet Internal Assemblies and FRUs, 1-19 50 Pair Punchblock, H-27 RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration, 3-88 RF Test Cable, 1-11 RFDS Cabling Details, H-23 RFDS calibration description, 3-112 procedure, 3-113 RFDS FRU, H-15 RFDS Location, SC 4812ET, 1-23 RFDS parameters, 3-104 checking, 3-105 setting, 3-105 RFDS Test Subscriber Unit, 3-41 RFDS TSU Calibration Channel Frequencies, 3-112 rho test, 4-9 ROM code described, 3-40 downloading, G-2, J-2, J-3 procedure, G-3 RS-232 to GPIB Interface, 1-8 RS232 GPIB Interface Box, F-13 Rubidium Standard Timebase, 3-59 RX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-17 RX and TX paths fail, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-17

T
T1, isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-15 Telco Interface Board TIB, 1-26 Test data sheets Alarm verification, A-18 general optimization checklist, A-6 GPS receiver operation, A-7 initial power tests, A-5 LFR receiver operation, A-8 pre-power tests, A-5 preliminary operations, A-4 RX antenna VSWR, A-17 SCLPA convergence, A-9 site checklist, A-3 TX antenna VSWR, A-17 TX BLO, A-10, A-15 verification of test equipment used, A-2 Test Equipment, Calibrating, 3-81
Index-7

S
SC 4812 BTS Optimization/ATP Test Matrix, C-3 SC 4812ET BTS Combiner, H-9, H-10, H-17, H-18, H-19, H-20, H-22, H-23, H-25 SCLPA, convergence test data sheets, A-9 Selecting Test Equipment, 3-78 Set Antenna Map Data, 3-110 Set RFDS Configuration Data, 3-111 Set Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-5
Jan 2003

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Index
Test equipment See also Optional test equipment; Required test equipment system analyzer, 1-9 verification data sheets, A-2 Test equipment connections , F-14 preliminary Agilent E4406A/E4432B set-up, F-23 Test Equipment Setup Calibration for TX Bay Level Offset, F-28 Test Equipment Setup Chart, 3-60 Test equipment setup RF path calibration, 3-92 Timing Reference Cables, 1-10 Transmit TX path audit, 3-98 Transmit TX path calibration, 3-92 Transmit/Receive Module TRX, 1-25 Troubleshooting DC Power Problems, 6-15 Span Problems no control link, 6-24 Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP), 6-7 TSU NAM, programming description, 3-108 parameter ranges, 3-109 parameters, 3-108 procedure, 3-114 TX antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-17, A-18 BLO test data sheets, A-10, A-15 TX and RX Frequency vs Channel , E-3 TX Audit Test, 3-98 TX calibration, 3-94 All Cal/Audit, 3-95 set-up, 3-66 Advantest R3267, 3-68 Advantest R3465, 3-67 Agilent 8935, 3-66 Agilent E4406A, 3-68 CyberTest, 3-66 HP 8921A, 3-67 tx fine adjust, B-2

68P09255A57-O

TX Mask Verification, spectrum analyzer display, illustration, 4-8 TX Output Acceptance Tests - Introduction Pilot time offset, 4-6 Spectral purity TX mask, 4-6 Waveform Quality (rho), 4-6 TX Path Calibration, 3-88 TX path calibration, 3-94 TX/RX OUT Connections, 4-4 txmask test, 4-7

U
Updating CDMA LMF Files, 5-2

V
Verify, test equipment used, test data sheets, A-2 Verify GLI ROM code load, 3-42 Verify Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-4

W
Walsh channels, 4-10

X
XCVR Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-11 Xircom Model PE3-10B2, LMF to BTS connection, 3-22

Index-8

1X SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R2.16.1.x

Jan 2003